Standard Safety Practices Manual - Microsoft · The Standard Safety Practices Manual is to be used...

Standard SafetyPractices Manual

BP Canada Energy CompanyDecember, 2010 OMS CP-32-00-04

This Manual is an Uncontrolled Copy To View Most Recent Version of Contents Refer to the OMS Navigator\\bp1calis002\grpdata\OMS\4 Proce-dures\4.1 Procedures and Practices\EandP Procedures Document Owners: OMS Review Forum

OMS CP 32-00-04

EVERYONE HAS AN OBLIGATION TO STOP WORK THAT IS UNSAFE

i

Standard SafetyPractices ManualBP Canada Energy CompanyDecember, 2010OMS CP 32-00-04

This Manual is an Uncontrolled Copy To View Most Recent Version of Contents Refer to the OMS Navigator \\bp1calis002\grpdata\OMS\4 Procedures\4.1 Procedures and Practices\EandP Procedures OMS Review Forum

OMS CP 32-00-04

Standard Safety Practices Manual

i



ii


iiiii

BP Canada Regional PRoduCtion unit SaFetY PRaCtiCeS Manual

Accident prevention and efficient operations go hand in hand; therefore, incorporating safe work practices in our day-to-day operation is essential to to increase efficiency and prevent accidents, harm to people and damage to the environment. This manual provides safe guidelines for all workforce to use in addressing the potential risks associated with each task and when developing safe work methods. Guidelines specified are in accordance with governing regulations, BP Canada requirements, and recommended good working practices. It will be necessary to incorporate these practices into the specific situations that will arise in each operation.The manual covers many, but by no means all, of the jobs and situations encountered in our operations. Should situations arise which are not adequately covered in the manual, please bring it to the attention of your immediate supervisor.The definition of a BP representative in this manual is taken to include employees, contractors, consultants, and service representatives who have the authority and are duly qualified to direct work on a the behalf of BP. A BP designate is an individual who has authority to direct a defined scope of work specified by the BP Representative.

WoRKSiteS

The following must be available at all BP Canada worksites:• Canada RPU and Site Specific OMS Procedures• Local Emergency Response Plants• Material Safety Data Sheets• Standard Safety Practices Manual• Applicable Regulatory Requirements

ii


ii



iiiiii

deViationS

The Standard Safety Practices Manual is to be used as a living and working document, and as such must include provisions to handle warranted deviations. The Manual contains practices in accordance with governing regulations, BP Canada requirements and recommended or good working practices. Government Regulations and BP Canada requirements are distinguishable throughout the document by the use of the words Shall, Will and Must. Recommended or good working practices are recognized by the use of the words Should, May and Could. The following outlines how to handle deviations in our day-to-day operations to ensure the safe work methods are practiced.

deViationS FRoM:

A. RecommendedorGoodWorkingPractices(Should, May, Could) Authorized by the RPU Safety Function and applicable operating unit Leadership team.

B. GovernmentRegulationsorBPCanadaRequirements

(Shall, Will, Must) Authorized by Safety Department (Performance

Unit) and the applicable Government Agencies.Frequent deviations in either case should be submitted to the RPU Safety Advisors for review and adoption if warranted. Procedures for submitting a suggested revision are outlined in the subsequent pages.Note: Without exception, applicable federal, territorial, provincial and municipal regulatory requirements take precedence if they’re more stringent than the requirements outlined in the SSPM.

iii



iv


viv

ReViSion PRoCeduRe

To suggest a revision to the SSPM;The Standard Safety Practices Manual is intended to be a “living” document, and suggestions for revisions from all the workforce will be welcomed. To initiate a revision, please follow these procedures:1. Forward request to the Field HSSE Advisor

responsible for your Department/Area.2. Field HSSE Advisor to forward to RPU Safety Advisors as warranted.All suggested revisions will be reviewed by the RPU HSE team and the OMS document review forum as per applicable protocols.

iv


iv



vv

Standard Safety Practices ManualtaBle oF ContentS

Control of Work (CoW) PracticesCONTROL OF WORK POLICY AND PRACTICE 1HAZARD ASSESSMENT AND RISK MANAGEMENT PRACTICE 29 SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS (SIMOPS) PRACTICE 46 WORK AUTHORIZATION PRACTICE 57

Control of Work (CoW) Permitted PracticesCONFINED SPACE ENTRY PRACTICE 67 GROUND DISTURBANCE PRACTICE 91 HOT WORK PRACTICE 106 LIFTING OPERATIONS PRACTICE 117 WORKING ON ENERGY SYSTEMS PRACTICE 138 Safe Work Standards/PracticesGOLDEN RULES OF SAFETY 166 ASBESTOS 167 ALL TERRAIN VEHICLE (ATV) PRACTICE 168 ATMOSPHERIC MONITORING 179 CANADIAN NUCLEAR SAFETY COMMISSION (CNSC) REGULATED ISOTOPES 183 CUTTING DEVICES 186 DRAINING AND DEPRESSURING 187 ELECTRICAL 188 ELECTRICAL STORMS AND LIGHTHING STRIKES 194 EQUIPMENT SHUTDOWN SYSTEMS, TEMPORARY BY-PASS 196 EYEWASH STATIONS & DELUGE SHOWERS 197 FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT 201 FIRE RESISTANT WORKWEAR PRACTICE 203 FIRST AID EQUIPMENT AND MEDIC 213 GAS AND LIQUID SAMPLING 214

v



vi

Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe.

vi

GUARDS 216HAND PROTECTION PRACTICE 217GUIDELINES FOR FIELD VISITS 222HOUSEKEEPING 224HOT AND ODD BOLTING PRACTICE 226HYDRATES, IDENTIFICATION AND REMOVAL 242HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2S) SAFETY 244INCIDENT/ACCIDENT REPORTING 247JEWELRY 248LADDERS AND SCAFFOLDING – PORTABLE 248LADDERS, STAIRS AND PLATFORMS - FIXED 252LINE THAWING PRACTICE 256MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE PRACTICE 260MANUAL LIFTING AND HANDLING HEAVY OR AWKWARD LOADS 297METER PROVING 300MOBILE STEAMERS 302MOVING HEAVY EQUIPMENT ON BP WORKSITES 303NOISE EXPOSURE & HEARING CONSERVATION 307PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 310PETS 317PIGGING OF PIPELINES AND FLOWLINES 317POSITIVE AIR SHUT-OFFREQUIREMENTS (PASO) 319PRACTICE FOR WORKING IN A COMBUSTIBLE GAS ENVIRONMENT 320PRESSURE SAFETY VALVES 331PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTING 333PURGING 336


vi


vi


vii

RADIOACTIVE OR NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (NORM) 339RAIL CAR LOADING 342RESPIRATORY PROTECTION 344HSSE MEETINGS 349SAFETY STANDBY 352SAND BLASTING / ABRASIVE BLASTING 352SECURITY 354SERVICE RIG SAFETY 355SIGNS AND BARRICADES 362STRESS RELIEVING 363SWABBING 364TANK GAUGING 368TANK TRUCK LOADING /UNLOADING 369THREADED CONNECTIONS 371TOOLS 371TRAINING 373VEHICLE STANDARD AND ROADSAFETY PRACTICE 375WELDING PRACTICES – GENERAL 389WELL SERVICING WORK PLAN 394WELL TESTING 397WIRELINE OPERATIONS 402WELL WORK - HAND OVER BETWEEN OPERATIONS AND WELLS TEAMS 404WORKING ALONE / WORKING IN ISOLATION PRACTICE 405WORKING AT HEIGHTS PRACTICE 410


vii


viii

ReFeRenCeS

• Alberta Occupational Health and Safety Act, Regulation, and Code (2009), and associated Guides http://www.employment.alberta.ca

• British Columbia Workers Compensation Act, Occupational Health and Safety Regulation, Policies, Standards and Guidelines http://www2.worksafebc.com

• Saskatchewan Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1993 and Occupational Health and Safety Regulations, 1996. http://www.publications.gov.sk.ca

• Canada Labour Code and Regulations http://laws.justice.gc.ca

• Canada Standards Association (CSA) Standards referenced in federal, provincial, and territorial OHS Regulations http://ohsviewaccess.csa.ca/

• Internal BP References http://omsnavigator.bpweb.bp.com


viii

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e


1

ContRol oF WoRK (CoW) PoliCY and PRaCtiCe

1 Policy

For the policy document that defines the requirements for Control of Work (CoW) processes in BP, and forms the basis for this practice, see BP Group Defined Practice for Control of Work (GDP 4.5-0001).For a schematic showing the hierarchy of practice documents under the BP Control ofWork Policy, see Figure 1.

2 Practice

The CoW practice outlines the Canada Regional Production Unit’s (RPU) CoW processes and systems, and the responsibilities of people involved in planning, risk management, authorization and execution of work at BP-managed operations.The practice provides guidelines for executing and controlling work, consistently carried out across Canada RPU operations. Such guidelines will enable work planners and controllers to assess the risks involved in execution of work, and ensure those risks are appropriate to business needs by allowing:

• effective identification and management of workplace hazards through a standardized risk management process

• execution of work at the lowest level of risk the business can support through a continuous improvement process

Conformance with the CoW Practice is mandatory for all operating entities in Canada RPU. Each entity will develop and implement site-specifics for this practice (see Section 7) based on the requirements outlined in the sections following.


1



2


3

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

2

3 accountabilities

The CoW Single Point of Accountability (SPA) manager will:

• be accountable for overall performance and content of CoW and associated practices and procedures

• be responsible for authorizing policy and practice changes and ensure conformance through regular audits

• appoint an Operations Functional Authority for CoW

• make decisions to resolve issues caused by ambiguity and conflict

The CoW Operations Functional Authority will:• confirm accuracy and integrity of technical content

and changes to the CoW Practice• act as a resource to interpret and answer questions

about the CoW Practice• review CoW Practice Management of Change

(MOC) and deviations

Operations Managers, Well Managers, Engineering Services Managers, Resource Development Managers and Project General Managers will:

• provide resources necessary to support the CoW Practice in their areas of responsibility

• review and approve the designated authority levels

The Accountable Manager (a designation that includes Onshore Site Manager and other functional team leads as designated in site-specific CoW practices) will:

• be accountable for the CoW Practice on their worksites

• be responsible for developing and updating their local CoW Practice


2



3

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

3

• keep current a list of the assigned authority level roles for the worksite

• ensure persons appointed to CoW roles have completed required training, have the necessary skills and have been assessed competent (with documentation) for their appointed positions

• authorize work commensurate with the assessed hazard level before work begins

The Accountable Manager will:• have passed the required training (for a complete list

of training and competency assessment requirements see OMS CF 22-00-09 and OMS CP 22-00-06 respectively)

• have been competency-assessed for the role and have the necessary skills

• have appropriate knowledge of the facilities and associated equipment described in the work authorization (permit, HARM)

Additional levels of accountability could be defined in the Site CoW Practice, subject to CoW SPA approval.

3.1 levels of authority

Only qualified personnel may authorize and direct work activities under the CoW Practice. Defining roles and responsibilities are outlined in the sections following.

3.2 area authority

The Area Authority is the central figure in the CoW Process, accountable to the operational line management and should have an operations role.The Area Authority’s responsibilities will be approved by the Accountable Manager and include the following:



4


5

Figu

re 1

: Con

trol

of W

ork

Doc

umen

t Hie

rarc

hy

BP

Gro

up D

efin

ed

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Con

trol o

f(C

oW)

BP

Gro

up D

efin

ed

Wor

k (C

oW)

Pol

icy

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

erm

it

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

Pra

ctic

e

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

Pra

ctic

e

Lifti

ngO

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e

Lifti

ngO

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s P

ract

ice

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s P

ract

ice

Hot

Wor

kP

ract

ice

Hot

Wor

kP

ract

ice

Wor

k A

utho

rizat

ion

Pra

ctic

e

Hot

Wor

kP

erm

it

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

Per

mit

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

P

erm

it

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s P

erm

it

Sim

ulta

neou

sO

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e

Haz

arA

sses

smen

t and

R

isk

Man

agem

ent

SIM

OP

S

Wor

k P

lan

BP

Can

ada

Stra

tegi

c P

erfo

rman

ce U

nit

(SP

) C

oWP

ract

ice

BP

Can

ada

Reg

iona

l P

rodu

ctio

n U

nit

(RP

U)

CoW

Pra

ctic

e

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

Che

cklis

t

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry C

heck

list

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

C

heck

list

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s C

heck

list

Hot

Wor

kC

heck

list

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry R

escu

e P

lan

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

W

ork

Aid

s

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent

and

Ris

k M

anag

emen

t

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e


4



5

Figu

re 1

: Con

trol

of W

ork

Doc

umen

t Hie

rarc

hy

BP

Gro

up D

efin

ed

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Con

trol o

f(C

oW)

BP

Gro

up D

efin

ed

Wor

k (C

oW)

Pol

icy

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

erm

it

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

Pra

ctic

e

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

Pra

ctic

e

Lifti

ngO

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e

Lifti

ngO

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s P

ract

ice

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s P

ract

ice

Hot

Wor

kP

ract

ice

Hot

Wor

kP

ract

ice

Wor

k A

utho

rizat

ion

Pra

ctic

e

Hot

Wor

kP

erm

it

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

Per

mit

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

P

erm

it

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s P

erm

it

Sim

ulta

neou

sO

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e

Haz

arA

sses

smen

t and

R

isk

Man

agem

ent

SIM

OP

S

Wor

k P

lan

BP

Can

ada

Stra

tegi

c P

erfo

rman

ce U

nit

(SP

) C

oWP

ract

ice

BP

Can

ada

Reg

iona

l P

rodu

ctio

n U

nit

(RP

U)

CoW

Pra

ctic

e

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

Che

cklis

t

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry C

heck

list

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

C

heck

list

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s C

heck

list

Hot

Wor

kC

heck

list

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry R

escu

e P

lan

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

W

ork

Aid

s

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent

and

Ris

k M

anag

emen

t

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e



6


7

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

6

• approving work plans before work begins• reviewing work plans and hazard assessments

to determine if approved work can continue concurrently with other work tasks

• confirming work activities carried out in their defined geographic area of responsibility are consistent with the CoW Practice

• ensuring work tasks are appropriately risk-assessed and risk mitigation steps applied before work begins

• authorizing work as per the Hazard Classification Matrix (see Table 1)

• seeking approval from the appropriate level of authority when a task is beyond their work authorization level (see Table 1)

The Area Authority oR their designated Issuing Authority is responsible for:

• verifying that worksite inspections are carried out (as a minimum) before work begins and before closeout of work activity

• confirming that work planning and hazard assessments are completed and documented appropriately

• issuing, withdrawing and closing out work permits• communicating company expectations, procedures

and local site work-aids before work begins• reviewing and approving HARMs before work begins• understanding the work to be done and assessing

whether worker expertise is appropriate• reviewing that the performing authority’s

qualifications are appropriate for the job

additional Requirements

If more than one Area Authority is temporarily designated, a Simultaneous Operations (SIMOPS) plan must be developed and communicated, and a SIMOPS Authority designated (see Section 3.5 and OMS CP 41-


6



7

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

7

00-03 Simultaneous Operations Practice. For example, if a well workover is planned for a location within the fenceline of a processing area, a SIMOPS plan must be developed as there is an Area Authority for Wells and an Area Authority for Operations.

3.3 issuing authority

The Issuing Authority is delegated by the Area Authority and could be called on as part of the CoW authoriza-tion structure when required. The Issuing Authority reports to the Area Authority and should also have an operations role.The Issuing Authority’s responsibilities will be approved by the Accountable Manager and include the following:

• verifying that worksite inspections are carried out (as a minimum) before work begins and before closeout of work activity

• confirming that work planning and hazard assessments are completed and documented appropriately

• issuing, withdrawing and closing out work permits• communicating company expectations, procedures

and local site work-aids before work begins• reviewing and approving HARMs before work begins• understanding the work to be done and assessing

whether worker expertise is appropriate for the job• reviewing that the performing authority’s

qualifications are appropriate for the job• ensuring that the performing authority is fit for the

duty assigned

training and Competency

The Area Authority and Issuing Authority will:• have passed the required training

7



8


9

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

8

• have been competency-assessed for the role• have the necessary skills (for a complete list of

training and competency assessment requirements see OMS CF 22-00-09 and OMS CP 22-00-06 respectively)

• have appropriate knowledge of the facilities and associated equipment described in the work authorization (permit, HARM)

• have refresher training

3.4 Performing authority

The Performing Authority distributes permits and other forms of hazard communication to ensure the safe performance of assigned tasks undertaken either by the person in this role or a group under their supervision.note: The Performing Authority and Issuing Authority must not be the same person.The Performing Authority’s responsibilities include the following:

• fulfilling all responsibilities agreed to on work authorization documentation (permit or HARM)

• following the parameters of work set out in the various CoW tools (permits, procedures, work-aids, HARMs)

• active involvement in and completion of the work

training and Competency

The Performing Authority will:• have passed the required training (for a complete list

of training and competency assessment requirements see OMS CF 22-00-09 and OMS CP 22-00-06 respectively)

• be competent and qualified to perform the assigned task


8



9

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

9

• communicate work authorization conditions to workers involved

• have refresher training

3.5 SiMoPS authority

The Accountable Managers will designate a SIMOPS Authority when separate activities take place simultaneously with the potential to affect one another adversely. The SIMOPS Authority will ensure development of a SIMOPS plan that clearly distinguishes a single line of work authorization and communication when two or more teams are working in the same area (see OMS CP 41-00-03 Simultaneous Operations Practice).

4 Risk Management

To execute work that presents no unnecessary risk to workers who could be adversely affected by the consequences of the work, all work will be subject to a risk management process.Risk management is a systematic method of assessing work to identify associated hazards and analyze the potential consequences of those hazards. Before work can start, the extent of resources, controls and required mitigation is managed so potentially adverse effects of such hazards are reduced to an acceptable minimum.Safe work is the controlled release or use of energy, in which energy is safely managed. Conversely, unsafe work is where the degree of hazard is greater than necessary, resulting in the unacceptably high likelihood of unplanned transfers of energy to people, facilities or the environment.



10


11

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

10

The principles of BP Canada RPU’s risk management system are as follows:

• No unnecessary work will be conducted. Only work that provides business value will be undertaken.

• Hazard assessment will be integral to all phases of the work flow process.

• No high-risk work will be conducted.• All work will be risk-managed.• The Energy Model (see Figure 2) will provide the

basis for hazard assessments.• The OMS principles of People, Plant and Process

(see Section 5.2) will be used to manage work.• All applicable regulatory requirements will be met.

For a schematic of the risk management process, see Figure 3.

4.1 Hazard assessment

A work task with a well-defined scope identifies:• affected hazards (systems worked on)• applied hazards (tools and equipment used)• ambient hazards (local and current – real-time

condition)• control factors• classes of work

HARM uses the eight energy model processes to identify hazards in three focus areas:

• Affected Hazards: systems worked on• Applied Hazards: tools used• Ambient Hazards: real-time condition


10



11

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

11

affected Hazards

Affected hazards are the potential energy sources affected by the work, such as hydrocarbons and the system in which they are transported and contained. These energy sources are identified using the Energy Model (see Figure 2) and encompass pressure, electrical, motion, gravity, chemical, heat/cold, radiation and biological hazards.

applied Hazards

Applied hazards are those related to tools and equipment that could result in uncontrolled or unwanted contact with an energy source. For example, a cutting torch could be the applied hazard.

ambient Hazards

Ambient hazards are local environmental and current site conditions that could cause uncontrolled or unwanted contact with an energy source, e.g., weather, housekeeping, terrain, concurrent work and lease conditions.

11



12


13

60Area Authority or designate

defines the affected hazards using the Energy

Model.

70Area Authority in

conjunction with the Performing Authority defines the applied

hazards using the Energy Model.

80Ambient hazards are

identified onsite by the appropriate authority using

the Energy Model.

90Develop risk management

plans that apply control factors to people, plant and

process.

�00Area Authority classifies the work as:

PermittedLevel A HazardLevel B HazardLevel C Hazard

(See the Hazard Classification Matrix.)

�0Is the work

necessary? Is the right place, time and process being used to complete

the work?

Planning and Scheduling Executing Work Completing and Closing Out WorkRequesting Work

��0The appropriate authority

level reviews and approves the work to proceed.

50Cancel the work request.

No

�80Area Authority or designate

analyzes external and internal lessons learned.

�0Identify the work as either

proactive, corrective or reactive.

�0Define the work scope.

40Can you re-evaluate

place, time or process so the work can be completed

in a saferway?

Note: For each phase of work, the Control of Work requirements must be reviewed and met.

IMPORTANT: If, at any time work is deemed unsafe, it is the workers obligation to stop the work. It is the Area Authority’s obligation to provide an appropriate level of investigation for work stoppages.

Yes

No

Yes

�50Work is executed as per the plan and any worker

will stop work if it progresses outside of the

original work scope.

��0The Area Authority or designate ensures:

Pre-work activities are clearly defined

Worksite is preparedPerforming Authority

understands the work, hazards, control measures, safety tips and right to stop unsafe work.

��0The Performing Authority communicates the scope

and permit requirements or HARM to all workers

involved.

�60The appropriate authority level monitors the work activity and reassesses site conditions after an

interruption in work.

�40All workers sign the permit or HARM to acknowledge

the hazards involved.

�70The Area Authority or designate and the Performing Authority sign the permit or HARM to confirm:

Work is completeWorksite has been inspected

and is clean, tidy and safeEquipment has been properly

prepared for return to serviceWorkers are off the site

Control of Work Phases of Work

Figure 3: Risk Management Process



Model.

70Area Authority in





the Energy Model.



process.




�0Is the work


the work?





No








in a saferway?



Yes

No

Yes










involved.













Model.

70Area Authority in





the Energy Model.



process.




�0Is the work


the work?





No








in a saferway?



Yes

No

Yes










involved.











Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e


12



13



Model.

70Area Authority in





the Energy Model.



process.




�0Is the work


the work?





No








in a saferway?



Yes

No

Yes










involved.











Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e



14


15

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

14

5 Phases of Work

The RPU risk management program for CoW will be based on the following phases of work:

• requesting work• planning, authorizing and scheduling• executing work• completing and closing out work

Risk is managed at each of these four phases.For a summary of the work flow process and risk management requirements, seeFigure 3.

5.1 Requesting Work

Work enters the system through the following general categories:

• proactive work: o preventive maintenance and servicing o predictive maintenance o turnaround (TAR) o process modifications o testing o calibrations

• corrective work (not urgent): o projects o construction o wells

• reactive work: o breakdowns o previously unanticipated high-priority work

(safety, environment, regulatory)


14



15

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

15

Each operating entity will:• document their work process• determine the business case and reason for each

work task• identify key tasks, high-level HSE risks and

regulatory requirements• identify the hazards, complexity, likely consequences

and required controls• determine which of the following cases applies:

o the work is necessary, so the scope is further defined and sent to planning and scheduling

o the work is necessary and can be completed in a safer manner

o the work is necessary, but cannot be completed in a safe manner so the work is deferred, to be assessed at a later time

o the work is necessary, but cannot be completed in a safe manner and cannot be deferred, so the work request is cancelled

5.2 Planning and Scheduling

A documented work planning process must be in place that takes into account the time required for all phases of the CoW process, as per GPD CoW 3.4 Planning and Scheduling.At the field level, a documented work process will be used to properly manage work. In particular, hazard identification, risk management, scheduling and equipment preparation will be integral to the work planning process.The process for reviewing (risk assessing) and authorizing to proceed and execute the work includes:

• job scoping and planning• hazard assessment – a well-defined work task will

use the risk management principles in Section 4 to identify hazards



16


17

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

16

• control factors• classifying the work

Job Scoping and Planning

Job scoping and planning includes considering:• individual tasks and interactions• potential hazards using the Energy Model (see Figure

2) and reviewing applicability of each of the eight golden rules

• appropriate subject matter experts for the planning stages

• compatibility of concurrent work• required personal protective equipment (PPE)• complexity of the work, i.e., is a job site visit

required?• contractor requirements (competency, procedures

and equipment)• required procedures, practices and drawings• pre-job preparation

Control Factors

Identified hazards are mitigated to a manageable risk level and consider:

• people – competent and fit for duty• plant – integrity management, condition of

processes, tools and equipment and process safety• process – systems, practices and procedures used to

manage operations

Hierarchy of control should be considered for hazard mitigation:

• eliminate – remove the hazard from the work task• substitute – exchange a hazard for one with less

severe consequences


16



17

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

17

• engineer – create a different way to work around the hazard

• administrative – provides rules to avoid the hazard• PPE – a barrier if all else fails

Classifying the Work

A work task will be classified as one of the following:• Permitted• Level A• Level B• Level C

Using the Hazard Classification Matrix (see Table 1) and the practices identified in the document hierarchy (see Figure 1), work is classified based on the following:

• complexity of work:o defined work scopeo identified applied, affected, ambient hazardso control factors used

• consequences if something goes wrong during the job

• control of work:o classificationo documentationo correct authority to proceed

Residual Risk Ranking

Residual risk ranking is conducted to determine if the controls identified in a work plan appropriately mitigate the risk of incidents occurring. Area authorities utilize residual risk ranking as their last review process before authorizing the task to proceed.



18


19

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

18

• CoW designated tasks will be hazard classified and autho-rized by the appropriate authority level

Permit and Level A Hazard Work• The Area Authority or designate review the planned

task control(s) and is required to residual risk rank the task to verify that the controls are appropriate for the hazard level

level B and C Hazard Work

• The Area Authority or designate review the planned task control(s) and is recommended to residual risk rank the task to verify that the controls are appropriate for the hazard level

The residual risk guide links hazard classification to residual risk ranking by:

• Aligning hazard classification levels (Permit, A, B, C) to residual risk levels (2-9)

• Recognizes that there are tasks that residual risk rank above the authority level of an Accountable Manager (risk level 10-12)

o Pipeline Stopples/Balloons/Engineered Line and wellhead freezes, all pressures

o Other tasks that have complex systems and consequences that may effect areas above and beyond the Accountable Managers area of responsibility (company wide reputation, government action, media attention)

The residual risk matrix further confirms that the hazard classification with the controls in place is appropriate to allow the task to proceed. This is accomplished by:

• Linking the particular hazard classification (Table 1) to the residual risk guide (Table 1.1)

• Then, assessing whether the hazard classification and the work plan lines up with the residual risk parameter in the matrix (Table 1.2)


18



19

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

19

Area Authorities document the residual risk ranking on the appropriate work authorization document.

• Example: Tank truck entry to load produced water, Hazard Level B, Residual Risk Rank 4

noteS: Non-sensitive environment includes secondary containment, clay, gravel underlain with clay, previously disturbed areas and airsheds containing an industrial area.Sensitive environment includes waterbodies, native vegetation, undisturbed or pristine areas, and airsheds containing sensitive receptors, i.e., residents with health concerns or containing rare or threatened species.Immediate areas are on-lease.Localized areas are off-lease.

5.3 executing Work

Operating Entities continue to risk-manage work tasks through the execution phase ofCoW. The Area Authority or designate communicates and documents that:

• pre-work activities and responsibilities are clearly defined

• tasks are safely planned• the worksite is properly prepared• workers clearly understand:

o specific work to be doneo hazards at the worksite related to the worko control measures appliedo safety tips and cautionso right and obligation to stop unsafe work

Permit to Work

Permit to Work is the most formal tool used to



20


21

Table 1: Hazard Classification Matrix

NOTES: Non-sensitive environment includes secondary containment, clay, gravel underlain with clay, previously disturbed areas and airsheds containing an industrial area. Sensitive environment includes waterbodies, native vegetation, undisturbed or pristine areas, and airsheds containing sensitive receptors, i.e., residents with health concerns or containing rare or threatened species. Immediate areas are on-lease. Localized areas are off-lease.

Most Likely Consequences Control of Work

ImpactLevels

Healthand

Safety Environmental

Definition

EquipmentDamage/

Financial Loss Privilege to

OperateWork

Classification

MinimumDocumentation

RequirementMinimum Authority

to Proceed E

(inclusive ofA,B,C,D)

Fatality Impact greater than those referenced below. $5M and Greater

CorporateEnforcementAction

Permitted Work Work Permit Detailed Job

Scope Company Work

Practice Job-Specific

Procedure HARM

Accountable Manager

F LTI/DAFW

Impact with localized damage to a non-sensitive environment or immediate-area damage to a sensitive environment that can be restored to an equivalent capability in a period of months.

Impact with extensive damage to a non-sensitive environment or localized damage to a sensitive environment that can be restored to an equivalent capability in a period of days or weeks.

$500K to $5M Department EnforcementAction

Local/National Media Coverage

Level A Hazard Work

HARM Company Work

Practice Detailed Job

Scope Job-Specific

Procedure

Accountable Manageror

Area Authority

G MTI/ RWI

Impact with immediate-area damage to a non-sensitive environment that can be restored to an equivalent capability in a period of months.

Impact with localized damage to a non-sensitive environment or immediate-area damage to a sensitive environment that can be restored to an equivalent capability in a period of days or weeks.

$50K to $500K Local EnforcementAction

Local Media Coverage

Level B Hazard Work

HARM or Job-Specific

Procedure or Work Aids (e.g.

pre-populatedHARM)

Area Authority

HFirst Aid Impact with immediate-area damage to a

non-sensitive environment that can be restored to an equivalent capability in a period of days or weeks.

<$50K Government Compliancenotification

Level C Hazard Work

HARM or Work Aid or Stop Think & Go

Area Authority

table 1: Hazard Classification Matrix

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e


20



21

Table 1: Hazard Classification Matrix

NOTES: Non-sensitive environment includes secondary containment, clay, gravel underlain with clay, previously disturbed areas and airsheds containing an industrial area. Sensitive environment includes waterbodies, native vegetation, undisturbed or pristine areas, and airsheds containing sensitive receptors, i.e., residents with health concerns or containing rare or threatened species. Immediate areas are on-lease. Localized areas are off-lease.

Most Likely Consequences Control of Work

ImpactLevels

Healthand


Definition

EquipmentDamage/


OperateWork

Classification


RequirementMinimum Authority

to Proceed E

(inclusive ofA,B,C,D)


CorporateEnforcementAction

Permitted Work Work Permit Detailed Job

Scope Company Work

Practice Job-Specific

Procedure HARM

Accountable Manager

F LTI/DAFW




Local/National Media Coverage

Level A Hazard Work

HARM Company Work

Practice Detailed Job

Scope Job-Specific

Procedure

Accountable Manageror

Area Authority

G MTI/ RWI





Level B Hazard Work

HARM or Job-Specific

Procedure or Work Aids (e.g.

pre-populatedHARM)

Area Authority

HFirst Aid Impact with immediate-area damage to a

non-sensitive environment that can be restored to an equivalent capability in a period of days or weeks.


Level C Hazard Work

HARM or Work Aid or Stop Think & Go

Area Authority

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e



22


23

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

Tab

le 1

.1:

Res

idu

al R

isk

Gu

ide

Tab

le 1

.2:

Res

idu

al R

isk

Mat

rix

Wo

rk C

lass

ific

atio

n

Res

idu

al r

isk

leve

l

Wo

rk is

ab

ove

Acc

ou

nta

ble

Man

ager

au

tho

riza

tio

n –

co

nsi

der

dif

fere

nt

wo

rk m

eth

od

or

dis

con

tin

ue

acti

vity

10

- 1

2

Per

mit

Lev

el H

azar

d W

ork

8

- 9

Leve

l A H

azar

d W

ork

6

- 7

Leve

l B /

Lev

el C

Haz

ard

Wo

rk

2 -

5

Pro

bab

ility

1 2

3 4

5

Imp

act

Leve

l

A f

reak

co

mb

inat

ion

o

f fa

cto

rs

wo

uld

be

req

uir

ed f

or

an

inci

den

t to

re

sult

A r

are

com

bin

atio

n

of

low

fac

tors

w

ou

ld b

e re

qu

ired

fo

r an

in

cid

ent

to

resu

lt

Co

uld

hap

pen

w

hen

ad

dit

ion

al

fact

ors

are

p

rese

nt

bu

t o

ther

wis

e u

nlik

ely

to

occ

ur

No

t ce

rtai

n t

o

hap

pen

bu

t an

ad

dit

ion

al

fact

or

mig

ht

resu

lt in

an

in

cid

ent

Alm

ost

in

evit

able

th

at

an in

cid

ent

wo

uld

res

ult

D

6 8

10

11

12

E

5 7

9 10

11

F 4

6 8

9 10

G

3 5

7 8

9

Consequence

H

2 4

6 7

8

tabl

e 1.

1 R

esid

ual R

isk

gui

de

Tab

le 1

.1:

Res

idu

al R

isk

Gu

ide

Tab

le 1

.2:

Res

idu

al R

isk

Mat

rix

Wo

rk C

lass

ific

atio

n

Res

idu

al r

isk

leve

l

Wo

rk is

ab

ove

Acc

ou

nta

ble

Man

ager

au

tho

riza

tio

n –

co

nsi

der

dif

fere

nt

wo

rk m

eth

od

or

dis

con

tin

ue

acti

vity

10

- 1

2

Per

mit

Lev

el H

azar

d W

ork

8

- 9

Leve

l A H

azar

d W

ork

6

- 7

Leve

l B /

Lev

el C

Haz

ard

Wo

rk

2 -

5

Pro

bab

ility

1 2

3 4

5

Imp

act

Leve

l

A f

reak

co

mb

inat

ion

o

f fa

cto

rs

wo

uld

be

req

uir

ed f

or

an

inci

den

t to

re

sult

A r

are

com

bin

atio

n

of

low

fac

tors

w

ou

ld b

e re

qu

ired

fo

r an

in

cid

ent

to

resu

lt

Co

uld

hap

pen

w

hen

ad

dit

ion

al

fact

ors

are

p

rese

nt

bu

t o

ther

wis

e u

nlik

ely

to

occ

ur

No

t ce

rtai

n t

o

hap

pen

bu

t an

ad

dit

ion

al

fact

or

mig

ht

resu

lt in

an

in

cid

ent

Alm

ost

in

evit

able

th

at

an in

cid

ent

wo

uld

res

ult

D

6 8

10

11

12

E

5 7

9 10

11

F 4

6 8

9 10

G

3 5

7 8

9

Consequence

H

2 4

6 7

8


22



23

Tab

le 1

.1:

Res

idu

al R

isk

Gu

ide

Tab

le 1

.2:

Res

idu

al R

isk

Mat

rix

Wo

rk C

lass

ific

atio

n

Res

idu

al r

isk

leve

l

Wo

rk is

ab

ove

Acc

ou

nta

ble

Man

ager

au

tho

riza

tio

n –

co

nsi

der

dif

fere

nt

wo

rk m

eth

od

or

dis

con

tin

ue

acti

vity

10

- 1

2

Per

mit

Lev

el H

azar

d W

ork

8

- 9

Leve

l A H

azar

d W

ork

6

- 7

Leve

l B /

Lev

el C

Haz

ard

Wo

rk

2 -

5

Pro

bab

ility

1 2

3 4

5

Imp

act

Leve

l

A f

reak

co

mb

inat

ion

o

f fa

cto

rs

wo

uld

be

req

uir

ed f

or

an

inci

den

t to

re

sult

A r

are

com

bin

atio

n

of

low

fac

tors

w

ou

ld b

e re

qu

ired

fo

r an

in

cid

ent

to

resu

lt

Co

uld

hap

pen

w

hen

ad

dit

ion

al

fact

ors

are

p

rese

nt

bu

t o

ther

wis

e u

nlik

ely

to

occ

ur

No

t ce

rtai

n t

o

hap

pen

bu

t an

ad

dit

ion

al

fact

or

mig

ht

resu

lt in

an

in

cid

ent

Alm

ost

in

evit

able

th

at

an in

cid

ent

wo

uld

res

ult

D

6 8

10

11

12

E

5 7

9 10

11

F 4

6 8

9 10

G

3 5

7 8

9

Consequence

H

2 4

6 7

8

tabl

e 1.

2 R

esid

ual R

isk

Mat

rix

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e



24


25

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e

24

communicate to workers that the assignedwork task has been identified to have:

• higher severity consequences if things go wrong• complex work dynamics• unfamiliar or infrequently performed tasks

A permit will be issued for work classified as one of the following individual practices:

• hot work• confined space entry• lifting operations• ground disturbance• working on energy systems

The permit will document communication between the Area Authority or their designate and the Performing Authority that:

• the work task has been hazard-assessed• only the work task described in the permit has or will

be conducted• other applicable work documents are to be used by

the Performing Authority:o detailed job scopeo RPU work practiceo job-specific procedureo site work-aido HARM

• the site is handed over in a state that is ready for work

note: Self-permitting is prohibited.For further information and the supporting procedure, see the applicable site practice.

level a, B, C Hazard

The Hazard Assessment Risk Management (HARM)


24



2525

tool is used to communicate to workers that the appropriate authority level has approved assigned work tasks to proceed.The HARM could be developed by others but is reviewed and acknowledged by the Area Authority or their designate.HARM hazard levels are classified as follows:

• Level A hazard work HARM will be accompanied by:

o detailed job scopeo RPU or operating entity work practiceo job-specific procedureo site work-aids

• Level B hazard work HARM will be accompanied by:

o detailed job scope oro job-specific procedure oro site work-aids

• Level C hazard work HARM will be accompanied by:

o site work-aid oro Stop, Think & Go moment

For further information and supporting procedure, see the site level practice

Communications

The Area Authority is responsible for:• verifying all persons involved in the task understand

the:o scope and requirements of the permit or HARMo hazards identifiedo controls and mitigation in placeo initial emergency response actions

• ensuring that all persons formally acknowledge understanding of content by signing the permit or HARM

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e



26


2726

• the process for persons performing work at remote locations

• the process for handover of work at shift changesThe Operating Entity will use the Hazard Classification Matrix as guidance to authorize work to proceed.

Monitoring Work activity

Work tasks will be monitored by an appropriate level of authority commensurate with the hazard level of the work. For example, permitted work might require direct supervision by the Area Authority or their designate, Level A work might require direct supervision or fre-quent monitoring, and Level B and Level C work might require periodic to minimal work monitoring.Monitoring work activity includes the following guidelines:

• worksite inspections are carried out (as a minimum) before work begins and before closeout of work activity

• the work practices will determine minimum monitoring requirements for permitted work

• the HARM practice will determine minimum monitoring requirements for work classified as Level A, Level B or Level C

• a site CoW practice will provide further guidance on work monitoring requirements at the Operating Entity

• remote work can be authorized only for Level B and Level C hazard work

• before work restarts after an interruption, site conditions and appropriate controls must be reassessed

Worksite inspections

During worksite inspections, Area Authority or desig-nate is responsible for:

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e


26



2727

• confirming control measures on permit and HARM are in place before starting work

• identifying issues previously overlooked• identifying material changes to the original risk

assessment

5.4 Completing and Closing out Work

Permitted Work

The Area Authority or designate and the Performing Authority close out the work bysigning the permit to confirm that the:

• worksite has been inspected• equipment has been properly prepared for return to

service• workers are off the site

level a, B, C Hazard

The Area Authority or designate acknowledges (signa-ture on HARM for Level A andLevel B and verbal or signature for Level C) that the:

• worksite has been inspected• equipment has been properly prepared for return

to service• workers are off the site

auditing

Auditing guidelines are as follows:• the RPU will be subject to OMS audit process and

schedule• the CoW Operations Functional Authority will

review annually, key indicators to attest CoW effectiveness in the RPU and steward a report to the CoW SPA

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e



28


2928

• the site CoW self-assurance plan will be developed to monitor the CoW program

• Regular Operations Conformance auditing to the BP Canada Permit to work and HARM expectations as per outlined in the RPU audit practice CP 82-00-01 Sec 3.6 and utilizing Audit Tool CF 82-00-07 and CAIT (Control Of Work Analysis Information Tool) http://cait.bpweb.bp.com/

lessons learned

External and internal lessons learned that affect the CoW process will be analyzed, incorporated and shared through an annual OMS 4.5 CoW internal system review by the CoW Operations Functional Authority and any proposed changes will be approved by the CoW SPA.

Stopping unsafe Work

The CoW policy and associated systems acknowledges and supports:

• a worker’s obligation and right to stop unsafe work• an appropriate level of investigation for work

stoppages• applicable stop work legislation

For a description of the RPU’s responsibilities, expectations and appropriate follow-up for stopping unsafe work, see OMS CP 44-00-01 Nonconformance, Corrective Action and Preventive Action Practice.

6 Regulatory Requirements

This practice is subject to the applicable safe work regulatory requirements in the areas in which BP Canada operates.

Con

trol

of W

ork

Pol

icy

and

Pra

ctic

e


28



2929

7 Site-Specifics

For guidelines to develop site-specifics for this practice for a particular operation, see the site CoW practice.

HazaRd aSSeSSMent and RiSK ManageMent PRaCtiCe

1 Policy

This Hazard Assessment and Risk Management Practice describes the process used to ensure that work carried out at all BP Canada Regional Production Unit (RPU) sites is risk-managed to ensure compliance with regulatory requirements. It also ensures conformance with the key elements of BP Group Defined Practice for Control of Work (CoW) Policy GDP 4.5-0001, which requires all work to be risk-managed.

2 Practice

This Hazard Assessment and Risk Management Practice applies to all work tasks carried out by BP Canada RPU employees and contractors. Work tasks include the following types:

• operational work• authorized work within the CoW process, including:

o Permitted Worko Level A Hazard Worko Level B Hazard Worko Level C Hazard Work

The principles of BP Canada RPU’s risk management system are as follows:

• No unnecessary work will be done. Only work that provides business value will be undertaken.

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e



30


3130

• Hazard assessment is integral to all phases of the work flow process.

• No high-risk work will be done.• The energy model (see Figure 1) provides the basis

for all hazard assessments.• The Operating Management System (OMS)

principles of People, Plant and Process will be used to manage work.

3 accountabilities

Key responsibilities for the Accountable Manager, Area Authority, Issuing Authority and Performing Authority are defined in BP Canada RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01, Section 3.

3.1 Hazard identification

The basis of the BP Canada RPU hazard identification process is use of the energy model to identify all task-related hazards.

Using the energy model, the following energy sources must be considered to identify hazardsassociated with a task:

• pressure• electrical• motion• gravity• chemical• heat/cold• radiation• biological

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e


30



3131

Figure 1: energy Model

During hazard identification and assessment, BP Canada RPU classifies hazards in one of the following three categories:

• Affected Hazards (system worked on) – the potential energy sources affected by the proposed work, e.g., hydrocarbons and the system in which they are transported and contained.

• Applied Hazards (tools and equipment used) – are associated with tools and equipment that might result in uncontrolled or unwanted contact with an energy source, e.g., a cutting torch.

• Ambient Hazards (local and current) – current site conditions that might cause uncontrolled or unwanted contact with an energy source, e.g., weather, housekeeping, terrain, concurrent work or lease condition.

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e



32


3332

3.2 Hazard assessment

Safe work is the controlled release or use of energy in which energy is safely managed.Conversely, unsafe work is where the degree of hazard is greater than necessary, resulting inthe unacceptably high likelihood of unplanned transfers of energy to people, plant or theenvironment.The appropriate method of risk management depends on:

• types of hazards identified• complexity of the hazard• uncertainty of the hazard• potential consequences of the hazards

A quality hazard assessment requires the following steps:1. Identify hazards.2. Establish controls that eliminate, substitute, and

manage or mitigate the hazard.3. Identify potential consequences.4. Evaluate acceptability of the remaining residual risk

when the controls are in place.5. Document hazards, controls and residual risk, using

formal risk management tools.6. Record approval of the hazard assessment and the

identified controls.7. Communicate the hazards and controls to those

performing the work.

Depending on the type of work, the following risk management tools will be applied tocomplete the hazard assessment:

• Hazard Assessment Risk Management (HARM) approved by the designated authority

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e


32



3333

• a pre-populated HARM form must be completed for work that is likely to be carried out more than once, and therefore, must be:

o approved by the appropriate level of authorityo issued a reference numbero included in the local register of hazard

assessments and procedures• an approved operational procedure that incorporates

a hazard assessmentBefore work begins, the employee or contractor must assess ambient hazards using one ofthe following risk management tools:

• HARM• Stop Think & Go card• site work aid (e.g., journey management tool)

4 Risk Management

Risk management is a systematic method of assessing work to identify associated hazards and analyze the potential consequences of those hazards. To execute work that presents no unnecessary risk to workers who could be adversely affected by the consequences of the work, all work will be subject to a risk management process. For the principles of BP Canada RPU’s risk management system, see BP Canada RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01.Protecting workers, worksites and the environment begins with controlling exposures to the affected, applied and ambient hazards. Once controls are identified, the following three types of control factors must be considered for effective mitigation of the applied, affected and ambient hazards identified:

• people – ensure workers are competent and fit for duty

• plant – apply integrity management by ensuring

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e



34


3534

safe operating processes are in place and that the condition of tools and equipment is optimum for safe operation

• process – ensure the systems, practices and procedures used to manage operations are complete and in place`

Applying a combination of control factors will help effectively mitigate hazards. The followingcontrol hierarchy should be considered for hazard mitigation:

• elimination – remove the hazard from the work task• substitution – exchange a hazard for one with less

severe consequences• engineering – eliminate the hazard or place a

permanent engineered barrier between people and the hazard

• administrative – use training, and established policies, procedures and standards to avoid the hazard

• personal protective equipment (PPE) – use a barrier if all other hazard-reduction methods cannot be applied

5 types of Work

This Hazard Assessment and Risk Management Practice applies to all work tasks carried out by BP Canada RPU employees and contractors. Tasks are associated with the following types of work:

• operational work• authorized work within the CoW process

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e


34



3535

5.1 operational Work

Operational work is performed by BP employees and contractors as part of their normal job duties where equipment is operated within designed operating parameters and operating integrity is not compromised. Any work where equipment is operated outside designed operating parameters, and operating integrity is compromised, is considered authorized work (see Section 5.5).

For operational work, one or more of the following risk management tools must be applied:

• HARM approved by the designated authority• a pre-populated HARM form must be completed for

work that is likely to be carried out more than once, and therefore, must be:


assessments and procedures

o signed off for ambient hazards and work authorization each time they are used

• an approved operational procedure that incorporates a hazard assessment

Before work begins, the employee or contractor must assess ambient hazards using one of the following risk management tools:

• HARM• Stop Think & Go card• site work aid (e.g., journey management tool)

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e



36


3736

Successfully managing risk for operational work depends on how well the key OMS subelements of People, Plant and Process are implemented.

5.2 People

organizational Structure

Operational tasks are identified as the part of the roles and responsibilities of the employee or contractor.

People and Competence

The following steps are required to assess hazards and manage risks for operational work:

1. Define required training and competencies for those performing the work.

2. Verify competence of those performing the work.3. Confirm, at defined intervals, that employees are

competent and equipment is maintained and fit for purpose.

5.3 Plant

design and Construction

Assets, plants, facilities, and tools and equipment must be designed and constructed to prevent injury to people and damage to the environment, and comply with regulations.

asset operation

Assets, plants, facilities, and tools and equipment must be operated safely and according to documented HARMs and operating procedures.

inspection and Maintenance

Assets, plants, facilities, and tools and equipment must

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e


36



3737

be inspected and maintained to prevent injury to people and damage to the environment, and comply with regulations.

5.4 Process

Procedures and Practices

OMS procedures and practices for health, safety, security and environment (HSSE), engineering controls, operations, maintenance and inspections must be developed, implemented and maintained.

Contractors are required to follow these procedures unless they have their own comparable procedures and practices.Crisis and continuity management and ERPs must be implemented and maintained to manage emergency conditions.

5.5 authorized Work Within the Control of Work Process

Authorized work includes work where equipment is operated outside designed operating parameters and operating integrity is compromised. This type of work is risk managed through BP Canada RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01 for the following four levels of work authorization:

• Permitted Work• Level A Hazard Work• Level B Hazard Work• Level C Hazard Work

For specific types of work requiring authorization, further information is provided in the following safe work practices:

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e



38


3938

• Confined Space Entry• Hot Work• Lifting Operations• Ground Disturbance• Working on Energy Systems

For the location of these practices on OMS Navigator, see Section 6.

Risk Management of authorized Work

The RPU risk management program for CoW is based on the following phases of the CoWprocess:

• requesting work• planning and scheduling work• executing work• completing and closing out work

The Accountable Manager is responsible for documenting the CoW process and ensuring that risk is managed during each phase of work (see RPU Control of Work PracticeOMS CP 45-00-01).

Pre-Job Safety Meeting

A pre-job safety meeting must be held that reviews:• potential hazards, the emergency response plan

(ERP), safe work procedures and workauthorization requirements• responsibilities of the designated supervisor• expectations and responsibilities to stop all unsafe

work• PPE requirements• importance of reporting all accidents, injuries and

near-miss incidents

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e


38



3939


Monitoring work is key to ensuring that the job scope does not change and that control measures remain effective.Before work is executed, the Area Authority or Issuing Authority will ensure that:

• the HARM form specifies the required monitoring frequency and identifies the appropriate level of line-accountable supervision that coincides with the hazard level associated with the work. For example, permitted work might require direct supervision by the Area Authority or designate, Level A work might require direct supervision or frequent monitoring, and Level B and C work might require periodic or minimal monitoring.

• at a minimum, worksite inspections must be carried out with the Performing Authority before work begins and before the work activity is closed out

The Performing Authority must monitor work activities:• to ensure that no new or unauthorized personnel

have entered the worksite• for changes to the job scope• for effectiveness of control measures• for changes to ambient hazards• to determine whether hazards not originally

identified have surfaced


RPU Control of Work Practice OMS CP 45-00-01 and Work Authorization Practice OMS CP 45-00-02, along with associated systems, acknowledge and support:

• a worker’s obligation and right to stop unsafe work• an appropriate level of investigation for work

stoppages• applicable stop-work legislation

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e



40


4140

For a description of BP Canada RPU’s responsibilities, expectations and appropriate follow-up steps for stopping unsafe work, see Non-conformance, Corrective Action and Preventative Action Practice OMS CP 44-00-01.

Completing and Closing out Work

document Control

Once work is completed, work authorizations, HARM forms and associated documents must be signed off in accordance with Work Authorization Practice OMS CP 45-00-02 and retained for 13 months. The location of completed documents is defined in the site’s forms and records matrix, as per procedures OMS CP 43-00-02 and OMS CP 43-00-03.

5.6 guidelines

This section describes supporting information and recommendations for use when judgment is involved.


All work will be risk managed by first identifying whether the work is operational work or work authorized within the CoW process.

operational Work

Work classified as operational work uses OMS risk management principles and tools (see Section 5.1-5.4).

Work authorized Within the Control of Work Process

Work is classified as one of four work levels - Permitted, Level A Hazard, Level B Hazard or

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e


40



4141

Level C Hazard - based on hazards identified and risk management plans in place. Classifying the work dictates the level of control and authorization required for that work to proceed.CoW classification uses good judgment and the CoW tools provided to identify how severe the worst reasonably credible consequences could be in each of the categories for each hazard.For qualitative descriptions that should be used to help make consistent decisions and discriminate between higher and lower work hazards, see Table 1.

using the HaRM Form

Using the identified affected, applied and ambient hazards (see Section 3.1 and Table 2), and the appropriate control factors – people, plant and process (see Section 5.2-5.4 and Table 3), identify the hazards and how they relate to the job scope.

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e



42


43

Error! No text of specified style in document. Error! No text of specified style in document.

Table 1: Hazard Classification MatrixMost Likely Consequence Control of Work

Health and


Definition

Equipment Damage/


Operate Work

Classification


Requirement

MinimumAuthority

to Proceed


CorporateEnforcement

Action

PermittedWork

Work Permit

Detailed Job Scope

Company Work Practice

Job-Specific Procedure

HARM

Accountable Manager

LTI/ DAFW




Local/National MediaCoverage

Level A Hazard Work

HARM


Detailed Job Scope


Accountable Manager

or

Area Authority

MTI/ RWI





Level B Hazard Work

HARM or

Job-Specific Procedure or

Work Aids (e.g. pre-populatedHARM)

Area Authority

FirstAid

Impact with immediate-area damage to a non-sensitive environment that can be restored to an equivalent capability in a period of days or weeks.


Level C Hazard Work

HARM or

Work Aid or

Stop Think & Go

Area Authority

Notes: Non-sensitive environment includes secondary containment, clay, gravel underlain with clay, previously disturbed areas and airsheds containing an industrial area. Sensitive environment includes waterbodies, native vegetation, undisturbed or pristine areas, and airsheds containing sensitivereceptors such as residents with health concerns or rare or threatened species. Immediate areas are on-lease. Localized areas are off-lease.



Health and


Definition

Equipment Damage/


Operate Work

Classification


Requirement

MinimumAuthority

to Proceed



Action

PermittedWork

Work Permit

Detailed Job Scope



HARM

Accountable Manager

LTI/ DAFW





Level A Hazard Work

HARM


Detailed Job Scope


Accountable Manager

or

Area Authority

MTI/ RWI





Level B Hazard Work

HARM or



Area Authority

FirstAid



Level C Hazard Work

HARM or

Work Aid or

Stop Think & Go

Area Authority




Health and


Definition

Equipment Damage/


Operate Work

Classification


Requirement

MinimumAuthority

to Proceed



Action

PermittedWork

Work Permit

Detailed Job Scope



HARM

Accountable Manager

LTI/ DAFW





Level A Hazard Work

HARM


Detailed Job Scope


Accountable Manager

or

Area Authority

MTI/ RWI





Level B Hazard Work

HARM or



Area Authority

FirstAid



Level C Hazard Work

HARM or

Work Aid or

Stop Think & Go

Area Authority


Table 2: Control of Work Accountabilities and Hazard Identification

Authority Affected Applied Ambient

Area Authority

Issuing Authority

The Area Authority or Issuing Authority is accountable for identifying and applying control measures to manage the risks of affected hazards.

The Area Authority or Issuing Authority is accountable for verifying that the Performing Authority has identified and applied control measures to manage the risks of applied hazards.

Performing Authority

The Performing Authority is responsible for identifying and applying control measures to manage the risks of applied hazards.

The Area Authority or Issuing Authority, with the Performing Authority, is accountable for identifying and applying control measures to manage the risks of ambient hazards.

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e


42



43



Health and


Definition

Equipment Damage/


Operate Work

Classification


Requirement

MinimumAuthority

to Proceed



Action

PermittedWork

Work Permit

Detailed Job Scope



HARM

Accountable Manager

LTI/ DAFW





Level A Hazard Work

HARM


Detailed Job Scope


Accountable Manager

or

Area Authority

MTI/ RWI





Level B Hazard Work

HARM or



Area Authority

FirstAid



Level C Hazard Work

HARM or

Work Aid or

Stop Think & Go

Area Authority


Table 2: Control of Work Accountabilities and Hazard Identification


Area Authority

Issuing Authority

The Area Authority or Issuing Authority is accountable for identifying and applying control measures to manage the risks of affected hazards.

The Area Authority or Issuing Authority is accountable for verifying that the Performing Authority has identified and applied control measures to manage the risks of applied hazards.


The Performing Authority is responsible for identifying and applying control measures to manage the risks of applied hazards.

The Area Authority or Issuing Authority, with the Performing Authority, is accountable for identifying and applying control measures to manage the risks of ambient hazards.

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e



44


45

5.7 Risk Mitigation Planning

Table 3: Control of Work Accountabilities and Risk Mitigation


Area Authority

Issuing Authority

The Area Authority or Issuing Authority is accountable for ensuring the following: People: assigned people are competent and fit for duty and capable of managing the risk associated with the control factors for applied hazards (e.g., assigning competent people to isolate energy systems). Plant: the integrity and condition of the applied hazards are controlled (e.g., ensure energy systems are properly identified and isolated to allow safe execution of the proposed work).Process: practices and procedures used to manage the applied hazards are available and followed (e.g., procedures for isolating energy systems).


The Performing Authority is accountable for ensuring:People: assigned people are competent and fit for duty and can effectively use the tools and equipment to manage the affected hazard.

The Performing Authority is accountable for ensuring: Plant: the applied hazards, tools and equipment are inspected and maintained to prevent injury to people and damage to the environment, and comply with regulations.

The Area Authority or Issuing Authority, with the Performing Authority, is accountable for ensuring the following:People: people are aware of how ambient hazards might affect the plant, facility, tools and equipment associated with the work. Process: people are aware of the practices, procedures and standards for performing the work safely (e.g., procedures for lifting devices).

5.7 Risk Mitigation Planning

Table 3: Control of Work Accountabilities and Risk Mitigation


Area Authority

Issuing Authority

The Area Authority or Issuing Authority is accountable for ensuring the following: People: assigned people are competent and fit for duty and capable of managing the risk associated with the control factors for applied hazards (e.g., assigning competent people to isolate energy systems). Plant: the integrity and condition of the applied hazards are controlled (e.g., ensure energy systems are properly identified and isolated to allow safe execution of the proposed work).Process: practices and procedures used to manage the applied hazards are available and followed (e.g., procedures for isolating energy systems).


The Performing Authority is accountable for ensuring:People: assigned people are competent and fit for duty and can effectively use the tools and equipment to manage the affected hazard.

The Performing Authority is accountable for ensuring: Plant: the applied hazards, tools and equipment are inspected and maintained to prevent injury to people and damage to the environment, and comply with regulations.

The Area Authority or Issuing Authority, with the Performing Authority, is accountable for ensuring the following:People: people are aware of how ambient hazards might affect the plant, facility, tools and equipment associated with the work. Process: people are aware of the practices, procedures and standards for performing the work safely (e.g., procedures for lifting devices).

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e


44



45

Haz

ard

Ass

essm

ent a

nd R

isk

M

anag

emen

t Pra

ctic

e



46


4746

SiMultaneouS oPeRationS (SiMoPS) PRaCtiCe

1 Policy

This is one of the practices under the BP Group Defined Practice for Control of Work (CoW) Policy GDP 4.5-0001 and BP Canada Regional Production Unit (RPU)CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01 (see Figure 1).

2 Practice

The intent of this document is to provide procedures to facilitate safe operations during simultaneous well, construction and operations activities.Simultaneous operations (SIMOPS) refers to two or more work groups conducting activities directed by different Area Authorities in the same geographic area. SIMOPS apply to the interactions among different work groups (e.g., wells, construction and operations). Pre-job planning, cooperation and communication among work groups during SIMOPS are crucial to ensure safe operations. Federal, provincial and local regulations must be followed during all operations and activities.

This practice reviews the following components of SIMOPS activities:

• specific hazards, including hazards likely to arise as a result of SIMOPS

• procedures and restrictions that apply to SIMOPS

3 accountabilities

Key responsibilities for the Accountable Manager, Area Authority, Issuing Authority and Performing Authority

Sim

ulta

neou

s O

pera

tions

(S

IMO

PS

)


46



4747

are defined in BP Canada RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01, Section 3.This section describes the BP Canada RPU field-based positions and SIMOPS planning roles (see Figure 2). As a project develops, roles and responsibilities will change.These changes must be clearly identified and communicated at a daily coordination meeting.

3.1 area authorities

The Area Authorities:• are persons in each work group who confirm that

all work activities are controlled and completed according to the work group’s policies, procedures and standards

• are approved by the work group’s Accountable Manager

In addition to the Area Authority responsibilities listed in RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01, the work group Area Authorities are also responsible for appointing the SIMOPS Authority.The SIMOPS Authority is appointed from the work group that has the greatest influence in managing the interfaces between the work groups. This appointment is documented to identify accountabilities for SIMOPS activities.

Sim

ulta

neou

s O

pera

tions

(S

IMO

PS

)



48


4948

Figure 2: SIMOPS Organization

3.2 Issuing Authorities

Issuing Authorities must ensure that daily activities align with the SIMOPS Plan and all associated SIMOPS practice requirements.

In addition to the Issuing Authority responsibilities listed in SPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-0�, the Issuing Authorities are responsible for:

communicating to the SIMOPS Authority the status of work activities that are in conflict or require sequencing

ensuring that the site-specific emergency response plan (ERP) aligns with the SIMOPS Plan

3.3 Performing Authorities

The Performing Authorities receive work authorizations and other forms of hazard communication to ensure assigned tasks undertaken either by the persons in this role or a

Figure 2: SIMOPS Organization

3.2 Issuing Authorities

Issuing Authorities must ensure that daily activities align with the SIMOPS Plan and all associated SIMOPS practice requirements.

In addition to the Issuing Authority responsibilities listed in SPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-0�, the Issuing Authorities are responsible for:

communicating to the SIMOPS Authority the status of work activities that are in conflict or require sequencing

ensuring that the site-specific emergency response plan (ERP) aligns with the SIMOPS Plan

3.3 Performing Authorities

The Performing Authorities receive work authorizations and other forms of hazard communication to ensure assigned tasks undertaken either by the persons in this role or a

Figure 2: SiMoPS organization

3.2 issuing authorities

Issuing Authorities must ensure that daily activities align with the SIMOPS Plan and all associated SIMOPS practice requirements.In addition to the Issuing Authority responsibilities listed in RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01, the Issuing Authorities are responsible for:

• communicating to the SIMOPS Authority the status of work activities that are in conflict or require sequencing

• ensuring that the site-specific emergency response plan (ERP) aligns with the SIMOPS Plan

3.3 Performing authorities

The Performing Authorities receive work authorizations and other forms of hazard communication to ensure

Sim

ulta

neou

s O

pera

tions

(S

IMO

PS

)


48



4949

Sim

ulta

neou

s O

pera

tions

(S

IMO

PS

)

assigned tasks undertaken either by the persons in this role or a group under their supervision are performed safely. In addition to the Performing Authority responsibilities listed in RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01, the functionalPerforming Authorities are responsible for:

• ensuring representation from each work team during coordination meetings

• being aware of the work interfaces with other work groups and, if necessary, stopping the job when it is not safe to continue

• being aware of the site-specific ERP

3.4 SiMoPS authority

The SIMOPS Authority is appointed by the work group Area Authorities and is responsible for confirming that all work activities are consistent with the SIMOPS Practice. In addition to the Area Authority responsibilities listed in RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01, the SIMOPS Authority’s responsibilities include:

• control of work on the SIMOPS worksite• authorizing the SIMOPS Plan and associated

activities within their designated area of responsibility

• approving (or obtaining approval where the SIMOPS Authority does not have the authority level) for higher-hazard work

• ensuring an ERP is in place and that resources are available to respond in an emergency situation

• ensuring the worksite is organized effectively and efficiently to execute SIMOPS activities

• ensuring site access is controlled and that the site orientation process adequately addresses SIMOPS requirements



50


5150

Sim

ulta

neou

s O

pera

tions

(S

IMO

PS

)

• confirming SIMOPS work is appropriately planned and scheduled

• deciding which activities take precedence after assessing priorities for each operation

• addressing issues that could result in changes to the scope of work

• ensuring that the work group Issuing Authorities and Performing Authorities participate in coordination meetings

• confirming that adequate risk mitigation has occurred, allowing work to proceed safely

• reviewing work authorization forms prepared by the work group Issuing Authorities to ensure SIMOPS activities are adequately addressed

• ensuring that SIMOPS activities at the worksite comply with the SIMOPS Practice and SIMOPS Plan

• communicating continuously with the different work groups

• organizing coordination meetings with the respective work group Issuing Authorities

note: The SIMOPS Authority may be one of the work group Area Authorities.

4 Risk Management

Risk management is a systematic method of assessing work to identify associated hazards and analyze the potential consequences of those hazards. To execute work that presents no unnecessary risk to workers who could be adversely affected by the consequences of the work, all work will be subject to a risk management process. For the principles of BP Canada’s risk management system, see RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01.


50



5151

Sim

ulta

neou

s O

pera

tions

(S

IMO

PS

)

4.1 Standards

The following standards are generic, minimum performance or operational expectations forSIMOPS.Work Authorization Practice OMS CP 45-00-02 is used to classify work and ensure it is authorized by appropriate personnel. Permits and Hazard Assessment and Risk Management (HARM) forms (see OMS CF 31-00-04 and Hazard Assessment and Risk Management Practice OMS CP 31-00-04) must be issued by the functional Issuing Authorities and posted on the SIMOPS Notice Board.

Work Plans

A SIMOPS Plan must be developed when one function’s work activity might directly or indirectly affect the safe performance of another function’s work activity or operations. The function initiating the SIMOPS activity is responsible for preparing the SIMOPS Plan.The SIMOPS Plan must be documented (see SIMOPS Plan OMS CF 45-00-01) and should contain the following key sections:

• Purpose and Scope – describes SIMOPS activities, including:

o work groups involvedo hazard assessment for the jobo number of personnel involvedo equipment usedo expected duration of the job

• Roles, Responsibilities or Organizational Structure – describes the designated SIMOPS roles for the job, including typical CoW roles and SIMOPS Authority

• SIMOPS Planning – describes the:o communication strategy



52


5352

o ERPo SIMOPS Matrix – identifies which activities

cannot occur simultaneously and what special controls are required if activities take place simultaneously

o list of the planned work activities of both work groups

o mitigation measures for work activities that conflict

The SIMOPS Plan must be approved and signed by both work group Area Authorities. A copy of the SIMOPS Plan must be posted and removed once the SIMOPS work has been completed.

emergency Response

A copy of the site-specific ERP must be issued to the work group Issuing Authorities. The worksite ERP must include:

• personnel muster points and escape routes that are clear of any obstacles

• location of firefighting equipment• scheduled updates to the muster plan if operations

are modified on the worksite• new hard-copy printouts for each work group Issuing

Authority if escape routes change

SiMoPS Matrix

The SIMOPS Matrix (see example in Figure 3) provides a summary of activities likely to occur during SIMOPS. As a result of concurrent operations, each work activity must be risk assessed and categorized according to the required work authorization and CoW requirements. The three categories are:

• Standard Functional Work – work planned, scheduled and authorized by the individual work groups according to CoW requirements and that does not involve SIMOPS

Sim

ulta

neou

s O

pera

tions

(S

IMO

PS

)


52



5353

• SIMOPS Work Allowed – work planned and scheduled to occur at the same time according to the SIMOPS Plan and authorized by the SIMOPS Authority

• SIMOPS Work Not Allowed – work that does not occur simultaneously because of an unacceptable level of risk

SiMoPS notifications

The SIMOPS Authority is responsible for ensuring that SIMOPS information is available at the worksite, including the following:

• site-specific emergency notification numbers• SIMOPS Authority for the worksite and contact

information• SIMOPS Plan• ERP contact list and plan• name and contact information for all work group

Issuing Authorities• roster and number of workers onsite

The SIMOPS Notifications must be updated daily or as conditions change. The SIMOPS Authority is responsible for reviewing and updating the SIMOPS information.Work group Issuing Authorities and Performing Authorities must review the SIMOPS information and ensure that operations that affect another group’s activity are discussed before work starts.Stopping unsafe Work

If work is interrupted because of an emergency, intervention or as advised by operations personnel, work such as hot work operations must be suspended. Work must not resume until the area has been inspected by the functional Issuing Authorities and determined to be safe. The functional Issuing Authorities will determine if a new permit is required.

Sim

ulta

neou

s O

pera

tions

(S

IMO

PS

)



54

Standard Safety Practices ManualS

imul

tane

ous

Ope

ratio

ns

(SIM

OP

S)


54



55

Figure 3: SiMoPS Matrix – Sample

Sim

ulta

neou

s O

pera

tions

(S

IMO

PS

)



56


5756

4.2 guidelines

This section describes information and recommendations for use when judgment is involved.Communication is key to excellent health, safety, security and environment (HSSE) performance, and safe and efficient SIMOPS. Each function must be aware of other functions’ activities to avoid conflicts. The following meetings should be held:

• pre-SIMOPS coordination meeting that:o is led by the SIMOPS Authorityo is attended by work group Issuing Authoritieso ensures appropriate work authorizations have

been obtained for the day’s scope of worko reviews work authorizations for the day’s activities

and ensures they align with the SIMOPS Plano ensures appropriate mitigation measures are in

place to address SIMOPS activitieso verifies work sequences and schedules for the next

24 hourso identifies and resolves any potential work

conflicts for the day’s scope of worko verifies the ERP is up to dateo ensures the SIMOPS coordination meetings are

documented• post-SIMOPS coordination meeting that:

o is led by the SIMOPS Authorityo is attended by work group Issuing Authoritieso addresses logistical concerns related to scheduling

and planning of the next day’s activitieso identifies foreseeable SIMOPS conflictso reviews work authorizations for the next

day’s activities and ensures they align with the SIMOPS Plan

Sim

ulta

neou

s O

pera

tions

(S

IMO

PS

)


56



5757

o ensures appropriate mitigation measures are in place to address SIMOPS activities

o ensures appropriate work authorizations have been obtained for the next day’s work

o verifies work sequences and scheduleso identifies and resolves potential work conflicts for

the next day’s activitieso documents the coordination meeting

WoRK autHoRization PRaCtiCe

1 Policy

This is one of the practices under the BP Group Defined Practice for Control of Work (CoW) Policy GDP 4.5-0001 and BP Canada Regional Production Unit (RPU) CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01 (see Figure 1).

2 Practice

The Work Authorization Practice is a formal process used to control certain types of work identified in the CoW process as hazardous. It is a key element of the BP Group DefinedPractice for CoW Policy GDP 4.5-0001 and applies to the following four levels of work authorization in RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01:

• Permitted Work• Level A Hazard Work• Level B Hazard Work• Level C Hazard Work

For information on classifying work by work hazard level, see RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01, Hazard Assessment and Risk Management Practice OMS CP 31-00-04 and specific permitted practices.

Wor

k A

utho

rizat

ion

Pra

ctic

e



58


5958

This practice applies to any work that disrupts normal operations or compromises operational integrity and is managed through the CoW process. This practice does not apply to operational work. Operational work is work performed by BP workers as part of their normal job duties where equipment is operated within the designed operating parameters and operating integrity is not compromised. For further detail on Control of Work versus operational work, see Hazard Assessment and Risk Management Practice OMS CP 31-00-04.The purpose of this practice is to:

• identify key accountabilities and documentation required for effective work authorization

• provide formal and consistent guidelines for authorizing necessary work across Canada RPU operations

• enable effective communication of workplace hazards and control measures

• enable execution of work at the lowest level of risk

3 accountabilities


3.1 accountable Manager

The Accountable Manager is responsible for documenting the work authorization process in the site CoW Practice and ensuring risk is managed according to Hazard Assessment and Risk Management Practice OMS CP 31-00-04.

Wor

k A

utho

rizat

ion

Pra

ctic

e


58



5959

4 Risk Management

Risk management is a systematic method of assessing work to identify associated hazards and analyze the potential consequences of those hazards. To execute work that presents no unnecessary risk to workers who could be adversely affected by the consequences of the work, all work will be subject to a risk management process. For the principles of BP Canada RPU’s risk management system, see RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01.

4.1 Work authorization and Work Hazard levels

The following standards are generic, minimum performance or operational expectations for work authorization.Work authorization requirements are based on the work hazard level (i.e., Permitted, Level A Hazard, Level B Hazard or Level C Hazard). For a summary of details for each work hazard level, see Table 1.

Depending on the hazard level assessed for the work, the following documents are used to authorize work for BP Canada RPU CoW:

• work permit – a formal document containing location, time, scope of work, Hazard Assessment and Risk Management (HARM) process and persons authorizing and completing the work

• HARM – a formal document containing location, time, scope of work, hazard assessment and risk management actions, and persons authorizing and completing the work (see Hazard Assessment and Risk Management Practice OMS CP 31-00-04)

• pre-populated HARM form – completed for work that is expected to be carried out more than once, and therefore, must be:

Wor

k A

utho

rizat

ion

Pra

ctic

e



60


6160


assessments and procedureso signed off for ambient hazards and work

authorization each time they are used

3.1 Accountable Manager

The Accountable Manager is responsible for documenting the work authorization process in the site CoW Practice and ensuring risk is managed according to Hazard Assessment and Risk Management Practice OMS CP ��-00-04.

4 Risk Management Risk management is a systematic method of assessing work to identify associated hazards and analyze the potential consequences of those hazards. To execute work that presents no unnecessary risk to workers who could be adversely affected by the consequences of the work, all work will be subject to a risk management process. For the principles of BP Canada SPU’s risk management system, see SPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-0�.

4.1 Work Authorization and Work Hazard Levels

The following standards are generic, minimum performance or operational expectations for work authorization.

Work authorization requirements are based on the work hazard level (i.e., Permitted, Level A Hazard, Level B Hazard or Level C Hazard). For a summary of details for each work hazard level, see Table �.

Table 1: Authorization Level and Documentation Based on Work Hazard Level

WorkClassification Minimum Required Documentation

Minimum Required Authority to Proceed with Work

Permitted work permit and HARM

detailed job scope

company work practices

job-specific procedures

Accountable Manager

Level A Hazard HARM

detailed job scope

company work practices

job-specific procedures

Accountable Manager or Area Authority

Level B Hazard HARM or

job-specific procedures or

site work aids (e.g., journey management tool)

Area Authority or designate

Level C Hazard HARM or

site work aids (e.g., journey management tool) or

Stop, Think & Go

Area Authority or designate

Depending on the hazard level assessed for the work, the following documents are used to authorize work for BP Canada SPU CoW:

work permit – a formal document containing location, time, scope of work, Hazard Assessment and Risk Management (HARM) process and persons authorizing and completing the work

table 1: authorization level and documentation Based on Work Hazard level

4.2 Work authorization Steps and accountabilities

For a description of the work authorization steps for requesting, planning and scheduling, executing, and completing and closing out work, and the accountabilities for Permitted, Level A Hazard, Level B Hazard and Level C Hazard work, see Table 2.

Planning

The initial work request and work authorization preparation is formally completed during the local planning process (e.g., planning meetings). Depending on the work hazard level, the Accountable Manager or Area Authority need to be involved to approve the work request and verify the scope and risk management.

Wor

k A

utho

rizat

ion

Pra

ctic

e


60



6161

For Permitted work, the Accountable Manager must authorize the work to proceed by signing the permit.

executing Work

The Area Authority/Issuing Authority, with the Performing Authority, will ensure a site visit takes place to verify:

• that the job scope for the work performed has not changed

• competent workers are present• control factors are in place and effectively

implemented• required workplace inspections have been carried out• ambient hazards have been assessed daily and

documented on the HARM orsite work aid• that an appropriate level of work monitoring has

been established

The Area Authority/Issuing Authority will also:• communicate to the Performing Authority company

requirements, procedures and site work aids used• issue work authorizations (permits or HARM) to the


The Performing Authority is responsible for conducting a pre-job safety meeting before starting the job to confirm that workers clearly understand:

• the scope of the work to be completed• specific hazards at the worksite• control measures that have been applied• that all workers are required to be competent and

fit for duty• their right and obligation to stop work

Wor

k A

utho

rizat

ion

Pra

ctic

e



62


6362

All workers will formally acknowledge and agree to follow the job scope and comply with the control measures implemented to complete the job safely.


After the work is complete, the Area Authority/Issuing Authority and Performing Authority will visit the site to ensure:

• that the work is complete• controls are removed• isolations are reinstated• applied hazards are offsite• workplace is tidy• equipment is properly returned to service

All parties must sign the work authorization for Permitted and Level A Hazard work. Only the Performing Authority is required to visit the site upon completion of Level B and Level C work.

4.3 Work authorization Recertification

Unforeseen circumstances might require the work authorization to be recertified or reissued. The Area Authority is responsible for determining the need for revalidation or recertification, based on the circumstances.Recertifying a work authorization might be required if work is not completed within the shift or time indicated on the permit. Work will only resume once the Area Authority and Performing Authority visit the site to confirm that the:

• hazards have not changed• work authorization conditions and risk mitigation

measures and controls have not been compromised

Wor

k A

utho

rizat

ion

Pra

ctic

e


62



6363

While a work authorization may be in use for up to 30 working days, it is only valid for one shift and must be recertified before each and every shift. This certification requires:

• that the Area Authority / Issuing Authority and Performing Authority verify that the work authorization conditions, and risk mitigation measures and controls have not been compromised. If anything is compromised, the Area Authority / Issuing Authority and Performing Authority must review the HARM and change-control measures as appropriate and,

• that the Area Authority / Issuing Authority and Performing Authority initial the work authorization indicating that the site visit was completed and everything confirmed safe for the work to restart.

A work authorization might have to be reissued when work is interrupted because of:

• an emergency• a drill to test ERP systems• an intervention• an operations advisory

Work will only resume once a new work authorization is completed and signed by the applicable authorities (see Table 2).


The Area Authority or Issuing Authority must visit the worksite regularly to verify that work authorization conditions are being complied with and confirm that original work authorization conditions apply to the ongoing work.


If work is interrupted because of an emergency, an intervention or as advised by operations personnel,

Wor

k A

utho

rizat

ion

Pra

ctic

e



64


65

table 2: Work authorization Steps and accountabilities Based on Work Hazard level

Table 2: Work Authorization Steps and Accountabilities Based on Work Hazard Level

Work Hazard Level (and Work Authorization Tool)

Step Purpose Permitted

(permit and HARM) A

(HARM) B

(HARM) C

(HARM)

Work request Specify work scope and risk management. Perform only necessary work.

Accountable Manager (planning)

Area Authority (planning)

(planning) (planning)

Pla

nn

ing

Initial work authorizationpreparation

Verify scope of work has not changed, HARM is complete and safe work practices are available.



Area Authority/ Issuing Authority (planning)

Area Authority/ Issuing Authority/ Performing Authority (planning)

Pre-issuechecks

Visit the site to verify conformance with conditions of the work authorization.

Area Authority and Performing Authority (sign)

Area Authority/ Issuing Authority and Performing Authority (sign)

Area Authority/ Issuing Authority and Performing Authority (sign or inform)

Area Authority/ Issuing Authority/ Performing Authority (sign or inform)

Work issue and acceptance

Ensure conditions of the work authorization are understood and communicated and ambient hazards for the day are assessed.





Communicateto workers

Ensure conditions of the work authorization are understood by the workers (e.g., during the pre-job safety meeting).

Performing Authority and workers (sign)



Performing Authority and workers (sign or inform) E

xecu

tin

g W

ork

Work execution and ongoing monitoring

Ensure the scope of work and ambient hazards have not changed and conditions of the work authorization are being met.

Area Authority/ Issuing Authority and Performing Authority (monitoring)



Area Authority/ Issuing Authority/ Performing Authority (monitoring)

Co

mp

leti

ng

an

d

Clo

sin

g O

ut

Wo

rk

Work complete and work authorizationsignoff

Visit the site to verify:

work is complete controls are removed isolations are reinstated workers and equipment are offsite

(applied hazards) the workplace is safe and tidy equipment (affected hazard) is

properly prepared for return to service



Performing Authority (sign and inform the Area Authority/ Issuing Authority)


Wor

k A

utho

rizat

ion

Pra

ctic

e




(permit and HARM) A

(HARM) B

(HARM) C

(HARM)





Pla

nn

ing







Pre-issuechecks


















xecu

tin

g W

ork







Co

mp

leti

ng

an

d

Clo

sin

g O

ut

Wo

rk











64



65




(permit and HARM) A

(HARM) B

(HARM) C

(HARM)





Pla

nn

ing







Pre-issuechecks


















xecu

tin

g W

ork







Co

mp

leti

ng

an

d

Clo

sin

g O

ut

Wo

rk










Wor

k A

utho

rizat

ion

Pra

ctic

e



66


6766

work must be suspended. Work must not resume until the area has been inspected by the Issuing Authority and determined to be safe. The Issuing Authority will determine if a new work authorization is required.

document Control

Once work is completed, work authorizations, HARM forms and associated documents must be signed off in accordance with the work authorization and retained for 13 months.The location of completed documents is defined in the site’s forms and records matrix as per procedures OMS CP 43-00-02 and OMS CP 43-00-03.

Wor

k A

utho

rizat

ion

Pra

ctic

e


66



6767

ConFined SPaCe entRY PRaCtiCe

1 Policy

This is one of the practices under the BP Group Defined Practice for Control of Work (CoW) Policy GDP 4.5-0001 and BP Canada Regional Production Unit (RPU) CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01 (see Figure 1).

2 Practice

The purpose of this document is to establish the minimum requirements and expectations associated with confined space entry, which is any work that occurs in a space that is large enough for workers to enter, has limited or restricted means of entry and is not designed for normal or continuous occupancy. It can be any enclosed or partially enclosed space where there is a risk of death or serious injury from hazardous substances or dangerous conditions (e.g., lack of oxygen).Examples of confined spaces include, but are not limited to:

• tanks• vessels• towers• heaters• silos• aerial coolers• bins• hoppers• tank cars• ventilation or exhaust ducts• sewers• underground utility tunnels or pipes• scale pits

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice



68


6968

• sumps• vessel skirts• mud pits• compressor fan housings• hoardings• diked areas (if more than 1.2 m or 4 ft deep and the

atmosphere cannot be guaranteed)

This practice applies to all BP Canada RPU employees, contracted employees, contractors and other visiting personnel doing work on BP Canada RPU premises andworksites.This practice provides guidelines for the development of site-specific procedures to prevent injury to workers by ensuring that an assessment of all known hazards, pre-job planning and communications are done before and during work in confined spaces.The purpose of this practice is to ensure that all reasonable precautions will be taken to protect the safety of workers who are or might be required to work in confined spaces.Where reasonably practical, alternative means for performing the work should be used instead of entering the confined space.

3 accountabilities


3.1 area authority/issuing authority

The Area Authority/Issuing Authority ensures that:

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice


68



6969

• all permanent and temporary confined spaces are identified, documented and labelled in the area of control e.g., CONFINED SPACE - NO ENTRY WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION

• workers who are involved in confined space work are adequately trained and competent

• atmospheric testing has been documented• an emergency response plan is in place, specific to

the work being performed• an adequate inventory of personal protective

equipment (PPE) is available at the work location, including supplied air, gas detection, harnesses, lifelines and ventilation equipment

• all workers required to wear respiratory protection are medically fit to wear the associated equipment and perform the required duties

• Confined Space Work Authorization is issued defining the conditions under which the work is to be performed and that all conditions are communicated to all workers at the site

• the confined space worksite location is properly prepared for the work to take place, i.e., the area is ventilated and isolated from external piping or equipment

• documents identify and communicate to all workers the possible hazards of working in the confined space and the controls in place to ensure the work is safe to proceed

• Disabled Safety Systems and Working on Energy Systems documentation is verified before a confined space is entered.(documentation must be accurate, current and available at the worksite)

• copies of the work authorization and associated documentation are retained at the worksite for the duration of the confined space entry operation

• Confined Space documentation is retained for a minimum of 24 months (Ontario operations

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice



70


7170

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice

state that permits must be retained for the period necessary to ensure that at least two of the most recent records that relate to a particular confined space are documented)

The Area Authority/Issuing Authority or designate must visit the worksite regularly to verify that permit conditions are met and confirm that original permit conditions apply to the ongoing work.


The Performing Authority is responsible for:• reviewing the need for a confined space entry,

ensuring all other options have been evaluated• holding a pre-job meeting to ensure everyone

involved in the confined space understands the hazards involved in the job, detailing:

o role and responsibilitieso the rescue plano equipment usedo isolation verification

• maintaining the safe conditions on which the permit is based

• suspending the work if the conditions cannot be maintained

• ensuring the confined space is evacuated if the work authorization is suspended or closed

• ensuring the work authorization is re-certified at the start of each work shift (US: 8 hours, Canada: as per applicable regulations) and that it complies with the entry procedure

• ensuring atmospheric monitoring is performed by a qualified gas tester

• ensuring detailed vessel diagrams are reviewed during the pre-job hazard assessment that include the following items where applicable:


70



7171

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice

o entry and exit pointso ventilation pointso blinding pointso nitrogen vent pointso level bridles and dead legs

• ensuring all workers are adequately trained and qualified

• agreeing to how the confined space will be isolated• agreeing to how the confined space will be ventilated• ensuring tests and measurements are taken to

determine if there are changes in the concentration of harmful substances or oxygen deficiencies

• ensuring an emergency and rescue plan is in place, documented, communicated and approved by the Area Authority/Issuing Authority

• ensuring information on the availability and proper use of PPE is communicated

• defining the maximum number of workers that have access to execute work within the confined space at any one time

• ensuring that workers entering the confined space are familiar with the layout of the confined space

• ensuring that only authorized workers enter the confined space

• notifying the Area Authority/Issuing Authority in the event of job delays or changing conditions and ensuring the worksite is re-inspected and tested by the Area Authority/Issuing Authority or designate before the job is allowed to resume

• ensuring the preparation and precautions are acceptable, understood and agreed to, before endorsing and accepting a Confined Space Entry Permit

• ensuring all safety equipment used in a confined space is in good working condition and inspected by a competent person



72


7372

• establishing a rescue plan approved by the Area Authority/Issuing Authority

• ensuring that any person entering the confined space is:

o aware of their responsibilities under this practiceo qualified to use all the PPE requiredo aware of the conditions of the confined space

entryo trained in all aspects of confined space entry

3.3 Workers

Each worker is responsible for recognizing the hazards of a confined space and taking corrective measures to work within those areas, ensuring that site-specific procedures and this practice are followed.Workers are responsible for:

• understanding hazards and following the conditions detailed in the work authorization

• reporting changing conditions to the Performing Authority and Safety Standby

• reporting conditions and practices that will not allow workers to follow the conditions of the work authorization

• using appropriate tools for the job and ensuring they are in good condition

• reporting defective or damaged tools• using respiratory protection and other PPE properly

(if breathing air is used, a full body harness must be worn)

• creating a tool list before and after entry and exit of the confined space

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice


72



7373

3.4 Safety Standby

The confined space Safety Standby is responsible for:• observing work tasks• monitoring and documenting atmospheric

conditions• ensuring there is constant communication with

workers inside the confined space• initiating an emergency rescue plan and activating a

rescue team• maintaining an entry log and tool log to ensure all

workers and tools are accounted for• ensuring unsupervised entry points are made

inaccessible or flagged with signs that read: CONFINED SPACE - NO ENTRY WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION

• monitor workers who are re-testing and logging atmosphere conditions before re-entry, i.e., after a work break or after lunch

• safety of the workersSafety Standby workers cannot leave their assigned post unless their personal safety is jeopardized, they are relieved by a competent person or the confined space is evacuated.note: The designated Safety Standby is not part of the work crew.Before confined space entry takes place the Safety Standby:

• ensures that the Confined Space Entry Rescue Plan has been completed and that all rescue equipment identified in the plan is available to execute a rescue in the identified confined space

• ensures that enough trained workers are available for immediate implementation of the rescue plan

• reviews with workers all emergency procedures, including procedures related to emergencies outside the confined space

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice



74


7574

• establishes communication with all workers, using the processes described in this rescue plan

On entry and while workers are in the confined space, the Safety Standby:

• ensures that they remain in constant communication with all workers inside the confined space

• must be notified immediately if a worker recognizes:o unusual action or behaviouro an unexpected hazardo an unsafe acto detects a condition prohibited by the permit

• must evacuate all workers from the confined space as quickly as possible, when:

o an order to evacuate is given by the Performing Authority

o a worker recognizes a sign or symptom of overexposure

o an unacceptable condition ariseso an evacuation alarm is activated

In the event of a confined space rescue, the Safety Standby does not enter the confined space, but immediately summons a rescue response from the onsite rescue team.

3.5 Rescue Workers

Rescue workers must be properly equipped and adequately trained to carry out rescue duties. This includes:

• annually participating in a practice drill• documenting and retaining records of training and

practice drills• completing and documenting CPR and first aid

training

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice


74



7575

If rescue workers are employees of another company, a written agreement detailing the provided rescue services must be on record.Before a worker enters a Class 2 or Class 3 confined space, the Performing Authority or the Safety Standby must notify rescue workers of the entry into the space.The Performing Authority or the Safety Standby must notify rescue workers when all workers have completed their work and exited from the Class 2 or Class 3 confined space.

3.6 Confined Space entry Subject Matter expert

A confined space entry subject matter expert (SME) might be designated by the Accountable Manager to provide expertise on the application of this practice.

4 Risk Management

Risk management is a systematic method of assessing work to identify associated hazards and analyze the potential consequences of those hazards. To execute work that presents no unnecessary risk to workers who could be adversely affected by the consequences of the work, all work will be subject to a risk management process. For the principles of BP Canada’s risk management system, see BP Canada RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01.

4.1 Standards

The following standards are generic, minimum performance or operational expectations for confined space entry.

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice



76


77

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice

76


A pre-job safety meeting must be held that reviews:• potential hazards, the emergency response

plan (ERP), safe work procedures and permit requirements

• responsibilities of the Performing Authority• expectations and responsibilities to stop all unsafe


near-miss incidents


Work must be classified into one of four categories according to RPU CoW Practice CP 45-00-01. The need to carry out confined space entry activities will follow the CoW Practice work classification guide (see Figure 2 under Guidelines).Confined space entry must not take place until all other options have been evaluated. The use of alternative techniques and equipment must be considered when planning confined space entry. Where alternative solutions are technically and economically acceptable, they should be used instead of entering the confined space.Entry into a confined space is when the plane of the entry point has been broken by any part of the body.Sites ensure that all confined space hazards are eliminated or mitigated and that work is performed in a safe manner. The following must be completed for all confined spaces:

• all confined spaces are classified and documented• Class 1, 2 and 3 confined spaces are labelled e.g.,

CONFINED SPACE - NO ENTRY WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION


76



7777

• hazard assessment and written confined space entry procedures are developed before a confined space is entered

Class 1 (non-Permit) Confined Space Requirements

If a worker enters a confined space that contains a low-hazard atmosphere (Class 1):

• another worker must be assigned as a Safety Standby stationed at or near the entrance to the space

• the Safety Standby must visually observe or otherwise check the well-being of the workers inside the space as often as required depending on the work performed

• there must be a continuous means of communicating with the Safety Standby

• the Safety Standby must be able to immediately summon rescue workers

• Confined Space Entry work authorization must be attained before entry

• a rescue plan must be in place• atmospheric monitoring must be scheduled as often

as required depending on the work performed• rescue equipment must be readily available

Class 2 (Permit Required) Confined Space Requirements

If a worker enters a confined space that contains a moderate-hazard atmosphere (Class 2), all Class 1 requirements must be met, in addition to ensuring that:

• lockout and tagout procedures are in place• continuous atmospheric monitoring is scheduled• the space is purged and ventilated• rescue equipment is set up and ready for use• workers are wearing a body harness• risk manage locating workers in the confined space

(i.e., using lifelines)

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice



78


7978

• Consider and risk manage:• Engulfment Hazard: The surrounding and

effective capture of a person by a liquid or finely divided solid substance (ex. sand) that can be aspirated to cause death by filling or plugging the respiratory system or that can exert enough force on the body to cause death by strangulation, constriction or crushing

• Configuration Hazard: An internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor that slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross section

• a confined space entry rescue plan is in place

Class 3 (Permit Required) Confined Space Requirements

If a worker enters a confined space that contains a high-hazard atmosphere (Class 3), all Class 2 requirements must be met, in addition to ensuring that:

• the Safety Standby is able to prevent the entanglement of lifelines and other equipment such as breathing apparatus air lines

• breathing apparatus is worn by all workers entering the confined space

Confined Space Entry Work Authorizations must be re-certified before each and every work shift (US: 8 hours, Canada: as per applicable regulations).

training and Qualifications

Training for confined space entry is mandatory to ensure workers associated with the confined space entry are trained and competent.Onsite facilities are required to complete individual training requirements that meet competency requirements for confined space work (see Table 1).Facilities must maintain up-to-date records that identify trainers and employees who completed the training for a minimum of two years.

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice


78



7979

Training and Qualifications

Training for confined space entry is mandatory to ensure workers associated with the confined space entry are trained and competent.

Onsite facilities are required to complete individual training requirements that meet competency requirements for confined space work (see Table �).

Table 1: Competency Requirements for Confined Space Work

Confined Space Role

ThisPractice

First Aid CPR

Pre-Entry Training

CF Entry Training

RescueTraining

Planning and Completing CF Work Authorization and Documentation

X X

Working in a Confined Space X X X X Safety Watch X X X X Confined Space Rescue X X X X X

Facilities must maintain up-to-date records that identify trainers and employees who completed the training for a minimum of two years.

For a complete list of training and competency assessment requirements see OMS CF ��-00-09 and OMS CP ��-00-06 respectively.

Pre-Entry Cleaning

All confined spaces must be cleaned before entry according to the nature of the product and residue, using the most practical method. Workers may enter a confined space for cleaning only after all other reasonable means have been exhausted. Mechanical methods of cleaning are preferred, and should be used before any workers enter the confined space.

If clean, respirable air cannot be ensured in a confined space before entry, workers must wear appropriate PPE, including respirators.

If steam is used as a cleaning medium, cleaning workers must ensure:

appropriate respiratory and PPE is worn the confined space is cooled to ambient temperature adequate oxygen levels are present when cleaning is completed

Pyrophoric and other products capable of spontaneous combustion require special handling methods. See site-specific procedures and MSDS for handling these materials.

Sludge, fluids and all used cleaning materials should be disposed of according to regulatory requirements and site-specific waste handling procedures.

Inerting

If an inert gas is used to protect against an explosive or flammable atmosphere, the Area Authority/Issuing Authority must:

obtain approval from the Accountable Manager

notify appropriate provincial or state authorities, e.g., the province of British Columbia requires seven days written notice before entry is initiated

For a complete list of training and competency assessment requirements see OMS CF 22- 00-09 and OMS CP 22-00-06 respectively.Pre-entry Cleaning

All confined spaces must be cleaned before entry according to the nature of the product and residue, using the most practical method. Workers may enter a confined space for cleaning only after all other reasonable means have been exhausted. Mechanical methods of cleaning are preferred, and should be used before any workers enter the confined space.If clean, respirable air cannot be ensured in a confined space before entry, workers must wear appropriate PPE, including respirators.If steam is used as a cleaning medium, cleaning workers must ensure:

• appropriate respiratory and PPE is worn• the confined space is cooled to ambient temperature• adequate oxygen levels are present when cleaning is

completedPyrophoric and other products capable of spontaneous combustion require special handling methods. See site-specific procedures and MSDS for handling these materials.Sludge, fluids and all used cleaning materials should be disposed of according to regulatory requirements and site-specific waste handling procedures.

inerting

If an inert gas is used to protect against an explosive or flammable atmosphere, the Area Authority/Issuing

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice



80


8180

Authority must:• obtain approval from the Accountable Manager• notify appropriate provincial or state authorities, e.g.,

the province of British Columbia requires seven days written notice before entry is initiated

• ensure all requirements for working in an inert atmosphere are followed

• ensure workers are equipped with supplied-air breathing apparatus (SABA)

• ensure all ignition sources are controlled• ensure the atmosphere in the confined space remains

inerted while workers are inside

Pre-entry isolation and entry

Electrical equipment controlling or connected in any way to the confined space or peripheral equipment must be tagged and locked as per BP Canada RPU Working on Energy Systems Practice OMS CF 41-00-04.Positive isolation is required for entry into Class 2 and 3 confined spaces. Necessary flanges must be blinded or all lines that carry harmful agents must be disconnected and misaligned at the closest point from the vessel of intended entry to confirm that no vapours or fluids will leak into the space.Lines that might allow fluids to enter the confined space must be disconnected, capped or blind flanged according to the Working on Energy Systems Practice.If connecting lines cannot be removed, capped or blind flanged, slip or pancake blinds rated for full line operating pressure must be used. If a full-rated American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) blind cannot be accomplished, a safe process must be developed in close cooperation with site engineers. The ASME size and rating, as well as the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) must be permanently marked on the handle so the information is visible when the blind is installed.

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice


80



8181

Blinds that do not meet engineering standards, and are not marked accordingly, will not be used.A blind list must accompany the site-specific job procedure for the confined space entry.Disconnecting or blanking must be performed as close to the confined space as practical.It is acceptable to include a re-boiler or exchanger as part of the package for the confined space, if the entire system is tested according to the following guidelines:

• A continuous oxygen monitor is required in a Class 2 or Class 3 confined space, or in a Class 1 confined space where the atmosphere cannot be guaranteed.

• When gases lighter than air might be present, continuous monitoring of high points is required.

• When gases heavier than air might be present, continuous monitoring of low points is required.

• Toxic or otherwise hazardous vapours or gases such as hydrogen sulphide must be continuously monitored to ensure conditions on the permit have not changed.

• If benzene is known to exist in the stream, it must be monitored before entry and at frequent intervals.

• If naturally occurring radioactive materials (NORM) are known to exist in the stream, they must be tested.

• All efforts must be made to monitor, minimize and protect against noise.

• Rotating equipment must be immobilized and secured against accidental movement.

atmospheric Monitoring

Atmospheric monitoring of the space must be done not more than 20 minutes before entry.Initial atmospheric monitoring is done under the direction of the Issuing Authority andrecorded on the permit.Atmospheric monitoring is done using calibrated

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice



82


8382

monitoring instruments following themanufacturer’s specifications.Before entry, the internal atmosphere must be tested with a calibrated direct-readinginstrument for conditions in the following order:

• oxygen deficiency or enrichment• lower explosive limit (LEL) flammability• toxic vapours and gases, e.g., H2S• NORM

Continuous atmospheric monitoring is done in confined spaces with a moderate-hazard atmosphere (Class 2) or high-hazard atmosphere (Class 3).Where atmospheric monitoring is not continuous, confined spaces are re-tested after work breaks, work shift changes and at a minimum, every 20 minutes while the space is occupied.Confined spaces are ventilated to ensure a known working atmosphere and to prevent accumulation of any other harmful substances.Confined spaces are ventilated to ensure a known working atmosphere and to prevent accumulation of any other harmful substances. Acceptable levels have:

• 19.5 % to 23 % oxygen (by volume)• 0 % LEL or 10% maximum with continuous

monitoring• 0 ppm H2S to a maximum of 10 ppm for eight

hours with monitoring• less than 0.5 ppm• Any other atmospheric concentration containing

a toxic substance above the Canadian Federal and Provincial Occupational Exposure Levels (OEL) or US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Permissible Exposure Limits (PEL) where applicable.

• Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to life and health (IDHL).

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice


82



8383

If 0% LEL or 0 ppm H2S cannot be achieved, the Accountable Manager must authorize the work to proceed.Continuous ventilation providing a minimum of 85 m3/h (50 cfm) of clean respirable air is required for each person inside the confined space.Continuous ventilation is not required in a confined space that has a low-hazard atmosphere if all the following conditions apply to the space:

• the atmosphere is continuously monitored and shown to contain clean, respirable air

• the internal volume is greater than 1.8 m3 (per occupant)

• the space is occupied for less than 15 minutes• the work inside the space generates no contaminants

other than exhaled airIf mechanical ventilation is required in a confined space, workers must be alerted to a failure of the system so they have sufficient time to exit the confined space.Respiratory protection must be worn by all workers while performing initial and re-entry atmospheric testing for Class 2 and Class 3 confined spaces.For hot work activities in a confined space, the following conditions must be met:

• the atmospheric concentration must be 0% of the LEL

• the atmosphere must not contain an oxygen content greater than 21%

• the atmosphere must be continuously monitored• hot work authorization must be obtained

temporary Heating devices

Heaters used to maintain a suitable thermal environ-ment inside the confined space must be located outside the space with the hot air supply ducted into the space

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice



84


8584

(see manufacturer’s instructions for setup and venting of the heating device).Direct-fired heaters discharge exhaust gases with the heated air, and will not be used to heat confined spaces while they are occupied. If direct-fired heaters are used, the Issuing Authority must confirm a safe working atmosphere before entry.The Issuing Authority must reassess whether the ventila-tion for the confined space heating devices might release additional toxic, explosive or flammable materials at elevated temperatures.Communication

The Safety Standby and the authorized workers must establish and maintain a practical method of communi-cation in the confined space. This method must include at least two of the following:• simple voice• visual contact• radio equipment• alarm horn• rope attached to the workerA system of communication must also be established and maintained between the Safety Standby and the rescue worker(s).

electrically operated equipment

When working in confined spaces, preference should be given to pneumatic, portable tools and explosion-proof lamps. Electrical equipment must be tested for ground continuity before it is used in a confined space.AC electrical equipment used in the confined space must be used in conjunction with a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFI). GFIs must be located as close to the receptacle as possible.

Static electricity

If there is potential to generate static electricity, static-

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice


84



8585

relief procedures must be considered. Conditions that might lead to static electricity include:

• using high-pressure steam• nitrogen• air hoses discharging to atmosphere• vacuum hoses• using sandblasting equipment• type of clothing worn

unsupervised entry Points

All confined spaces must be secured when left unat-tended. Barricades, closures and warning signs (e.g., CONFINED SPACE – NO ENTRY WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION) are required at all unsupervised entry points to identify that the confined space must not be entered by unauthorized workers.

emergency Rescue Plan

An emergency rescue plan must be developed using the Rescue Plan template and rescue workers must be des-ignated who are accessible to the job. Before a confined space entry is initiated:

• a rescue plan must be completed, reviewed, documented and kept on file onsite

• equipment required to implement the rescue plan must be in place

A rescue worker must not enter a confined space unless there is at least one additional worker located outside to render assistance.Effective voice communication must be maintained at all times between workers engaged in the rescue or evacuation and the person directing the rescue. Rescue or evacuation from a confined space must be directed by a supervisor who is adequately trained in rescue procedures or who is a qualified rescue person. A self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or supplied air

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice



86


87

Fig

ure

2:

Wo

rk C

lass

ific

atio

n G

uid

e –

Co

nfi

ned

Sp

ace

En

try

Figure 2: Work Classification guide – Confined Space entry

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice


86



87

Fig

ure

2:

Wo

rk C

lass

ific

atio

n G

uid

e –

Co

nfi

ned

Sp

ace

En

try

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice



88


8988

breathing apparatus (SABA) with escape bottle, must be used during rescue operations in an unknown or Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH) atmosphere.


If work is interrupted because of an emergency, inter-vention or as advised by operations personnel, confined space entry operations must be suspended. Work must not resume until the area has been inspected by the Issu-ing Authority and determined to be safe. TheIssuing Authority must determine if a new permit is required.


On completion of work, the Area Authority/Issuing Authority must inspect the worksite to confirm that the area has been cleared of tools, equipment and other work materials and that the worksite has been left in a safe condition.

document Control

Once work is completed, work authorizations, hazard assessment forms and associated documents must be signed off in accordance with the work authorization and retained for 13 months. The location of completed documents is defined in the site’s forms and records matrix as per procedures OMS CP 43-00-02 and OMS CP 43-00-03.

4.2 guidelines


Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice


88



8989

Subject Matter expert assessments

It is recommended that the hazard assessment risk management plan and confined space entry procedures are prepared or reviewed by a qualified person who has adequate training and experience in the recognition of confined space hazards.Adequate training qualifications and experience include the following:

• industrial hygienist with applicable professional designation (e.g. CIH or ROH)

• safety advisor with applicable professional designation (e.g. CSP or CRSP)

• professional engineer• combination of education, training and

experience acceptable to the applicable federal, state or provincial authorities or delegated by the Accountable Manager

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice



90


9190


5.1 Canadian Provincial Regulations

This practice is subject to the following provincial regulatory requirements:

• Alberta: Occupational Health and Safety Code 2009 and Occupational Health and Safety Explanation Guide 2009, as amended – Part 5: Confined Spaces, Part 15: Managing the Control of Hazardous Energy

• British Columbia: Occupational Health and Safety Regulation, B.C. Reg. 296/97 and associated guidelines, as amended – Part 9: Confined Spaces

• Ontario: Industrial Establishments, R.R.O. 1990, Reg. 851, as amended – Part I.1: Confined Spaces 119.1 to 119.20

• Ontario: Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91, as amended – Part II.1: Confined Spaces 221.1 to 221.19

• Saskatchewan: Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 1996, R.R.S. c. O-1.1 Reg 1, as amended – Part XVIII: Confined Space Entry and Section 369: Flammable or Explosive Substance in Atmosphere

5.2 Canadian Federal Regulations

This practice is subject to the following federal regulatory requirements:

• Canada Occupational Health and Safety Regulations, SOR/86-304, as amended – Part XI: Confined Spaces

• Oil and Gas Occupational Safety and Health Regulations, SOR/87-612 – Part XII: Confined Spaces

Con

fined

Spa

ce

Ent

ry P

ract

ice


90



9191

5.3 uS Regulations

• Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 29 CFR 1910.119(j), 1910.146

gRound diStuRBanCe PRaCtiCe

1 Policy

This is one of the practices under the BP Group Defined Practice for Control of Work (CoW) Policy GDP 4.5-0001 and BP Canada CoW Strategic Performance Unit (RPU) Practice OMS CP 45-00-01 (see Figure 1).

2 Practice

This practice establishes minimum ground disturbance requirements to avoid contact with unidentified under-ground objects or facilities during ground disturbance activities.This practice applies to all BP Canada RPU employees, contracted employees, contractors and other visiting personnel doing work on BP Canada RPU premises andworksites.

3 accountabilities



Through their site policy, Accountable Managers will designate selected individuals who have sufficient

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice



92


9392

experience and background to competently serve as a Performing Authority for ground disturbance activities as defined by this practice.Performing Authority must receive specific formal train-ing on the provisions of this practice and related pro-cedures. Records of training must be available. Contact your local safety representative for further information regarding required training. The Performing Authority is responsible for ensuring that work is conducted in a safe manner and in accordance with applicable legislation. It is also the Performing Authority’s responsibility to ensure that an updated record of changes or additions to underground pipelines or utilities is forwarded to facility management.The Performing Authority must have in their possession a copy of the Standard Safety Practices Manual, Safe Procedures for Pipeline and Utility Crossings Manual and the Pipeline Act and Regulations and Occupational Health and Safety regulations (applicable to province/state) and must be thoroughly familiar with all sections outlining requirements applicable to the job at hand. It is the designated supervisor’s responsibility to reference these manuals before the ground disturbance and ensure all applicable requirements are addressed.

3.2 ground disturbance Subject Matter expert

A ground disturbance subject matter expert (SME) might be designated by the Accountable Manager to provide expertise on the application of this practice.

4 Risk Management

Risk management is a systematic method of assessing work to identify associated hazards and analyze the potential consequences of those hazards. To execute work that presents no unnecessary risk to workers who could be adversely affected by the consequences of the

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice


92



9393

work, all work will be subject to a risk management process. For the principles of BP Canada RPU’s risk management system, see BP Canada RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01.

4.1 Standards

The following standards are minimum expectations for ground disturbance.

• Any damage to underground facilities must be reported and documented (e.g., coating damage).

• All protective trench devices temporarily used in an excavation must be certified by a professional engineer.

• Ground movement must be controlled and collapse prevented by systematically shoring, sloping and benching, and using temporary protective devices (see Section 4.3, Guidelines).

• Workers who supervise or independently create a ground disturbance must have training and be onsite.

• Excavations deeper than 1.2 m (4 ft) require sloping, shoring or cutbacks.

• Hydrovacing or hand exposure must be used on plant facilities (excluding well sites).

Under no circumstances should mechanical excavation be initiated until a separate documented risk manage-ment plan has been completed and the work has been authorized by the appropriate level of authorization, as outlined in RPU CoW PracticeOMS CP 45-00-01.

• Ground disturbance documentation must be filed in the facility Operating Management System (OMS), either electronically or in hard copy and kept for a period of not less than 13 months.

• A design engineer must provide the specifications for

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice



94


9594

shoring unless a manufactured package that meets regulations is used.

• The work to be carried out, number of workers and tools and equipment in the excavation, PPE requirements and need for a Safety Standby must be recorded in the ground disturbance documentation.

• Heavy equipment, including pickup trucks, must not cross a pipeline unless it is properly ramped or there is a minimum of 1.1 m (3.5 ft) of ground cover. Individual pipeline owners might have more stringent requirements that must be followed.


A pre-job safety meeting must be held that reviews the following:

• ground disturbance must not occur unless the designated supervisor is present at the dig site

• protective trench devices will be inspected as per manufactures’ specification prior to use

• mechanical excavation equipment must not be used to dig within 60 cm or 2 ft (as specified in the crossing agreement) of an exposed underground facility without the direct supervision of the facility owner’s representative. A spotter must be in place for all excavation near a pipeline

• proper cut-back and shoring must be done according to regulations and SSPM requirements

• care must be taken not to damage underground facilities when hand exposing; picks are not to be used


Work must be classified into one of four categories ac-cording to RPU CoW PracticeOMS CP 45-00-01.The need to carry out Ground Disturbance activities will follow the CoW

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice


94



9595

Practice work classification guide (see Figure 2 under Guidelines).training and Qualifications

All workers involved in ground disturbance must be trained, qualified and competent. Training can be formal or job specific and completed onsite by a competent person who has received formal Ground Disturbance Level II training from a recognized institute (Canada) or OSHA compliant training (US) and possesses a valid certificate of competency where applicable.For a complete list of training and competency assess-ment requirements see OMS CF 22- 00-09 and OMS CP 22-00-06 respectively. Onsite training must be documented and documentation must be made available when requested.


If work is interrupted because of an emergency, inter-vention or as advised by operations personnel, ground disturbance operations must be suspended. Work must not resume until the area has been inspected by the Issuing Authority and determined to be safe. The Issuing Authority will determine if a new permit is required.


On completion of work, the Area Authority or Issuing Authority or designate must inspect the worksite to con-firm that the area has been cleared of tools, equipment and other work materials and that the worksite has been left in a safe condition.document Control


Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice



96


9796

4.2 Special Conditions

This section describes special conditions under which operating outside the boundaries of the practice are acceptable and not all standards will apply.No special conditions apply.

4.3 guidelines

This section describes supporting information and rec-ommendations for use when judgment is involved. The following guidelines apply to all ground disturbances:

• If the atmosphere in a trench or excavation cannot be guaranteed safe, the excavation is considered a confined space.

• If an excavation is more than 1.2 m (4 ft) deep and closer to the wall or bank than the depth of the excavation, it must be properly shored, sloped or cut back before workers can enter the area. If this is not possible, an engineered-approved structure for shoring must be installed.

• Engineering certification and design are required for excavations deeper than 6 m or 20 ft (4.6 m in British Columbia).

Sloping

The correct procedure for sloping is as follows:• If the soil is considered:

o hard and compact, the walls are sloped to within 1.5 m (5 ft) of the bottom of the excavation at an angle of not less than 30° measured from the vertical

o likely to crack or crumble, the walls are sloped to within 1.5 m (5 ft) of the bottom of the excavation at an angle of not less than 45° measured from the vertical

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice


96



9797

o soft, sandy or loose, the walls are sloped from the bottom of the excavation at an angle of not less than 45° measured from the vertical

• The spoil pile is piled so that:o the leading edge is at least 1 m (3 ft) away from

the edge of the excavationo the slope of the spoil pile adjacent to the

excavation is at an angle of not more than 45° from the horizontal

o loose materials are scaled and trimmed from the spoil pile

During a ground disturbance, ground and atmospheric conditions must be continually monitored to provide confirmation of work area status to identify immediate or potential hazards (see BP Canada RPU Working in a Combustible Gas Environment Practice OMS CP 33-00-01).

Hydrovacing

The hand exposure or hydrovac hole must be large enough and suitably spaced to accurately determine line size and alignment. If exposing a section of pipeline for crossing or repair, the hydrovac ditch must be a minimum 1 m (3 ft) long and perpendicular to the line. Hydrovac trenches must be a minimum 0.5 m (1.5 ft) deeper than the intended depth of the excavation to avoid contact with lines situated below.When constructing a new pipeline parallel to an existing line, the existing line must be hand exposed or hydrova-ced initially to confirm location and then at appropriate intervals to confirm alignment. Intervals are determined by the performing authority and documented.Where the excavation is complex or involves multiple lines, hydrovacing should be considered the preferred means for exposing lines.

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice



98


99

Level C

Permit

Level B

Ground disturbance is

required.

Note: Work must be stopped if the following conditions are not met:An approved ground disturbance procedure is usedCompetent workers are specifically assigned to tasks

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No Yes

Note: Hand-exposure zones* for:Federally licensed pipeline is � m (�0 ft)Provincially licensed pipeline is 5 m (�6.5 ft)All other underground structures is � m (� ft)

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

*Zone distances taken from IRP �7 Ground Disturbance and Damage Prevention http://enform.ca/publications/irps/grounddisturbance.aspx

Decision Point

Does the work involve using a hand tool to dig to a depth of less than

�0 cm (�ft)?

Does the work involve pounding in wooden

survey pegs?

Does the work involve pushing in wire marker

flags?

Does the work involve grading a lease road?

Are you using a hydrovac?

Are you working in the hand-exposure zone for an underground utility?

Does the work take place within a plant

boundary?

Figure 2: Work Classification Guide – Ground Disturbance

Sloping

The correct procedure for sloping is as follows:

If the soil is considered:

Level C

Permit

Level B


required.


No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No Yes


No

No

Yes

Yes

No


Decision Point


�0 cm (�ft)?


survey pegs?


flags?





boundary?


Sloping



Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice


98



99

Level C

Permit

Level B


required.


No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No Yes


No

No

Yes

Yes

No


Decision Point


�0 cm (�ft)?


survey pegs?


flags?





boundary?


Sloping



Figure 2: Work Classification guide – ground disturbance

Level C

Permit

Level B


required.


No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No Yes


No

No

Yes

Yes

No


Decision Point


�0 cm (�ft)?


survey pegs?


flags?





boundary?


Sloping



Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice



100


101100

available Records

It is the Performing Authority’s responsibility to ensure that all available records and sources of information have been obtained and cross-referenced and contacts made to determine the existence and location of underground pipelines and utilities in the vicinity of the work area.The following information sources must be reviewed and agencies contacted when applicable to the job at hand:

• provincial / state / federal Pipeline Acts and Regulations

• National Energy Board where applicable• Energy Resources Conservation Board (ERCB) – in

Alberta the licensed map must be available onsite. This map must be obtained within 30 days of ground construction activity.

• Provincial / State One Call service– provides a list of companies who own buried structures in the proposed work area.

note: Not all companies are members of One Call Service.

• Land Titles office – local land titles office or BP Surface Rights Department (primarily applicable to pipeline construction) must be searched for the legal land description (LSD), and title certificates and survey plans. These documents should be acquired within 30 days of construction activities.

• other, e.g., software or utility tracking system• area operations personnel – plot plans or lease

drawings (as available) must be obtained and discussed with area operations personnel. Experienced company personnel familiar with area operations might be knowledgeable about pipelines or utilities not otherwise documented.

• landowners – might have knowledge of buried utilities not documented elsewhere

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice


100



101101

• visible company markers – check work area for pipeline or utility markers and ensure the company named has been contacted to supply additional information regarding underground facilities. (Never rely solely on company markers for location.) Markers might have been knocked down or removed and could have been repositioned inaccurately.

• visible indicators – check for signs of previous ground disturbances in the proposed working area, including the search or controlled zone. This might include pipelines, power lines, gas co-ops, utility cables, new clearings, road construction, pipeline signs, settlement, or vegetation colour change or growth. If any visual sign of activity is not reflected on the survey drawing, resurveying should be considered.

approvals and agreements

The Performing Authority is responsible for ensuring that:

• approvals and agreements (facility crossing agreements, proximity agreements as applicable) have been obtained

• pipeline permits and licences (new installations, additions to existing lines, abandonments) have been obtained

• the following receive notification:o pipeline owner on the intent to cause ground

disturbance in the controlled area (30 m or 100 ft outside the dig zone)

o pipeline registrar (i.e., ERCB, OGC) regarding the work on existing lines

o landowner

Plot Plans and drawings

Ground disturbance activities must not proceed without

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice



102


103102

a plot plan or drawing that clearly indicates the number of pipelines or utilities, line sizes, locations and align-ments. Plot plans or lease drawings must be reviewed and cross-referenced with other sources of information to ensure they are accurate and complete. Plot plans must be retained for two years.If a plot plan or lease drawing is not available, but has been determined from referencing other sources of in-formation that buried lines do indeed pass within 30m (100 ft) of the outside edge of the dig zone, a drawing must be prepared. This drawing can be hand drawn but must reflect all available information as accurately as possible. Overhead power lines that might pose a hazard during movement of equipment must also be clearly indicated and clearances must be maintained. For more details, see the Standard Safety Practices Manual (SSPM), electrical section.A copy of this drawing must also be reviewed with the equipment operator or observer.All known pipelines and utilities as noted on the plot plan or drawing that pass within the controlled area of an underground facility (30 m or 100 ft outside the dig zone) have been located and identified to indicate location and alignment. When crossing third-party underground facilities, a crossing agreement must be in place and a copy kept onsite. It must be determined in writing by the facility owner, who is responsible for the initial locate of underground facilities.

line-locate Scans

Line-locating procedures should be conducted in the presence of an operations person who is familiar with the area or lease and has in their possession a copy of the lease drawing or plot plan. The Designated Supervi-sor for the ground disturbance activity should also be present.The area should be electronically swept using four

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice


102



103103

separate grid patterns (i.e., north–south pattern followed by east–west as well as an angular pattern) to ensure maximum detection capabilities (see Figure 3). The scanned grid pattern should be marked on the plot plan indicating the location of all underground facilities.Colour-code guidelines for the line locates on the plot plan are as follows:

Red electric power lines, cables, conduit and lighting cables

Orange telecommunication, alarm or signal lines, cables or conduit

Yellow natural gas, oil, steam, petroleum or other gaseous or flammable material

Green sewers and drain lines

Blue drinking water

Violet reclaimed water, irrigation and slurry lines

Pink temporary survey markings, unknown/unidentified facilities

White proposed excavation limits or route

Figure 3: Scan Grid Pattern Lifespan of Locates

Any areas of interference (e.g., fence lines) should be clearly marked on the drawing. This information should be used in the risk assessment for the dig. Any areas of concern should be hydrovaced or hand exposed.

If the initial scan includes areas of interference or if the workplace is congested, a second independent scan should be considered.

Plot plans and drawings must be cross-referenced with the placement of markers before mechanical excavations to ensure there are no apparent inconsistencies. If there are inconsistencies between the plot plan or drawing and the placement of stakes, another line locate must be done to verify correct line location and alignment.

Consider the feasibility of locating all underground facilities and utilities and formal updating of plot plans and lease drawings before new construction involving ground disturbance activities.

Ground disturbance activities must be completed within �4 calendar days of the date locates were provided. Where the ground disturbance activity has not started within the �4-calendar day window, new locates are required. For ground disturbance activities that began but were not completed within �4 calendar days of date locates were provided, the line must be clearly identified to �0 m (�00 ft) beyond the dig zone and might require additional locates. For a flowchart outlining these circumstances, see Figure 4.

5 m

5 m

Figure 3: Scan grid Pattern lifespan of locates

Any areas of interference (e.g., fence lines) should be clearly marked on the drawing. This information should be used in the risk assessment for the dig. Any areas of

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice



104


105104

concern should be hydrovaced or hand exposed.If the initial scan includes areas of interference or if the workplace is congested, a second independent scan should be considered.Plot plans and drawings must be cross-referenced with the placement of markers before mechanical excavations to ensure there are no apparent inconsistencies. If there are inconsistencies between the plot plan or drawing and the placement of stakes, another line locate must be done to verify correct line location and alignment.Consider the feasibility of locating all underground facilities and utilities and formal updating of plot plans and lease drawings before new construction involving ground disturbance activities.Ground disturbance activities must be completed within 14 calendar days of the date locates were provided. Where the ground disturbance activity has not started within the 14-calendar day window, new locates are required. For ground disturbance activities that began but were not completed within 14 calendar days of date locates were provided, the line must be clearly identified to 30 m (100 ft) beyond the dig zone and might require additional locates. For a flowchart outlining these circumstances, see Figure 4.




• Alberta: Occupational Health and Safety Code 2009 and Occupational Health and Safety Explanation Guide 2009, as amended – Part 32 Excavating and Tunnelling

• Alberta: Pipeline Act, RSA 2000 c. P-15, as amended – Part 6, Sec. 32, 35, 42

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice


104



105105

• Alberta: Pipeline Regulation AR 91/2005, as amended – Part 5, Sec. 58 to 67

• British Columbia: Occupational Health and Safety Regulation, B.C. Reg. 296/97 and associated guidelines, as amended – Part 20 Construction, Excavation and Demolition, Sec. 20.1 to 20.3 (General Requirements), Sec. 20.78 to 20.95 (Excavations)

• Ontario: Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91, as amended – Part III Excavations.

• Ontario: Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems, O. Reg. 210/01, as amended – Sec. 9, 10

• Saskatchewan: Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 1996, R.R.S. c. O-1.1 Reg 1, as amended – Part XVII Excavations, Trenches, Tunnels and Excavated Shafts; Appendix, Table 17 Excavation and Trench Shoring

• Saskatchewan: Pipelines Act 1998, S.S. 1998 c. P-12.1, as amended – Sec. 20

• Saskatchewan: Pipelines Regulation 2000, R.R.S. c. P-12.1 Reg 1, as amended – Sec. 13


This practice is subject to the following federal regula-tory requirements:

• Canada Occupational Health and Safety Regulations, SOR/86-304, as amended – Part III Temporary Structures and Excavations, Sec. 3.12 (Excavation)

• Oil and Gas Occupational Safety and Health Regulations, SOR/87-612, as amended – Part IV Temporary Structures and Excavations, Sec. 4.13 (Excavation)

• National Energy Board Pipeline Crossing Regulations Part I & II, SOR 88-528, as amended.

Gro

und

Dis

turb

ance

P

ract

ice



106


107106

5.3 u.S. Regulations

This practice is subject to the following U.S. regulatory requirements:

• Federal OHSA Standard, 29 CFR 1926 650-652• Michigan OSHA Standard, R 408.40901-40953

Hot WoRK PRaCtiCe

1 Policy


2 Practice

The purpose of this document is to establish the mini-mum requirements and expectations associated with hot work activity, which is any work that generates sufficient heat or sparks to ignite combustible or flammable materials, or that has the potential for introducing ignition sources into hydrocarbon-containing or work authorization-required areas.This practice applies to all BP Canada RPU employees, contracted employees, contractors and other visiting personnel doing work on BP Canada RPU premises and worksites.

3 accountabilities


Hot

Wor

k P

ract

ice


106



107107

For a complete list of training and competency assess-ment requirements see OMS CF 22-00-09 and OMS CP 22-00-06 respectively.

3.1 Fire Watch

A Fire Watch might be required for site-specific hot work procedures and is responsible for observing the job and communicating with others if assistance is required. The Issuing Authority must assign a Fire Watch and verify their competence. The Fire Watch must have immediate access to emergency equipment such as a fire extinguisher, gas detector and two-way radio or other means of communication.A Fire Watch will be required whenever spark- or flame-emitting activities are performed or where any of the following conditions exist:

• appreciable combustibles are more than 8 m (US Only – 35 feet) away from the work area but are easily ignited by sparks (sparks might go outside the 8-m rule)

• wall or floor openings within 8 m (US Only – 35 feet) of exposed combustible material in adjacent areas, including concealed spaces in walls or floors

• combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of metal partitions, walls, ceilings or roofs and are likely to be ignited by conduction or radiation

Examples of activities requiring a Fire Watch include:• welding• cutting (with oxyacetylene or abrasive cut-off wheel)• grinding• any activity that creates a fire hazard because of

sparks or an open flameThe Fire Watch must:

• be familiar with the method for alerting personnel in the event of a fire (e.g., fire alarm)

Hot

Wor

k P

ract

ice



108


109108

• be trained to understand the inherent hazards of the worksite and of the hot work

• have fire extinguishing equipment (fire hose / fire extinguisher) readily available and be trained in its use

• watch for fires in all exposed areas, alert personnel if a fire is encountered and attempt to extinguish incipient fire(s) only when obviously within the capacity of the equipment available

• observe the area to confirm that the necessary fire protection equipment remains in place and is ready for use

• observe the area for combustible and flammable materials, including vapours and liquids

• conduct LEL monitoring• remain in the area while the work is being

performed, keeping the hot work in line-of-sight at all times

• remain in constant communication range with person(s) doing the hot work

• stop the work whenever conditions are unsafe• have no duties other than Fire Watch

3.2 Hot Work Subject Matter expert

A hot work subject matter expert (SME) might be desig-nated by the Accountable Manager to provide expertise on the application of this practice.

4 Risk Management

Risk management is a systematic method of assessing work to identify associated hazards and analyze the potential consequences of those hazards. To execute work that presents no unnecessary risk to workers who could be adversely affected by the consequences of the

Hot

Wor

k P

ract

ice


108



109109

work, all work will be subject to a risk management process. For the principles of BP Canada’s risk manage-ment system, see BP Canada RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01.

4.1 Standards

The following standards are generic, minimum perfor-mance or operational expectations for hot work.Hot work activity must not take place until all other options have been evaluated. Where such solutions are technically and economically acceptable, they should be used instead of hot work tasks.Hot work must not be conducted where the gas concen-tration exceeds 0% of the lower explosive limit (LEL). Any detection of LEL above 0% requires a search for the source of gas to eliminate or reduce LEL as low as reasonably possible before starting work.A hot work authorization will be issued at the worksite with direct communication between the Issuing Authority and Performing Authority. A single hot work authorization may be issued for activities covered under the same scope of work identified on the work order and risk assessment.Before completing and issuing the work authorization, the Issuing Authority must confirm that:

• appropriate controls are in place to prevent sparks and welding slag from migrating outside the immediate work area by positioning of the work or by using flooring or fire-retardant welding curtains, tarps or blankets

• ducts or conveyor systems that could carry sparks outside the immediate work area have been shut down, sealed or protected with fire-retardant material

• combustible materials on the floors, walls, partition ceilings or roofs that can be easily moved are relocated from the immediate work area. When the

Hot

Wor

k P

ract

ice



110


111

combustible material cannot be moved, all necessary precautions to protect against exposure must be taken before a hot work authorization is issued.

The Issuing Authority must verify documentation of disabled safety systems and energy isolations before hot work begins. Documentation must be accurate, up to date and available at the worksite.A copy of the signed work authorization(s) and associ-ated documentation must be retained at the job site for the duration of the hot work.


Work must be classified into one of four categories according to RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01.The need to carry out hot work activities will follow the CoW Practice work classification guide (see Figure 2 under Guidelines).Hot work activities can generally be classified as one of two types:

• spark- or flame-emitting• spark- or flame-potential

A spark- or flame-emitting activity is hot work that involves a high-energy or high-temperature process, or equipment likely to ignite flammable or combustible materials. Such activities can be difficult to confine and have the potential to shower sparks and hot molten slag outside a controlled work area.Examples of spark- or flame-emitting activities that will require Permit or Level A Hazard control include:

• welding• flame cutting• grinding• hot oiling or other trucking operations involving an

open flameSpark- or flame-potential activities produce energy sufficient to ignite materials. Spark- or flame-potential

Hot

Wor

k P

ract

ice


110



111

activities must be classified into Level B or C Hazard work based on a risk management plan for the specific task involving use of the following equipment:

• portable heaters or steamers• portable generators• sandblasting operations (static charges)• motor vehicles• non-intrinsically safe equipment

Work involving the use of intrinsically safe equipment is not considered hot work.


A pre-job safety meeting must be held that reviews:• potential hazards, the ERP, safe work procedures and

work authorization requirements• responsibilities of the designated supervisor• expectations and responsibilities to stop all unsafe

work• personal protective equipment (PPE) requirements• importance of reporting all accidents, injuries and

near-miss incidents


The Area Authority or Issuing Authority must visit the worksite regularly to verify that work authorization conditions are being complied with and confirm that original work authorization conditions apply to the ongoing work.

atmospheric testing

Before hot work begins, the worksite must be tested for flammable gases. The three typesof testing are:

• initial – before work begins• periodic – regular intervals during the work• continuous – uninterrupted

Hot

Wor

k P

ract

ice



112


113

Spark- or flame-potential activity is

identified,e.g., camera or

portable generator.

Permit Level A Level B Level C

Spark- or flame-emitting activity is

identified,e.g., grinding or

welding.

Hot work is identified.

Note: Work must be stopped if the following conditions are not met:Known flammable emissions are controlled on siteAn approved hot work procedure is usedCompetent workers are specifically assigned to tasks

Is the operationwithin 8 m (US sites-

�5ft) of a hydrocarbon source?

Decision Point



No

No

Is intrinsically safe equipment being used?

No

Yes

Yes

Work is not considered to be

Hot Work.

Yes

Figure 2: Work Classification Guide – Hot Work



portable generator.




welding.





Decision Point



No

No


No

Yes

Yes


Hot Work.

Yes


Hot

Wor

k P

ract

ice


112



113



portable generator.




welding.





Decision Point



No

No


No

Yes

Yes


Hot Work.

Yes




portable generator.




welding.





Decision Point



No

No


No

Yes

Yes


Hot Work.

Yes

Figure 2: Work Classification Guide – Hot Work Figure 2: Work Classification guide – Hot Work

Hot

Wor

k P

ract

ice



114


115

Initial atmospheric testing for flammable gases must be conducted by or under the direction of the Issuing Authority and recorded on the work authorization. Atmospheric testing before a work authorization is is-sued must be completed as close to the time the work is to begin as practical.The Performing Authority can conduct atmospheric testing if properly trained.If work is not started within one hour of when the work authorization was issued, or work has been interrupted for one hour or more, the atmosphere must be checked again and readings updated on the work authorization.


If work is interrupted because of an emergency, inter-vention or as advised by operations personnel, hot work operations must be suspended. Work must not resume until the area has been inspected by the Issuing Author-ity and determined to be safe. The Issuing Authority will determine if a new work authorization is required.


On completion of work, the Area Authority or Issuing Authority must inspect the worksite to confirm that the area has been cleared of tools, equipment and other work materials and that the worksite has been left in a safe condition.The Fire Watch must remain at the worksite for as long as necessary, but no less than 30 minutes after comple-tion of hot work operations, to detect and extinguish possible smoldering fires.The Issuing Authority must verify by signature at the worksite that the work is complete and that the hot work authorization is closed. A hot work authoriza-tion must not be closed until the Fire Watch has been released from duty.

Hot

Wor

k P

ract

ice


114



115

document Control



This section describes special conditions under which operating outside the boundaries of the practice are acceptable and not all standards will apply.The Accountable Manager can designate areas where hot work may be performed without a hot work authoriza-tion, such as a warehouse or workshop. These areas will be listed in the site hot work practice based on the risk management process.

4.3 guidelines


atmospheric Monitoring

Periodic atmospheric monitoring, as determined by the Issuing Authority, might be required to confirm that conditions remain suitable for hot work activities. While hot work is being performed, atmospheric monitoring must be repeated at regular intervals appropriate to the hazard associated with the work area.Continuous atmospheric monitoring is required when a Fire Watch is assigned to a job or task, as determined by the Issuing Authority. Frequency for recording continuous atmospheric monitoring readings on the work authorization must be determined by the Issuing Authority.

Hot

Wor

k P

ract

ice



116


117

When bulkheads or walls are involved in hot work, both sides require a Fire Watch.Caution must be used so that heat transmission through the steel members or pipe does not cause a hazard.




• Alberta: Occupational Health and Safety Code 2009 and Occupational Health and Safety Explanation Guide 2009, as amended – Part 10: Fire and Explosion Hazards, Sec. 162, 163, 164, 165, 166,169, 170

• Alberta: Code for Installations at Oil and Gas Facilities, Oil Field Code – Rules 19-102, 19-104, 19-106, 19-108

• British Columbia: Occupational Health and Safety Regulation, B.C. Reg. 296/97 and associated guidelines, as amended – Part 12: Tools, Machinery and Equipment, Sec. 12.112, 12.116, 12.126; Part 23 Oil and Gas, Sec. 23.1, 23.8, 23.7

• Ontario: Industrial Establishments, R.R.O. 1990, Reg. 851, as amended – Part I.1: Confined Spaces, Sec. 119.1, 119.9(2)9, 119.18

• Ontario: Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91, as amended – Part II.1: Confined Spaces, Sec. 221.2, 221.9(2)9, 221.17

• Ontario: Fire Code, O. Reg. 213/07, as amended – Sec. 5.17: Welding and Cutting

• Saskatchewan: Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 1996, R.R.S. c. O-1.1 Reg 1, as amended – Part XXV: Fire and Explosion Hazards, Sec. 359, 363, 367, 369, 370

Hot

Wor

k P

ract

ice


116



117



• Canada Occupational Health and Safety Regulations, SOR/86-304, as amended – Part XI: Confined Spaces, Sec. 11.1, 11.9.

• Canada Oil and Gas Occupational Safety and Health Regulations, SOR/87-612 Section 12: Hot Work in 5 Confined Spaces

• Canadian Electrical Code, Section 18: Hazardous Locations

5.3 u.S. Regulations

This practice is subject to the following U.S. regulatory requirements:

• Federal OHSA Standard, 29 CFR 1910.252 (General Industry)

• Michigan OSHA Standard, R 408.11261-11262 (General Industry)

liFting oPeRationS PRaCtiCe

1 Policy


2 Practice

The purpose of this document is to establish the mini-mum requirements and expectations associated with:

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e



118


119

• managing the hazards associated with lifting and rigging tasks

• identifying safe lifting and rigging practices• accountabilities involved in the planning, risk

management, authorization and execution of lifting and rigging activities

This practice applies to all BP Canada RPU employees, contracted employees, contractors and other visiting personnel conducting lifting and rigging operations onBP Canada RPU premises and worksites.The practice defines criteria for classifying a lift as Permitted, Level A, Level B or Level C, and subsequent authorization and risk management requirements as defined in BP Canada RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01.The practice outlines training and certification requirements for crane operators, crane inspection, maintenance requirements and fundamental operating requirements used throughout the BP Canada RPU.

3 accountabilities



The Performing Authority is responsible for lifting and rigging activities carried out at the worksite and is ac-countable to the Issuing Authority, for the safe delivery of work activity.

The Performing Authority ensures that:• workers seek guidance from a technical expert where

the job is beyond their experience level

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e


118



119

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e

• all cranes, hoists and rigging equipment are properly labelled and inspected daily before work begins

• safety devices installed on the lifting equipment are operational

• the load is positioned properly and proper rigging equipment and techniques are used to balance the load

• the load is directed throughout the various stages of the lift

• workers are aware of the hazards• workers understand communication methods and

hand signals• the HARM addresses all hazards and control

measures, including:o identifying the loads involved and that the lifting

equipment is adequate and otherwise ready for service for those loads

o confirming that the lift is clear of overhead obstacles and crane outriggers are not positioned over underground utilities

3.2 Signaller

The signaller is responsible for observing the load and lift, and providing direct instructions to the crane or hoist operator. The signaller must:

• have sufficient knowledge and experience to confirm that the lift is not manoeuvred in a hazardous manner

• ensure that communication and hand signals are reviewed with the crane operator before a lift begins

3.3 Wire Ropes, Chains and Slings

• Rigging shall be performed by competent riggers.



120


121

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e

• Chain slings used for lifting shall be grade 80, or better.

• The use of wire rope, chains, slings and associated fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended guidelines.

• Inspection shall be conducted by personnel competent in sling care, use, maintenance, and inspection.

• Lifting equipment shall be visually inspected for damage before use. Documentation of the “before use” inspection is not required.

• Synthetic fabric slings, wire rope slings, and steel alloy chain slings shall have a legible load rating attached. If the load rating is missing or cannot be read, the sling shall be taken out of service.

• Any sling found defective shall be removed from service immediately and repaired and or destroyed. (Refer to the manufacturer’s specifications on when a sling is defective)

• Prior to the initial use, any new, repaired, or reconditioned chain sling shall be proof tested by the manufacturer and applicable certification kept on file.

• Knots are never to be used with any sling, chain, or wire rope.

• Slings shall not be pulled from under a load when the load is resting on the sling.

• Hands and fingers shall never be placed between the sling and the load.

3.4 lifting Subject Matter expert

A lifting subject matter expert (SME) might be desig-nated by the Accountable Manager to provide expertise on the application of this practice.


120



121

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e

4 Risk Management

Risk management is a systematic method of assessing work to identify associated hazards and analyze the potential consequences of those hazards. To execute work that presents no unnecessary risk to workers who could be adversely affected by the consequences of the work, all work will be subject to a risk management process. For the principles of BP Canada RPU’s risk management system, see BP Canada RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01.

4.1 Standards

The following standards are generic, minimum perfor-mance or operational expectations for lifting.


A pre-job safety meeting must be held that reviews:• potential hazards, the ERP, safe work procedures and

permit requirements• responsibilities of the designated supervisor• expectations and responsibilities to stop all unsafe

work• personal protective equipment (PPE) requirements• importance of reporting all accidents, injuries and

near-miss incidents


Work must be classified into one of four categories ac-cording to RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01.The need to carry out lifting activities will follow the CoW Practice work classification guide (see Figure 2 under Guidelines).



122


123

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e

level C lifts

A Level C lift is a lifting operation that uses basic lifting equipment, in a controlled environment, with limited ambient hazards. Examples include:

• moving a pallet of freight with a forklift or bobcat with pallet forks

• using a chain block and tackle• using a manual hoist directly suspended from

dedicated lifting structures such as engineered beams directly above the load

• loading a logging truck with timberThe load being lifted must have certified lifting points or be secured by an approved method and the weight of the load must be known. Only a single item of lifting equipment and one set of lifting accessories (e.g., sling, shackle or eyebolt) will be used at one time.

level B lifts

A Level B lift is a lifting operation that is low risk and uncomplicated. Examples include:

• lifts requiring a lift calculation since the load is greater than 50% of the lifting capacity

• a lift that takes place within two times the maximum radius of the crane boom of an operating process, but contact with that process or equipment would not result in a release of energy or fluid

• pre-planned lifting operations involving overhead or gantry cranes

The lift should present no unusual hazards.

level a lifts

A Level A lift is a lifting operation that is higher risk. Examples include:

• lifting a vertical structure under 25 m ( 80 ft)


122



123

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e

• a lift that takes place within two times the maximum radius of the crane boom of an operating process, and contact with that process or equipment could result in a release of energy or fluid

• any lift that contains unusual hazards identified in the HARM discussion

A lift calculation sheet and lift plan might be required for a Level A lift.

Permit lifts

A lift will require a permit if the:• load requires mobile lifting capacity of more than

45 t• load is a flare stack or vertical structure greater than

25 m (80 ft)• lift is classified as critical

In addition to a permit, a Critical Lift Plan must be completed for all lifts defined ascritical lifts. The following lifts are considered critical:

• lifting directly over live process equipment• lifting where the equipment operator cannot see the

load or signal person (blind lift)• lifts that exceed 75% of the lifting equipment

capacity• lifting a person in a work platform suspended from

or attached to a crane or hoist• using poles or derricks that have been erected for a

specific lift• lifting where energized electrical power lines are

within twice the maximum swing radius of the crane, plus the required voltage clearance

• lifting with two or more lifting devices simultaneously to lift one load.*

*Note: Using boom cats during pipeline stringing operations



124


125

would not be considered a critical lift.When workers use manbaskets (excludes manlifts and scissor lifts), manbaskets must be designed and certified by a professional engineer and visually inspected before the lift is made. Lifts that use manbaskets must conform to CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z150-98 (R2008) safety codes on mobile cranes (Canada) and CFR 1926.550(g) (US).

For all critical lifts, a Critical Lift Plan must be com-pleted. The following documentation must be provided for all critical lifts:

• detailed crane configuration drawing (if using cranes)• maximum allowable wind speed (if using cranes)• detailed drawing of the load• detailed site plot plan• detailed rigging drawing• Lift Calculation Worksheet


general operation

A substantial and durable rating chart with clearly legible letters and figures must be provided with each crane and securely fixed to the crane cab in a conspicu-ous location visible to the operator while seated at the controls.Cranes must not be operated without the full amount of any ballast or counterweight in place, as specified by the manufacturer. The manufacturer-specified ballast or counterweight in place must not be exceeded.The power line operator must be contacted before operating lifting equipment within 7 m of an energized overhead power line to determine the voltage of the power line and establish the appropriate safe distance of

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e


124



125

approach. A competent signal person must be stationed at all times within view of the operator to warn the operator when any part of the machine or its load is approaching the minimum safe distance from the power line.

Voltage of Power Lines (kV)

Distance(m)

0 to 50 �.0 50 to �00 4.6 �00 to �50 7.6 �50 to 750 �0.7

750 to �000 ��.7 SOURCE: CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z�50-98 (R�008) safety codes on mobile cranes

U.S

Voltage of Power Lines (kV)

Distance(feet)

0 to 50 �0 5� to �00 �5 �0� to �50 �0 50� to 750 �5

75� to �000 45

Power lines within twice the maximum swing radius of the crane plus the minimum required voltage clearance constitute a Critical Lift.

When operating, no part of any crane or load is permitted to approach closer to any power line than the distance specified in Table �, unless the electrical authority has been notified and the line de-energized and visibly grounded at the point of work, or where insulating barriers not a part of, or an attachment to the crane have been erected to prevent physical contact with the lines insulated.

The crane operator must not lift or carry any load over or above personnel. The area of the lift over which the load is carried should be barricaded (i.e., with rope or tape) and signed. All unnecessary workers will be restricted from the barricaded area.

No hoisting, lowering, swinging or travelling will be done while workers are on the load or the hook.

All crane hooks must be equipped with a positive-locking safety latch.

The crane operator must test the brakes each time a load approaching the rated load is handled by raising it a few inches and applying the brakes.

Anyone may give the command to STOP, which will be obeyed by everyone, including the crane or hoist operator.

Backhoes, track hoes, front-end loaders, side loaders and similar earth-moving equipment may be used only for incidental lifting for which they are designed, and a Critical Lift Plan might be required. Such use of this equipment must comply with the equipment manufacturer’s requirements, specifications and designs for lifting.

While making lifts, cranes equipped with outriggers must have the outriggers fully deployed whenever possible. Wood blocks used to support outriggers must be:

strong enough to prevent crushing

table 1: Minimum distance from live electric Power lines

Power lines within twice the maximum swing radius of the crane plus the minimum required voltage clearance constitute a Critical lift.

When operating, no part of any crane or load is permitted to approach closer to any power line than the distance specified in Table 1, unless the electrical authority has been notified and the line de-energized and visibly grounded at the point of work, or where insulating barriers not a part of, or an attachment to the crane have been erected to prevent physical contact with the lines insulated.

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e



126


127

The crane operator must not lift or carry any load over or above personnel. The area of the lift over which the load is carried should be barricaded (i.e., with rope or tape) and signed.All unnecessary workers will be restricted from the barricaded area.No hoisting, lowering, swinging or travelling will be done while workers are on the load or the hook.All crane hooks must be equipped with a positive-locking safety latch.The crane operator must test the brakes each time a load approaching the rated load is handled by raising it a few inches and applying the brakes.Anyone may give the command to STOP, which will be obeyed by everyone, including the crane or hoist operator.Backhoes, track hoes, front-end loaders, side loaders and similar earth-moving equipment may be used only for incidental lifting for which they are designed, and a Critical Lift Plan might be required. Such use of this equipment must comply with the equipment manufacturer’s requirements, specifications and designs for lifting.While making lifts, cranes equipped with outriggers must have the outriggers fully deployed whenever pos-sible. Wood blocks used to support outriggers must be:

• strong enough to prevent crushing• free of defects• of sufficient width and length to prevent shifting or

toppling under loadLifting calculations change when outriggers cannot be fully deployed (see the crane load chart).The potential existence of underground piping or elec-trical equipment must be addressed in the HARM and mitigated appropriately.The crane operator must not be permitted to leave their position at the controls while the load is suspended.

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e


126



127

Suspended loads must never be left unattended.Neither the load nor the boom must be lowered below the point where less than five full wraps of cable remain on their respective drums.Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses and other necessary articles must be stored in the toolbox and not be permit-ted to lie loose in the cab.Cranes must not be refuelled while the engine is run-ning.Cranes must be equipped with a carbon dioxide, dry chemical or equivalent fire extinguisher in an easily accessible location.A signal person is required to direct the lifting operator in a blind zone. The signal person should be competent in the use of signalling to direct the lift operator (see Lifting Hand Signals).note: Loads must not be lifted when winds create an unsafe or hazardous condition, regardless of wind speed. The HARM must be re-evaluated when the wind speed exceeds 24 km per hour (15 mph) and lift operations suspended when wind speeds reach 50 km per hour (30 mph) for cranes with booms.A load must not exceed the dynamic or static capabili-ties of the lifting equipment. Crane capacity must be evaluated for each lift and a copy of the evaluation kept for the duration of the job. Loads exceeding 75% of the gross capacity of the crane configuration required to complete the lift is considered a critical lift (see the Lifting Calculation Worksheet).During hoisting, the operator should ensure there is no sudden acceleration or deceleration of the moving load.Lifts must not exceed the rated local capacity of the crane, slings, chains, cables or any other rigging and lifting equipment.On truck-mounted cranes, no loads will be lifted over the cab of the vehicle except as approved by the crane manufacturer.

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e



128


129

A test lift should be done by lifting the load off the ground, bearing the weight and testing for centre of bal-ance. If required, a dry run should be done to confirm the load path.For all blind lifts (lifts where the equipment operator cannot see the load or signal person), a signal person (or other defined means of communication) must be designated before work starts.

Hoisting operation

Crane hoisting must be kept vertical and cranes must not be used as equipment to drag loads sideways.The controls of overhead cranes must be a constant manual-pressure type (must return to neutral when pressure from the operator is released) as required by regulators.

Moving the load

Before a load is moved, all slings, chains, or other load-lifting devices must be fully seated in the saddle of the hook.The area within twice the crane working boom length radius (debris field) must be roped off or otherwise bar-ricaded to prevent unnecessary workers from entering the work area.Everyone in the immediate area must be clear of the load and aware that a load is being moved. When rais-ing, lowering or moving loads, a horn or some other method must be used to warn personnel in the area that a lift is taking place.Tag lines of sufficient length must be used to steady or guide the loads as they are being moved unless they would be ineffective (e.g., extremely heavy large loads) or create an uncontrolled hazard, as addressed by the HARM. Tag lines of nonconductive synthetic rope must be used if there is a danger of contact with energized electrical equipment.

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e


128



129

Rig matting may be moved without tag lines, ensuring the load is less than 1 m from the ground and workers are standing back from the load.

travelling

When travelling without a load, the empty hook must be secure, and the boom in its saddle and not extended.Speed must not exceed the manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.If a crane is transporting a load, the following must be addressed in the HARM:

• position of the load• boom location• ground condition• spotter requirements• travel route• ground speed should not exceed 5 kph• tag rope requirements

Only cranes designed to travel with loads must be used.Drilling and Well ServicingDrilling and service rigs must be maintained and inspected according to the manufacturers’ or American Petroleum Institute’s (API’s) specifications. Certification of masts will be according to CADOC Recommended Practice 1, 2, 3 and 4.Drilling and service rigs must also comply with the relevant section in the provincialOccupational Health and Safety regulations (see Regula-tory Requirements).Inspection and MaintenanceAll cranes, hoists and rigging equipment must be in-stalled, erected, checked, labelled, examined, inspected, tested, operated, maintained and repaired by a compe-tent person, in accordance with applicable provincial regulations.

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e



130


131

All lifting and rigging equipment must be inspected an-nually and before use. Inspections must cover the items listed in the Lifting Equipment Inspection Checklist and the most recent inspection documentation must be onsite and available on request.Cranes must be inspected annually, as per CSA Standard CAN/CSA Z150-98 (R2008) safety codes on mobile cranes and applicable provincial regulations and OSHA 1910.550.All lifting and rigging equipment must receive preven-tive maintenance based on manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.All lifting devices must be permanently labelled to show the manufacturer’s rated load capacity or the rated load capacity according to a professional engineer’s certification.All damaged lifting and rigging equipment must be removed from use immediately and destroyed or discarded, or repaired and certified by the manufacturer (for guidelines for sling damage, see the Sling Guidelines and Checklist).Anti-two-block devices and two-block damage preven-tion features must be installed on all cranes and then inspected.

training and Qualifications

Only trained and competent authorized workers or trainees under the direct supervision of trained and competent authorized workers will be permitted to operate cranes and hoists or rig up for lifting.For a complete list of training and competency assess-ment requirements see OMS CF 22-00-09 and OMS CP 22-00-06 respectively.Contractors and subcontractors must provide trained crane operators, signallers and riggers, and maintain their training records and make them available on request.

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e


130



131

A lifting SME must:• have sufficient training, knowledge and experience to

advise on safe lifting activities• understand the requirements associated with rigger,

signal person and crane or hoist operator• complete and pass a minimum three-day formal

lifting training programTo be competent as a crane operator, the worker must:

• meet the crane operator competency requirements based on the lifting capacity of the equipment

• be designated as a competent operator by their employer to operate cranes

• hold an appropriate provincial/state/federal Crane Operator’s Certificate as required based on the lifting equipment weight rating

• meet the requirements of a competent rigger and signaller

• demonstrate the ability to read and comprehend load capacity charts in the language of the crane manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instruction materials

• satisfactorily complete an evaluation on load chart use that covers a selection of the operating configurations for the specific type of equipment

• demonstrate knowledge of inspection requirements for equipment, including safety devices being operated

• demonstrate the ability to read, understand and implement lift plans and drawings

• demonstrate the ability to recognize hazards and risks in the lift area

• have a clear understanding of lift dynamics• have previous experience or familiarity with the type

of lift to be performed• demonstrate knowledge of the Performing Authority

position

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e



132


133

No

Yes

No

Per

mit

Leve

l B

A li

fting

situ

atio

n is

iden

tifie

d.

No

te:

Wor

k m

ust b

e st

oppe

d if

the

follo

win

g co

ndi

tions

are

not

met

:K

now

n lif

ting

situ

atio

ns a

re c

ontr

olle

d at

the

pla

ntA

n a

ppro

ved

liftin

g pr

oced

ure

is u

sed

Com

pete

nt w

orke

rs a

re s

peci

fical

ly a

ssig

ned

to ta

sks

Yes

No

No

Yes

Leve

l A

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Leve

l C

Yes

Yes

Leve

l A

No

No

No

Dec

isio

n P

oin

t

Is th

is a

crit

ical

lift

as

desc

ribed

by

the

pra

ctic

e?

Doe

s th

e lif

t req

uire

mob

ile

liftin

g eq

uipm

ent w

ith a

lif

ting

capa

city

mor

e th

an45

ton

s?

Doe

s th

e lif

t inv

olve

set

ting

up a

tall

vert

ical

str

uctu

re,

i.e.,

a f

lare

sta

ck o

r co

mm

unic

atio

ns to

wer

?

Is th

e lif

t ta

king

pla

ce

with

in tw

o tim

es th

e m

ax.

radi

us (

�60

deg

rees

) of

the

cr

ane

boo

m o

r of

an

ope

ratin

g pr

oce

ss?

Cou

ld a

ccid

ent

al c

onta

ct

with

the

su

rrou

ndi

ng

proc

ess

or e

qui

pm

ent

re

sult

in a

rel

ease

of

ener

gy o

r a

flui

d?

Do

es th

e lif

t inv

olv

e a

vert

ical

str

uctu

re th

at is

hi

ghe

r th

an �

5 m

(80f

t)?

Is th

e lif

ting

wor

k ca

rrie

d

out i

n a

co

ntro

lled

en

viro

nmen

t, i.e

., a

wa

reho

use

, sho

p or

lay

dow

n a

rea

?

Has

the

lifti

ng e

quip

men

t b

een

spec

ifica

lly d

esig

ned

or

eng

inee

red

for

the

lift?

Is th

e lo

ad w

eig

ht u

nder

50

% o

f the

load

cap

aci

ty o

f th

e lif

ting

equ

ipm

ent a

nd

less

tha

n �0

00 k

g

(440

0 lb

s)?

Fig

ure

2:

Wo

rk C

lass

ific

atio

n G

uid

e –

Lif

tin

g O

per

atio

ns

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e


132



133

No

Yes

No

Per

mit

Leve

l B

A li

fting

situ

atio

n is

iden

tifie

d.

No

te:

Wor

k m

ust b

e st

oppe

d if

the

follo

win

g co

ndi

tions

are

not

met

:K

now

n lif

ting

situ

atio

ns a

re c

ontr

olle

d at

the

pla

ntA

n a

ppro

ved

liftin

g pr

oced

ure

is u

sed

Com

pete

nt w

orke

rs a

re s

peci

fical

ly a

ssig

ned

to ta

sks

Yes

No

No

Yes

Leve

l A

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Leve

l C

Yes

Yes

Leve

l A

No

No

No

Dec

isio

n P

oin

t

Is th

is a

crit

ical

lift

as

desc

ribed

by

the

pra

ctic

e?

Doe

s th

e lif

t req

uire

mob

ile

liftin

g eq

uipm

ent w

ith a

lif

ting

capa

city

mor

e th

an45

ton

s?

Doe

s th

e lif

t inv

olve

set

ting

up a

tall

vert

ical

str

uctu

re,

i.e.,

a f

lare

sta

ck o

r co

mm

unic

atio

ns to

wer

?

Is th

e lif

t ta

king

pla

ce

with

in tw

o tim

es th

e m

ax.

radi

us (

�60

deg

rees

) of

the

cr

ane

boo

m o

r of

an

ope

ratin

g pr

oce

ss?

Cou

ld a

ccid

ent

al c

onta

ct

with

the

su

rrou

ndi

ng

proc

ess

or e

qui

pm

ent

re

sult

in a

rel

ease

of

ener

gy o

r a

flui

d?

Do

es th

e lif

t inv

olv

e a

vert

ical

str

uctu

re th

at is

hi

ghe

r th

an �

5 m

(80f

t)?

Is th

e lif

ting

wor

k ca

rrie

d

out i

n a

co

ntro

lled

en

viro

nmen

t, i.e

., a

wa

reho

use

, sho

p or

lay

dow

n a

rea

?

Has

the

lifti

ng e

quip

men

t b

een

spec

ifica

lly d

esig

ned

or

eng

inee

red

for

the

lift?

Is th

e lo

ad w

eig

ht u

nder

50

% o

f the

load

cap

aci

ty o

f th

e lif

ting

equ

ipm

ent a

nd

less

tha

n �0

00 k

g

(440

0 lb

s)?

Fig

ure

2:

Wo

rk C

lass

ific

atio

n G

uid

e –

Lif

tin

g O

per

atio

ns

Figure 2: Work Classification guide – lifting operations

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e



134


135

• act as the Performing AuthorityA hoist operator (e.g., overhead crane, chain hoist

or any other equipment designed to lift and lower loads) will be considered competent if they:

• have been designated competent by their employer to operate hoists

• demonstrate sound working knowledge and understanding of the use of hardware and equipment

• demonstrate the ability to read, understand and implement lift plans and drawings

• demonstrate the ability to recognize hazards and risks in the lift area

• have a clear understanding of lift dynamics• have previous experience or familiarity with the type

of lift to be performed• meet the requirements of a competent rigger and

signaller• have received equipment-specific training• have demonstrated the ability to complete the pre-

use, initial and annual inspections as described in this practice

A rigger will be considered competent if they:• have been designated competent by their employer

to perform rigging activities• have completed a formal rigging training program or

equivalent and can demonstrate the ability to:o read and comprehend sling capacity chartso complete the pre-use, initial and annual rigging

inspections described in this practiceo understand hand signals and rigging loads and

procedures• have demonstrated knowledge, competence and

skill in the safe operation of the rigging equipment to be used

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e


134



135


If work is interrupted because of an emergency, inter-vention or as advised by operations personnel, lifting operations must be suspended. Work must not resume until the area has been inspected by the Issuing Author-ity and determined to be safe. The Issuing Authority will determine if a new permit is required.Completing and Closing out Work

On completion of work, the Area Authority or Issuing Authority must inspect the worksite to confirm that the area has been cleared of tools, equipment and other work materials and that the worksite has been left in a safe condition.

document Control



This section describes special conditions under which operating outside the boundaries of the practice are acceptable and not all standards will apply.The use of two boom cats simultaneously during pipe-line stringing operations is not considered a critical lift.

4.3 guidelines


Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e



136


137

Regulatory Requirements



• Alberta: Occupational Health and Safety Act, RSA 2000 c. O-2, Sec. 18, as amended

• Alberta: Occupational Health and Safety Regulation, AR 62/2003, as amended – Part 1: General, Sec. 12

• Alberta: Occupational Health and Safety Code 2009 and Occupational Health and Safety Explanation Guide 2009, as amended – Part 1: Definitions and General Application, Sec. 3 (Adoption of Standards); Part 3: Specifications and Certifications; Part 6: Cranes, Hoists and Lifting Devices; Part 17: Overhead Power Lines; Part 21: Rigging; Schedule 4 Safe Limit of Approach Distances; Part 37: Oil and Gas Wells, Sec. 753 to 755, Sec. 763 to 775

• British Columbia: Occupational Health and Safety Regulation B.C. Reg. 296/97 and associated guidelines, as amended – Part 4: General Conditions, Sec. 4.1 to 4.12; Part 14: Cranes and Hoists; Part 15: Rigging; Part 19: Electrical Safety, Sec. 19.24 to 19.29 (Working Close to Energized High Voltage Equipment and Conductors); Part 23: Oil and Gas, Sec. 23.32 to 23.35

• Ontario: Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91, as amended – Part II General Construction, Sec. 93 to 116, Sec. 150 to 156, Sec. 157 to 165, Sec. 166 to 167, Sec. 168 to 180, Sec. 181 to 195.3.

• Ontario: Industrial Establishments, R.R.O. 1990, Reg. 851, as amended – Part I: Safety Regulations, Sec. 7, Sec. 45 to 60

• Saskatchewan: Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 1996, R.R.S. c. O-1.1 Reg 1, as amended – Part III: General Duties, Sec. 12, 19, 25;

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e


136



137

Part XIII: Hoists, Cranes and Lifting Devices; Part XIV: Rigging; Part XXX: Additional Protection for Electrical Workers, Sec. 465; Appendix, Table 22



• Canadian Association of Oil well Drilling Contractors (CAODC) Recommended Practices – Recommended Practices 1, 1.0A, 2, 3 and 4 adopted as a required standard by British Columbia Occupational Health and Safety Regulation, Sec. 23.32

• Canada Occupational Health and Safety Regulations, SOR/86-304, as amended -- Part XIV Materials Handling, Division I Design and Construction, Division II Maintenance, Use and Operation, Part VIII Electrical Safety.

• Canada Oil and Gas Occupational Safety and Health Regulations, SOR/87-612 Part IX Electrical Safety Subsection 8.5 (6)

• Canada Oil and Gas Occupational Safety and Health Regulations, SOR/87-612 Part XV Materials Handling, Division I Design and Construction, Division II Maintenance, Operation and Use.

4.6 uS Regulations

• Federal OSHA – 1910.179 (i)(m)(d)(g)(k)(l)(f )(n) Overhead and Gantry Cranes.

• Federal OSHA – 1910.180 (d)(g)(e)(f )(h) Crawler Locomotive and Truck Cranes.

• Federal OSHA – 1910.184 (g) metal mesh sling requirements.

• Federal OSHA – 1910.181 (e)(f )(i)(j)

Lifti

ng O

pera

tions

Pra

ctic

e



138


139

• ASME B30.5 -2004 Mobile and Locomotive Cranes• Michigan OSHA Standards – R 408.41001-41099

Construction• Michigan OSHA Standards – R 408.41012a, R

408.41013a• Michigan OSHA Standards – R 408.41010a, R

408.41025a, R 408 41030a)• Michigan OSHA Standards – R 408.41024a – swing

radius clearancePending US Regulations:

• OHSA 29 CFR 1926.1400 Cranes and Derricks in Construction (effective November 8, 2010) Impact: 1. All riggers and signalers must have verifiable qualifications. 2. All tandem lifts must be planned by an engineer. 3. All BP lifting equipment will need to have documented daily and monthly inspections.

WoRKing on eneRgY SYSteMS (WoeS) PRaCtiCe

1 Policy

This is one of the practices under the BP Group Defined Practice for Control of Work(CoW) Policy GDP 4.5-0001 and BP Canada Regional Production Unit (RPU)CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01 (see Figure 1).

2 Practice

This practice specifies the minimum requirements for the control of hazardous energy. The purpose of this practice is to establish the minimum energy isolation requirements to prevent unexpected energization or start-up of machinery or equipment, or unexpected

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


138



139

release of energy, to ensure safety of the worker and prevent damage to equipment and the environment.This practice applies to all BP Canada RPU employees, contracted employees, contractors and other visiting personnel doing work on BP Canada RPU premises andworksites.This practice does not apply to hot tapping operations. BP Canada RPU accepted and documented procedures must be followed for hot tapping operations.

3 accountabilities

Key responsibilities for the Accountable Manager, Area Authority, Issuing Authority and Performing Authority are defined in BP Canada RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01, Section 3.For a complete list of training and competency assess-ment requirements see OMS CF 22-00-09 and OMS CP 22-00-06 respectively.

3.1 accountable Manager

The Accountable Manager:• challenges all work related to working on energy

systems, to verify that the work needs to be done in the manner stated

• reviews the energy isolation process for each job, looking at the controls and mitigation measures in place, ensuring that work processes are controlled to the safest level practical

• ensures that approved equipment-specific lockout/tagout procedures are followed for the isolation of the equipment

• ensures that approved equipment-specific lockout/tagout procedures are available for the isolation of all energy systems

• ensures that authorized worker(s) are competent to

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



140


141

perform the energy isolation procedures• ensures there is an adequate inventory of personal

protective equipment (PPE) and energy isolation devices such as locks or blinds for the job at hand

3.2 area authority

The Area Authority:• ensures a proper work authorization is issued for

the type of work based on the Working on Energy Systems Work Classification Guides (see Guidelines)

• ensures everyone involved is aware of the hazards, controls and emergency procedures

• ensures that authorized and affected workers are aware of the risks before starting work, including the hazards of the energy sources to be controlled, the methods or means to control the energy and the prohibitions regarding attempts to restart or re-energize locked out and tagged equipment

• ensures the equipment to be worked on has been properly isolated, locked out, tagged and documented safe

• verifies the Energy Isolation List has been signed off by an appropriate representative of the workers involved

• ensures the function test to confirm zero energy has been completed, witnessed and signed off by an appropriate representative of the workers involved

• ensures emergency response plans are in place that address any unplanned exposure to energy sources from the equipment being worked on

• confirms the worksite has been inspected before the work authorization is issued or recertified

• coordinates inspection of the work area to confirm the job has been completed, the area is safe and the equipment is ready for operations

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


140



141

• determines the frequency of site visits to monitor integrity of the isolation to ensure there is no re-energization of the system and records the frequency on the isolation work authorization

• assigns the person(s) who will do the monitoring• ensures that any point used to verify isolation

integrity is not blocked or obstructed and is vented to a safe location

• notifies affected employees in writing when lockout/tagout devices will be applied and after they are removed from the equipment. The notification process is defined on a site-specific level.

• ensures that an approved site-specific procedure is followed, detailing the isolation process to isolate the energy, including electrical, positive, valve and other isolations

• ensures that a site visit is completed at the start of each shift to verify that mitigation measures and controls listed on the work authorization are still in place and the equipment is safe to work on before recertifying the work authorization for the next shift

• ensures that if work is suspended because of an emergency, intervention or as advised by operations personnel, energy isolation operations are also suspended, and ensures that work does not resume until the area is inspected and determined safe

• determines whether a new work authorization is required for isolation

3.3 issuing authority

The Issuing Authority:• is responsible for isolation of equipment• follows the site-specific procedures detailing the

process for isolation, including all electrical, positive, valve and other isolations

• signs off on each isolation point that the isolation was carried out

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



142


143

• verifies that isolation and de-energization of the equipment has been completed before work is started

• monitors or assigns person(s) to monitor the integrity of the isolation, which could include visits to the worksite at defined intervals to check the isolation or regular leak tests to verify integrity

• confirms that all operating devices, including selector switches, have been returned to normal operating position to ensure safe reinstatement of the equipment or plant when work is complete

• checks equipment and the disconnecting device at the beginning of each shift to confirm that all equipment is safe to work on and has not been tampered with


The Performing Authority:• confirms that only personnel authorized by the

HARM participate in the work and that no unauthorized interference occurs

• verifies that the work is stopped and reassessed when there are changes to the initial Energy Isolation Work authorization conditions, including both changes in the work scope and conditions at the worksite

• ensures that all personnel involved in the work are informed about the scope of work and understand the hazards, mitigation measures and controls in place, and then ensures that all involved personnel sign off on the Work Authorization

• is responsible for lockout verification and signoff when personnel are working alone and also responsible for confirming that at least one person verifies the lockout when supervising a group of workers

• verifies that each authorized worker places a personal lock on the lockbox or each isolation point listed on the Energy Isolation List

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


142



143

• performs or witnesses the function test to confirm zero energy and signs the Energy Isolation Work Authorization

• inspects the job location and checks equipment and the disconnecting device at the start of each shift to confirm that all equipment is safe to work on and has not been tampered with

• signs (with the Area Authority) the work authorization to recertify that work may proceed

• stops the job if there is evidence of an isolation breach, and notifies authorized and affected employees and the Area Authority

• verifies that the location and equipment has been left in a safe condition after the job or task has been completed and coordinates removal of all personal locks from the lockbox

3.5 Working on energy Systems Subject Matter expert

A working on energy systems subject matter expert (SME) might be designated by the Accountable Manager to provide expertise on the application of this practice.

4 Risk Management

Risk management is a systematic method of assessing work to identify associated hazards and analyze the potential consequences of those hazards. To execute work that presents no unnecessary risk to workers who could be adversely affected by the consequences of the work, all work will be subject to a risk management process. For the principles of BP Canada RPU’s risk management system, see BP Canada RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01.

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



144


145

4.1 Standards

The following standards are generic, minimum per-formance or operational expectations for working on energy systems.


A pre-job safety meeting must be held that reviews:• potential hazards, the emergency response plan

(ERP), safe work procedures andwork authorization requirements• responsibilities of the designated supervisor• expectations and responsibilities to stop all unsafe


near-miss incidents


Work must be classified into one of four categories ac-cording to RPU CoW Practice OMS CP 45-00-01.The need to carry out working on energy systems activities will follow the CoW Practice work classification guide (see Figure 2 and Figure 3 under Guidelines).Isolation of any piece of equipment must be planned to minimize the risk of removing the equipment from ser-vice and then reinstating it on completion of the work. Plant and equipment isolation requirements should be identified early in the work planning cycle.Once the equipment and task that needs to be per-formed on an energy system is identified, the Perform-ing Authority determines the job scope and submits the detailed job scope to the Area Authority. The Area Authority/Issuing Authority identifies the energy source(s) that need to be isolated – electrical, pneumatic, mechanical, hydraulic, fluids or gases.

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


144



145

Positive isolation is considered the most secure isola-tion method and should be considered when planning maintenance work.It is mandatory for entry into confined spaces and recommended in the following situations because of the additional security it offers:

• long-duration breaking-containment tasks e.g., more than one week

• isolations left in place when normally unmanned installations (NUIs) are manned

• where equipment is to be mothballed• where naked flame hot work is to be undertaken• for process fluids at or above auto ignition

temperature

For an example of isolation requirements, see Table 1. For mandatory safeguards, see Table 2.

table 1: isolation Requirements as per gP 44-40

It is mandatory for entry into confined spaces and recommended in the following situations because of the additional security it offers:

long-duration breaking-containment tasks e.g., more than one week isolations left in place when normally unmanned installations (NUIs) are manned where equipment is to be mothballed where naked flame hot work is to be undertaken for process fluids at or above auto ignition temperature

For an example of isolation requirements, see Table �. For mandatory safeguards, see Table �.

Table 1: Isolation Requirements as per GP 44-40

Operating Pressure

Fluid Type < 1000 kPa >1000 kPa < 5500

kPa > 5500 kPa

Process fluids and hazardous utilities

V = SVI I = SVI + B

V =SVI + A I = DBB + A

V = DBB + B I = DBB + A

Non-hazardous utilities V = SVI I = SVI

V = SVI + B I = SVI + A

V = SVI + A I = SVI + A

Notes:Pipe work including instrument lines of �/4-inch nominal bore and below can be treated as for pressure less than �000 kPa.

V = Valving required to permit installation of blank flanges and spades (positive isolation).

I = Valving required to permit carrying out intrusive maintenance without positive isolation (where positive isolation presentsa greater risk).

A = Use mandatory safeguards as on list A.

B = Use mandatory safeguards as on list B.

SVI = Single valve isolation.

DBB = Double block and bleed.

Non-hazardous utilities = water, glycol, lube oil, water-based drilling mud.

Table 2: Mandatory Safeguards

Mandatory Safeguard

Category A High Hazard

Category B Low Hazard

Continuous gas monitoring (for hydrocarbon systems only)

Yes Yes

Pressure buildup to test valve integrity Yes Yes Regular monitoring of isolation Yes Yes Control and prevent nearby work Yes Yes Issuing Authority in attendance Yes Yes Radio link to control room when breaking containment

Yes No

Develop contingency plan for leakage Yes No Identify backup isolation valves and shutdown systems

Yes No

Minimize task time Yes No Portable firefighting equipment available (for hydrocarbon systems only)

Yes No

Minimize possibility of plant disturbance Yes No

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



146


147

table 2: Mandatory Safeguards

It is mandatory for entry into confined spaces and recommended in the following situations because of the additional security it offers:

long-duration breaking-containment tasks e.g., more than one week isolations left in place when normally unmanned installations (NUIs) are manned where equipment is to be mothballed where naked flame hot work is to be undertaken for process fluids at or above auto ignition temperature

For an example of isolation requirements, see Table �. For mandatory safeguards, see Table �.

Table 1: Isolation Requirements as per GP 44-40

Operating Pressure

Fluid Type < 1000 kPa >1000 kPa < 5500

kPa > 5500 kPa

Process fluids and hazardous utilities

V = SVI I = SVI + B

V =SVI + A I = DBB + A

V = DBB + B I = DBB + A

Non-hazardous utilities V = SVI I = SVI

V = SVI + B I = SVI + A

V = SVI + A I = SVI + A

Notes:Pipe work including instrument lines of �/4-inch nominal bore and below can be treated as for pressure less than �000 kPa.

V = Valving required to permit installation of blank flanges and spades (positive isolation).

I = Valving required to permit carrying out intrusive maintenance without positive isolation (where positive isolation presentsa greater risk).

A = Use mandatory safeguards as on list A.

B = Use mandatory safeguards as on list B.

SVI = Single valve isolation.

DBB = Double block and bleed.

Non-hazardous utilities = water, glycol, lube oil, water-based drilling mud.

Table 2: Mandatory Safeguards

Mandatory Safeguard

Category A High Hazard

Category B Low Hazard

Continuous gas monitoring (for hydrocarbon systems only)

Yes Yes

Pressure buildup to test valve integrity Yes Yes Regular monitoring of isolation Yes Yes Control and prevent nearby work Yes Yes Issuing Authority in attendance Yes Yes Radio link to control room when breaking containment

Yes No

Develop contingency plan for leakage Yes No Identify backup isolation valves and shutdown systems

Yes No

Minimize task time Yes No Portable firefighting equipment available (for hydrocarbon systems only)

Yes No

Minimize possibility of plant disturbance Yes No

If it is not possible to achieve the required isolations as defined in Table 1: Isolation Requirements due to limitations within the installed facilities or if a greater risk is incurred with installation of the isolation, a risk management approach shall be used to define the re-quired levels of checks and controls necessary to achieve safe isolation.isolating the energy Source

An Energy Isolation plan must be developed and at-tached to the lockbox or to a location as close as possible to the isolated equipment, and must include the follow-ing information:

• isolation point description/number• isolation point position required for isolation• isolation point normal operating position• type of isolation• size of blind(s)• pressure rating of blind(s)• isolation point location• date of installation• date of removal• equipment or process being isolated• initials of the person(s) installing the isolation• initials of person verifying that the isolations are in

place

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


146



147

If a generic lockout list is available, the Area Author-ity must ensure that the list has been reviewed and approved following document-control requirements. Amendments may be made to the approved lockout lists with the approval of the Area Authority, following site-specific MOC requirements. The reason for the amendment must be recorded in the revision log.The Area Authority must complete any applicable work authorizations and then confirm with the Performing Authority that necessary preparation is complete and the job is ready to be scheduled.The Area Authority/Issuing Authority must shut down and isolate equipment, using approved site-specific procedures established for an orderly shutdown to avoid additional or increased hazard(s) to employees, as follows:

• All energy sources (stored electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic and gas and fluids energy) must be bled to a zero energy state. In cases where zero energy state cannot be attained, control measures must be developed to prevent uncontrolled release of energy. For example, blocks, pins or chains rated to restrain potential energy can be used when equipment cannot be brought to zero energy state.

• If there is a possibility of re-accumulation of stored energy to a hazardous level, the Area Authority must designate someone to monitor the isolation until servicing or maintenance is completed, or until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists.

• The Issuing Authority performs a function test to verify zero energy and initials the Energy Isolation List to indicate that the test was performed successfully.

• The Area Authority/Issuing Authority must determine what isolation points need to be isolated to prevent the unexpected energization or start-up of machinery or equipment and ensure the safety of those involved in the work and prevent damage to equipment and the environment.

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



148


149

note: Pneumatic or hydraulic-operated valves, which are designed to open on failure of control air, nitrogen, gas or hydraulics, must not be used for energy isolation.

• Using the approved Energy Isolation plan, the Issuing Authority locks and tags out all listed isolation points, initialling each isolation point to verify that the point is in its correct isolation position and that a lock and tag have been installed.

• Each affected worker hangs a lock on the individual isolation points or the lockbox if applicable. Each isolation point should be marked on the P&ID and listed with the following details:

• isolation point number and pipe work details• isolation history with lock and tag numbers, signed

by Issuing Authority• de-isolation history – installation and removal dates• breaking containment locations• Devices that should not be used as energy isolating

points include:o push buttons, selector switches, programmable

logic controllers and other control-circuit-type devices

o single-seat butterfly valves, control valves, pressure safety valves (PSVs) and check valves

In the case of the triple-offset butterfly valve with two seat seals in a single disk and a vent from the space between, there is a high probability that damage to the first seat seal will also affect the second. There is also a type of ball valve (Klyde design), in which both seats are sealed simultaneously using a cam action. These types of valves may be used as isolation points, but require approval by the Accountable Manager.

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


148



149


The Area Authority/Issuing Authority must complete periodic inspections to ensure that the job scope is being completed as stated on the work authorization and to verify the integrity of the isolation.The Area Authority/Issuing Authority and Performing Authority must visit the worksite to verify the integrity of the isolation and that nothing has changed. Amend-ments must not be made to isolations already in place other than to allow testing of the equipment before re-turn to service under supervision of the Area Authority.


If work is interrupted because of an emergency, inter-vention or as advised by operations personnel, working on energy systems operations must be suspended. Work must not resume until the area has been inspected by the Issuing Authority and determined to be safe. The Issuing Authority must determine if a new work autho-rization is required.


On completion of work, the Area Authority or Issuing Authority must inspect the worksite to confirm that the area has been cleared of tools, equipment and other work materials and that the worksite has been left in a safe condition.The Issuing Authority must verify by signature at the worksite that the work is complete and that the Working on Energy Systems Work authorization is closed.Once work has been completed:

• ensure that the machine or equipment components are operationally intact and ready for service

• each affected worker removes their lock• the Performing Authority completes a site visit

to confirm that all work has been completed, equipment is safe for recommissioning and all personal locks have been removed

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



150


151

Fig

ure

2:

Wo

rk C

lass

ific

atio

n G

uid

e –

Wo

rkin

g o

n E

ner

gy

Sys

tem

s (E

lect

rica

l)

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


150



151

Fig

ure

2:

Wo

rk C

lass

ific

atio

n G

uid

e –

Wo

rkin

g o

n E

ner

gy

Sys

tem

s (E

lect

rica

l)

Fig

ure

2:

Wo

rk C

lass

ific

atio

n G

uid

e –

Wo

rkin

g o

n E

ner

gy

Sys

tem

s (E

lect

rica

l)

Fig

ure

2:

Wo

rk C

lass

ific

atio

n G

uid

e –

Wo

rkin

g o

n E

ner

gy

Sys

tem

s (E

lect

rica

l)

Figure 2: Work Classification guide – Working on energy Systems (electrical)

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



152


153Figure 3: Work Classification Guide – Working on Energy Systems (Pressure)

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


152



153Figure 3: Work Classification Guide – Working on Energy Systems (Pressure)

Figure 3: Work Classification guide – Working on energy Systems (Pressure)

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



154


155

The Area Authority/Issuing Authority must complete a site visit to:

• verify that equipment is safe for recommissioning• ensure that non-essential items have been removed• ensure all employees are safely positioned or removed

from the equipmentThe Area Authority/Issuing Authority removes all locks and returns the isolation points to their normal operating position, updates the Energy Isolation List and initials each point to verify completion. The Area Authority must inform operations to restart the process or equipment.For work that is not completed:

• the Performing Authority must inform the Area Authority that the work was not completed and will resume next shift

• the Performing Authority must do a formal handoff if another Performing Authority takes over

• both the Performing Authority and the Area Authority must sign off the work authorization, recertifying that the work is valid for that shift


This section describes special conditions under which operating outside the boundaries of the practice are acceptable and not all standards will apply.The requirements in this practice do not apply to work on cord- and plug-connected electrical equipment for which exposure to the hazards of unexpected energiza-tion or startup of the equipment is controlled by:

• unplugging the equipment from the energy source• a plug under the exclusive control of the person

performing the work and the plug is either physically in the possession of the employee or within arms reach and in sight.

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


154



155

To complete maintenance, troubleshoot problems or perform adjustments, it might be necessary to work on equipment while it is energized. This is allowed only if it is required by the manufacturer or it is not reasonably practicable (where there are no manufacturer specifica-tions) to render the equipment inoperative, e.g., adjust-ing and tuning engines, calibration, pigging pipelines or volt/amp checks on electrical equipment.Site-specific procedures and controls must be developed and implemented to ensure the work is performed safely. This approach cannot be used simply because it is more convenient than locking out equipment. Tasks involving working on energized equipment will be signed off com-mensurate to the risk level they present. The minimum approval must be the Area Authority. All these tasks must have a HARM in place before the work begins.

4.3 guidelines

The following guidelines are supporting information and recommendations that are used when judgment is involved.The Area Authority presents the job package to the Accountable Manager at a scheduling meeting. The Accountable Manager reviews the work authorization re-quirements, mitigation measures and controls to ensure that all hazards have been controlled and approves the work. If the work is not approved, the Area Authority andPerforming Authority must meet to address concerns or further controls stipulated by the Accountable Manager.Once approved, the work is scheduled at the next win-dow of opportunity agreeable to the Area Authority.

energy isolation Methods

The following describe the various energy isolation methods:

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



156


157

• positive isolation• valve isolation• other isolations• devices that cannot be used as an isolation point

Positive isolation guidelines

Positive isolation is the use of blinds or spool removal to achieve isolation. Positive isolation may be achieved by any of the following:

• spool removal or the removal of a pipe work section and securing of a blank flange rated for full line design pressure onto each live end

• blind isolation, where a blind plate, blind flange, spectacle blind or tapped blind flange is inserted between bolted or clamped flanges

• blind (slip blind), a properly rated and sized metal plate inserted between pipe flange gaskets to prevent the flow of gas or liquid in either direction

• blind flange, a full-rated pipefitting used to close the flanged end of an open pipe or valve

• spectacle blind, a combination of blind and spacer formed from the same piece of material. This item is often a permanent part of the line and is taken out, rotated with the other end inserted (depending on whether or not flow through that line is desired).

• tapped blind flange, a full-rated pipefitting used to close the flanged end of an open pipe or valve with a threaded tap for installing a valve. A vent valve is recommended for the controlled release of any pressure build up before removing the blind flange.

Positive isolation must be used when working with:• confined spaces• high-risk fluids such as flammable liquids or gas,

combustible liquids heated above their flash point or toxic materials to ensure containment

• long-term isolations

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


156



157

• isolations left in place at normally unmanned installations (NUIs)

• equipment that is taken out of service for an underdetermined time or mothballed

• segregation of systems or services that could, under different operating modes, result in overpressure of high-pressure equipment from a drainage system

• a primary source of hot work that is included in the task

Valve isolation guidelines

Valve isolation is the use of a valve or valves to achieve isolation and can be achieved using any of the following:

• double block and bleed (two) valves, consisting of two valves in series with an interposing bleed valve that should vent to a safe location

• double block and bleed (one) valve consisting of a double-seated block valve, where the seating force is applied mechanically, with a cavity bleed valve. Types of double seated block valves include:

o parallel double-disc gate valve with expanding wedge

o high-integrity wedge gate valves (soft seat)o expanding (wedge) plug valve (soft seats)

• single block (two, no bleed) valves consisting of two single-block valves with a vent, drain or bleed on the side of the equipment to be taken offline

• emergency shutdown valve (ESD). If used as one of two isolation block valves, steps must be taken to ensure the integrity of the shutdown system is not compromised and isolation is maintained.

The valve must be disabled and mechanically secured or jacked closed. Disconnection of electrical, pneumatic or hydraulic power sources is necessary and additional immobilization devices might be necessary. The effectiveness of valve immobilization must be tested by a competent person.

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



158


159

other isolation guidelines

Devices used for vapour or liquid seals, such as mechani-cally expanding plugs, inflatable bags or frozen plugs must not be used as a primary form of positive or valve isolation.Expanded devices may only be used:

• downstream of a positive or valve isolation (as a vapour or liquid seal) to contain and direct-to-vent any small amounts of vapour

• where the pressure differential across the device can be monitored and controlled

• where the application has been engineered and approved by local management

lockout Verification guidelines

Before any work can take place on locked-out equip-ment, the lockout must be verified by a representative from the affected workers, usually the Performing Authority, who will be working on the equipment. The representative must review the locked- and tagged-out devices recorded on the Energy Isolation List, to ensure:

• all devices are in the required mode of operation• all devices are locked and tagged to isolate all sources

of energy• work is performed safely

When only one worker is required for a task, the worker must:

• review the Energy Isolation List ensuring that all locks and tags are installed as described

• place a lock and tag on each isolation point or on the lockbox, if applicable

• initial each isolation point on the Energy Isolation List, verifying it is in place

When multiple workers from the same trade discipline are required for a task:

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


158



159

• one worker (PA) might be designated by the group to assume the responsibility of verification of lockout on the behalf of the trade discipline group

• the representative for the workers verifies each isolation point and initials each point on the Energy Isolation List note: All workers have the option of verifying the lockout.

When multiple workers from multiple trade disciplines or functions are required for a task:

• at least one worker from each trade discipline will assume the responsibility of verification of lockout on behalf of the trade discipline group

• the worker representative verifies each isolation point and initials each point on the Energy Isolation List. note: All workers have the option of verifying the lockout.

The person verifying the lockout will perform or wit-ness a function test to confirm zero energy and initial the Energy Isolation List that the test was successfully performed.When satisfied that the equipment is at zero energy and it is safe to continue work, all affected workers must place their personal lock or a group lockout lock (see Group Lockout Guidelines) on the corresponding key lockout box.

isolation Control and Security guidelines

Guidelines for isolation control and security are as follows:

• each isolation point must be locked and tagged in the position that isolates the affected worker from all hazardous energy when maintenance or servicing work is done

• equipment lockout must be done with a lock and tag approved by the Area Authority. They must be

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



160


161

capable of withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the maximum period of time that exposure is expected.

• lockout and tagout devices must be standardized on site in at least one of the following criteria:

o colouro shape or sizeo print and format (for tagout devices)

• lockout devices must be substantial enough to prevent removal without excessive force.

• except in emergency situations and if the worker is not available, only the affected worker who installed the lock may remove it note: A site-specific procedure must be followed for removal during these exceptions.

• affected workers must install an easily identifiable personal lock on each isolation point or on the lockbox, securing the master key for the isolation

• each isolation point must have a tag attached. The tag must provide the following information:

o installer’s printed nameo date of installationo reason for installation

• where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating device, the tag must be located as closely and safely as possible to the device in a position that is obvious to workers attempting to operate the equipment

• tagout devices shall be constructed and printed such that exposure to the environment (wet, damp, acid or alkali) will not cause the tag or message to deteriorate. They shall be substantial enough including their means of attachment to prevent inadvertent or accidental removal.

• tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the machine or equipment is energized and shall include a legend such as the following: Do

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


160



161

Not Start. Do Not Open. Do Not Close. Do Not Energize. Do Not Operate.

• for US sites, tagout device attachments shall be of a non-reusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking, and non-releasable with a minimum unlocking strength of no less than 50 pounds and having the general design and basic characteristics of being at least equivalent to a one-piece, all environment-tolerant nylon cable tie.

• when locks, blinds and tags are installed, details must be recorded in the Energy Isolation List and be available on site for the duration of the lockout to record and track the status of the isolation.

• the Energy Isolation List must be referenced in the Work Authorization Practice or HARM for any work falling under that isolation

• site-specific requirements determine the size and number of lockboxes required

• each lockbox must contain locks with a key unique only to the locks in the respective lockbox

• when multiple lockboxes are used on a site, each lockbox must have its own identifier corresponding to its respective locks

• a personal lock can only be removed by authorized or affected workers who installed the lock

• when it is necessary to partially unlock equipment for maintenance, partial unlocks may only be performed if specific procedures and risk mitigation plans are in place and appropriate approval is obtained from the Area Authority

group lockout guidelines

For tasks requiring a large number of energy isolation points or involving a large number of employees work-ing on the task, areas may follow the group lockout process.

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



162


163

The group lockout process includes the following guidelines:

• A box of keyed-alike locks (large enough to supply a lock for every isolation point) is obtained.

• The Area Authority/Issuing Authority installs these locks along with ID tags at each isolation point on the Energy Isolation List.

• The master key for the locks is placed in a lockbox and a personal lock is installed on the box.

• While all affected workers involved in the job must install a lock on the lockbox, a representative from each functional group must visually verify that all isolation points are locked and tagged, then sign the Energy Isolation List.

For tasks involving few isolation points or a small num-ber of employees, workers may choose to not use the group lockout process. In such a case, each authorized and affected worker must install a personal lock and identification tag on each energy-isolating device. They must then initial the Energy Isolation List to verify that the locks are in place.

Blinding and Blanking guidelines

Guidelines for blinding and blanking are as follows:• All blinding, blanking, disconnecting and plugging

requires a work authorization document and an approved Energy Isolation List that identifies the isolation method and all isolation devices and their location.

• A pre-job meeting, accompanied by a HARM, must be held for all workers before starting work.

• Cathodic protection must be shut down and flanges bonded before installing a blind or disconnecting piping.

• Blinding, blanking, disconnecting and plugging are the preferred methods of isolation for pipes, pipelines, vessels and equipment.

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


162



163

• The recommended alternative to the preferred method is double block and bleed. After de-pressuring, block valves must be locked and tagged in the closed position. The bleed valve must be locked and tagged in the open position, venting safely to atmosphere.

• Single-valve isolation is not recommended. For a list of other requirements that must be met, see Table 1: Minimum Isolation Requirements under Standards. The work must be accompanied by a HARM and site-specific procedures must be approved by the Accountable Manager or designate. Valves (inlet and outlet) must be locked in the closed position and tagged before work begins.

• Every blinding job must have an approved blind list generated by referencing all available P&IDs for the system.

• The system must be physically inspected to ensure that all blind locations identified on the P&IDs will completely isolate the system.

• If extra blinds are required, they must be added to the blind list using the local document-control procedures.

• Each entity must have a tagging system in place to control and record the installation and removal of blinds.

At minimum, this process must address the following:• physical location of the blinds

o the unique ID number (tag) that corresponds to the blind location

o when a blind has been installedo when a blind has been removed

Permanent lockout isolation guidelines

Guidelines for permanent lockout isolation are as follows:

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



164


165

• Before installation of a permanent lock, a Management of Change (MOC) must be completed to determine and verify the correct isolation points.

• The Area Authority must designate an Issuing Authority to lock each of the energy isolation devices at the identified isolation points with a permanent lock.

• The Issuing Authority must attach a tag to the lock that identifies:

o the date of the lockouto reason for the lockouto who installed the lockso the Energy Isolation Listo the MOC number

• The Issuing Authority must record the lockout on the Energy Isolation List and file it at a central location for future reference.

• Keys for the permanent locks must be controlled by the Area Authority.

audit Preparation guidelines

An annual audit of the Working on Energy Systems Practice requires:

• the Area Authority to assign responsibility for coordinating annual audits of the local lockout and tagout process and procedures to confirm the overall system is adequate and understood

• sites to follow the RPU audit protocol developed for the Working on Energy Systems Practice

• corrective measures addressing deviations, inadequacies or program enhancements to be tracked and documented following site-specific procedures


Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice


164



165



• Alberta: Occupational Health and Safety Code 2009 and Occupational Health and Safety Explanation Guide 2009, as amended – Part 15: Managing the Control of Hazardous Energy

• British Columbia: Occupational Health and Safety, B.C. Reg. 296/97 and associated guidelines, as amended – Part 9: Confined Spaces, Sec. 9.17 to 9.23; Part 10: De-energization and Lockout; Part 19: Electrical Safety

• Ontario: Regulations for Industrial Establishments, R.R.O. 1990, Reg. 851 as amended – Part I: Safety Regulations, Sec. 42 to 42.2, Sec. 74 to 78; Part I.1: Confined Spaces, Sec. 119.13

• Ontario: Regulations for Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91, as amended – Part II: General Construction, Sec. 181 to 195.3; Part II.1: Confined Spaces, Sec. 221.4 to 221.13

• Saskatchewan: Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 1996, R.R.S. c. O-1.1 Reg 1, as amended – Part X: Machine Safety, Sec. 139; Part XVIII: Confined Space Entry, Sec. 270 to 275; Part XXX: Additional Protection for Electrical Workers, Sec. 464 to 467



• Canada Occupational Health and Safety Regulations, SOR/86-304, as amended – Part VIII: Electrical Safety; Part XI: Confined Spaces, Sec. 11.4; Part XIII: Tools and Machinery, Sec. 13.16

Wor

king

on

Ene

rgy

Sys

tem

s (W

OE

S) P

ract

ice



166


167

• Canada Oil and Gas Occupational Safety and Health Regulations, SOR/87-612 – Part IX: Electrical Safety; Part XII, Sec 12.2: Confined Spaces; Part XIV: Tools and Machinery, Sec. 14.16

5.3 uS Regulations

• Federal OSHA Standard. 29 CFR 1910.147 (General Industry)

• Michigan OSHA Standard. R 408.18501-18599 (General Industry)

tHe golden RuleS oF SaFetY

Safety is a legitimate personal expectation and a constant individual responsibility.Every member of staff should be able to go home at the end of the working day without having suffered or caused harm in any way. In a world, and an industry, full of risks this goal can only be achieved if every single person remembers the importance of safety, accepts their personal responsibility, and knows what to do.BP’s global Golden Rules of Safety are the minimum standards for safeguarding personal safety and the key controls and procedures that must be followed in all place of work. These rules have been prepared to allow the learning from past safety incidents to be shared widely across BP and emphasize the basic rules that should be in place in all locations for managing safety during typical risk activities.The Golden Rules of Safety cover the following 8 activities:

• Permit to work• Energy isolation• Ground disturbance• Confined space entry

The

Gol

den

Rul

es o

f Saf

ety


166



167

• Working at heights• Lifting operations• Driving safety• Management of change

Although embedded in each of these rules, it is impor-tant to emphasize that:

• Work will not be conducted without a pre-job risk assessment and a safety discussion appropriate for the level of risk.

• All persons must only undertake work for which they are trained & competent, medically fit and sufficiently rested & alert to carry out.

• Engineering controls, work practices and personal protection equipment will be used as per the risk assessment and minimum site requirements.

• Emergency response plans, including rescue plans, have been developed from a review of credible potential emergency scenarios, and are established before commencement of work.

• Everyone has the right and obligation to stop work that is unsafe.

Where applicable, BP Canada RPU’s safe work practices meet the minimum standards set by the Golden Rules of Safety. Consult your Safety Advisor for more informa-tion and literature on the Golden Rules of Safety.

aSBeStoS

For information on asbestos contact your RPU Industrial Hygienist. Refer to OMS CP 34-00-01 Asbestos Code of Practice. http://omsnavigator.bpweb.bp.com

Asb

esto

s



168


169

all teRRain VeHiCle SaFe WoRK PRaCtiCe

1.0 Scope and applicability

The purpose of this safe work practice is to ensure that BP Canada employees and contracted employeesunderstand the hazards and know the requirements for operating an all-terrain vehicle (ATV) in a safe manner.For the purpose of this practice, an ATV includes motorized four and multi-wheeled or tracked vehicles, snowmobiles and utility transport vehicles used to access to off-road areas.The conditions and requirement of this safe work practice shall be applied at all BP work sites where BP employees are required to operate and maintain an ATV to carry out their assigned work duties. This practice provides guidelines for the safe operation of ATVs (in-cluding but not limited to all terrain vehicles (ATV) and utility transport vehicles) motorized vehicle designed for cross-country travel on land, snow, ice, marsh or swamp land, or on other natural terrain.The scope and applicability of this standard does not apply to 3-wheeled ATV’s. These types of models will not be used on BP Canada business.

2.0 Responsibility

Accountable Manager: Operating Centre Manager, Area Manager, Wells and Construction Team Lead, Project General Managers, Asset Manager:

• Implementation of this safe work practice• Providing resources for training• Ensuring the right ATV’s are available given the

operating conditions• Planning and scheduling to balance risk and reduce

All-

Terr

ain

Vehi

cle

Pra

ctic

e


168



169

ATV use where possible• Approve requests for ATV training• Identifying ATV championsArea Authority:• Ensuring all ATV use has been risk managed in

accordance with BP Canada’s Control of Work Practice

(OMS CP 45-00-01)• Approving journey management plans, journey

hazard maps and ATV tasks• Successfully complete ATV training and utilize

ATV’s periodically in the field• Implementing journey/road hazard assessments

for established ATV trails – trails that are not well established will be risk assessed prior to travel.

• Approving riders are competent ATV Champions• Pass a certified Safety Council ATV Rider Course

and deemed competent to operate an ATV• Coaching and developing ATV safe riding skills of

newly trained riders• Assessing and verifying ATV competency and skills

of newly trained riders ATV Operators• Complete journey management plans for approval by

Area Authority• Successfully complete ATV training.• Operate ATVs in accordance with this work practice

3.0 Requirements

3.1 licensing

ATV’s must be licensed and insured to comply with local regulations.

IMPORTANT

All-

Terr

ain

Vehi

cle

Pra

ctic

e



170


171

Workers must not use two or three wheeled motorized vehicles on any BP work sites to carry out their assigned duties.

3.2 training

All operators of ATV vehicles are required to pass a certified Safety Council ATV Rider Course for the type of equipment that they are to operate. No employees or contractors will be allowed to operate ATVs without documented proof that they have successfully completed training.The following requirements are for BP and Full Time Equivalent employees; however, contractors are encour-aged to adopt these in their ATV practices:

• Training requests must be approved by the Accountable Manager of the employee. A business reason for the training is required for all training requests. Following the training and passing of the course, new riders will spend time with a designated ATV champion to develop and enhance their riding skills. After a minimum of 10 hours of skills envelopment and mentoring by an ATV champion, the new rider’s competencies will be assessed by the ATV champion.

• The ATV Champion will review the results of the assessment with the Area Authority. After the review the Area Authority will approve riders as competent, or request additional coaching and skill development or not allow the person to operate ATVs.

3.3 Required Personal Protective equipment

The following list of personal protective equipment must be worn at all times, including offloading and loading, while operating an ATV:

• CSA/DOT/Snell approved head protection must be worn and will fit snugly and be securely fastened.

All-

Terr

ain

Vehi

cle

Pra

ctic

e


170



171

• CSA approved eye protection (a visor or safety glasses) must be worn at all times.

• CSA approved footwear that covers the foot and ankle must be worn.

• Gloves protect your hands, provide a better grip, and help you control and handle the vehicle. Gloves also prevent fatigue from vibration, scratches from brush, and protection from cold weather. Off-road type gloves, which have padding over the knuckles, offer the most protection.

• Wear coveralls or non-snag long pants and long sleeved shirts to prevent scratches from bushes.

• Reflective clothing.

3.4 Journey Management

The Area Authorities have an important role to play in setting clear expectations with employees and contrac-tors regarding the risk associated with ATV use and the need to conduct proper risk assessments. Area Authori-ties will require:

• Journey hazard maps for their respective fields and incorporate this tool in their daily risk assessment for travelling to routes travelled for the task.

• For routes that are ‘not yet’ developed, due to a new route, or for the reason that a route is only expected to be utilized once, the ATV user can utilize internet programs such as Google Earth to help identify the local terrain, prior to a user beginning their journey.

• All ATV use be risk managed in accordance with BP Canada’s Control of Work Practice (OMS CP 45-00- 01) starting with the fundamental question ”Is the work necessary?”

• Site specific procedures to address communication needed to meet working alone requirements. This may involve radio/cellular contact, check in location and times, travel routes, etc.

All-

Terr

ain

Vehi

cle

Pra

ctic

e



172


173

3.5 general Safety Requirements

Operators of ATVs will at all times adhere to the follow-ing general safe operating requirements:

• Complete pre and post trip inspections (OMS CF 37-00-05)

• Never carry a passenger - this could upset the balance of the vehicle and cause you to lose control. The operator needs the entire seat to safely negotiate rough terrain. The Only Exception to this is a side by side two seat 4x4 Utility Vehicle.

• ATVs will be operated in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations.

IMPORTANTWhen seat belts have been provided, their use will be mandatory.

• Drivers must have read and be familiar with any safety warning labels that are affixed to the ATV.

• ATV’s have a short wheelbase and maneuverability could be very unstable and easily flip on uneven ground. Be especially cautious when approaching hills, turns, and obstacles and when operating on unfamiliar or rough terrain.

• Operators must ride in single file formation when multiple ATV’s are responding to a BP Canada location.

• Keep at least 10 meters between your vehicle and other vehicles – adequate separation will permit safe braking and avoid dust, spray or stones that may be thrown up.

• Do not drive the ATV on streets, highways or paved roads.

• No horseplay while operating ATVs.

All-

Terr

ain

Vehi

cle

Pra

ctic

e


172



173

• Another major cause of ATV accidents is failure to ride within there skills. Stay away from tough riding areas such as steep inclines and extremely rough terrain, until riding skills have developed.

• ATVs must not be overloaded with personnel or equipment. Manufacturer’s guidelines must be followed for load restrictions.

• When an ATV is not in use, the emergency brake must be left on.

• Drive with headlights on.• ATVS must not be operated while under the

influence of drugs or alcohol.• Firearms will not be carried on ATVs. With approval

from the Accountable Manager, firearms can be carried in a secure case where “Bear Watch” or other area specific wild-life expertise is needed, a third party trained and competent expert will be used.

• A regular maintenance program following the manufacturer’s guidelines must be implemented to ensure the ATV’s reliability and safe operating condition.

• Pre-trip checklists must be completed.• Operator must be familiar with the owner’s manual.• ATVs must be operated in a manner so as to

minimize disturbance to all wildlife.

3.6 Maximum operating Speed:

ATV operators will operate the ATV to the following speeds:

travelling Conditions Speed

Developed Roads 50 Kilometres per hour

Developed Trails 25 Kilometres per hour

Rough/un-even Terrain 10 Kilometres per hour

All-

Terr

ain

Vehi

cle

Pra

ctic

e



174


175

iMPoRtant

Workers will be ultimately responsible to operate the ATV at the safest speed for current conditions.

3.7 Minimum Standard equipment

• All ATV’s used on BP Canada business must be fitted with:

• Mounted carrying case.• Mounted winch with a synthetic rope suitable for

appropriate load ratings.• An operating speedometer. (if available)• Regulatory acceptable first aid kit.• 5 lb A B C Fire Extinguisher.• Tire Repair kit and air pump.• Manufacturers Operators Manual.• Explosion proof flashlight.• Pepper spray, bear scare, air horn where local

management deems it appropriate.• Water Proof Matches.• Spare drive belt and spark plugs where applicable.• Small tarp.• Axe/Hatchet or folding pruning saw.• Emergency food source.• Whip Flag mounted to the ATV

3.8 loading and offloading Requirements

The following conditions must be present to allow for all loading and unloading activities:

• Choose solid ground.

All-

Terr

ain

Vehi

cle

Pra

ctic

e


174



175

iMPoRtant

Workers must not load or unload ATVs where the slope of the ramps is greater than 25 degrees.

The following are the only approved methods for load-ing and unloading ATVs (NO EXCEPTIONS)

1. Hydraulic lift decks that allow loading and unloading from ground level.

- Complete a site walk around prior to positioning the transport unit to load the quad (s). Ensure the ground is level and use the terrain to lessen the slope of the ramps.

- Drive ATV slowly off or on the deck.- Tie ATV securely to deck before operating

hydraulic lift.2. Loading/unloading with ramps onto truck or trailer

decks.- Complete a site walk around prior to positioning

the transport unit to load the quad (s). Ensure the ground is level and use the terrain to lessen the slope of the ramps.

- Ramps must be approved by the Area Authority to ensure that all users are aware of its proper operation and that they (the ramp users) properly inspect them prior to use to ensure that they are in good repair.

- Verify the ramps are designed for the quad weight and size.

- Verify ramps are in good condition with all securing mechanisms to prevent the ramps from kick out are in place and in good repair.

- Verify that the ramps have enough length or that the transport unit has been properly positioned so that the degree of elevation is less than 25 degrees.

- Confirm wheels/skis are aligned and centred on ramp.

All-

Terr

ain

Vehi

cle

Pra

ctic

e



176


177

- Place ATV in lowest gear and 4 wheel drive- Stand on the pegs and lean forward over the

ATV and cover the front brake to ensure the best control of the quad.

- When loading ride up at a constant speed, do not accelerate on ramp as this may cause loss of traction, ramp damage or uncontrolled ascent onto deck.

- When topping the ramp be prepared to brake.- When hauling multiple machines, personnel will

remain between the machines when on the deck.- Access to the deck or from the deck to the ground

will only be permitted by using the tailgate of the pickup while maintaining 3 point contact. (Personnel are not permitted to walk up and down the ramp)

- All loads will be secured from ground level, and where possible preference is given to appropriate mechanical devices designed for ATV decks.

- The structure of the deck, must accommodate a ‘mechanical latch and lock’ system for the loading/unloading ramps.

- The deck must be fix mounted with through bolts and brace plates to the bottom of the truck box or frame if possible.

iMPoRtant

Deck styles that attach solely to the top rails of the pickup box are not permitted.

Calculated angle of loading ramps

Deck Height from Surface:

Ramp Length

7 feet 8 feet 9 feet 10 feet 11 feet 12 feet2 feet 17º 15º 13º 12º 10.5º 9.5º3 feet 25.4º 22º 19.5º 17.4º 16º 14.5º4 feet 34.8º 30º 26º 23º 21º 19.5º5 feet 45º 38.6º 33.7º 30º 27º 25º

All-

Terr

ain

Vehi

cle

Pra

ctic

e


176



177

4.0 Re-Fuelling Practice:

• Re-fuelling will only be done outdoors in a well ventilated area.

• Re-fuelling is recommended to be completed in a designated area with secondary containment or at a retail re-fuelling outlet.

• Ensure that the engine and exhaust of the machine is cool to prevent a fire in the event of overfill.

• No cell phones are to be used during re-fuelling.

***** If your Journey Risk Plan identifies the need to re-fuel in a remote location, your safety kit must include a spill kit.

4.1 Forms

oMS CF 37- 00- 05 - atV Pre-Ride and Post Ride inspection items

oMS CF 37-00-05 all teRRain VeHiCle PRe and PoSt Ride inSPeCtionS FoRM

Authority: RPU HSSE Team Lead Custodian: RPU Road and Rail Safety AdvisorScope: Canada Regional Production Unit Issuing Dept. HSSEIssue Date: September 30, 2009 Last Revision Date: September 20, 2009Control Status: Unified Controlled Document Next Revision Date: September 20, 2012

Pre-ride Checklist: (engine off)

oK Work order Written

a proper pre-ride inspection will ensure that everything on the machine is adjusted and working properly to prevent a breakdown or even an accident. take the time and check on the following:

All-

Terr

ain

Vehi

cle

Pra

ctic

e



178


179

tires: Always maintain proper pressure in the tires and ensure that all tires are inflated to the same pressure. Use a pressure gauge capable of reading low pressures accurately.

Wheels: Make sure axle nuts are tight, secured and that none are missing. Riding on rough terrain may cause nuts and bolts to loosen. While the engine is off, check for loose nuts or bolts

Brakes: Check the brake operation – footbrakes and handbrakes. Check the cables and linkages to insure they are moving smoothly.

Throttle: The throttle should operate smoothly in all steering positions and snap back to the idle position when released. Make sure that turning the handlebars from left to right has no effect on throttle operation

Seats / Carriers: Check the security of seats/ carriers

lights and Switches: The ignition switch should be functioning properly before riding. The kill switch should be working properly because it could prevent an accident. Also check the warning lights. All lights must be working when riding.

Clutch: Check the clutch (if manual), for smooth and positive operation.

Chain or drive shaft: Check the chain for proper adjustment and lubrication. Also check for improper wear. If the ATV has a drive shaft instead of a chain make sure it has the correct amount of oil and does not leak.

tool Kit: Make sure the vehicle is equipped with complete tool kit, supplied by the manufacturer

Helmet: Verification of DOT/CSA/Snell Rating, Condition of the helmet, Condition of the chin strap and Condition of the visor.

Fluid level Checks:

oil & Fuel: While the engine is off, check the oil level. Always check fuel level before starting on a journey. Make sure that there are no fuel or oil leaks.

Brake Fluid Check: (if applicable) The proper level of brake fluid has been verified.

additional Comments:

All-

Terr

ain

Vehi

cle

Pra

ctic

e


178



179

Pre-Ride Checklist: (engine on)

oK Work order written

Brake Fluid Check: (if applicable) The proper level of brake fluid has been verified.

Check that all lights are working and ensure that the lenses are clean.

Turn the handle bars to both left and right extremes. The throttle should continue to run smoothly.

On level ground, Go Slowly, Try the brakes. They should operate smoothly

Test the horn if equipped.

additional Comments:

Post Ride Inspection:Operators will perform a post trip inspection of the machine upon return. All mechanical defects will be the responsibility of the current rider to report and to attach a “Danger - Do not Operate” tag to both the machine and to the ignition key.

The ignition key should be stored in a central location until required in order to make repairs or when the repair has been completed.

atMoSPHeRiC MonitoRing

PURPOSE: To establish guidelines for providing a safe work environment through atmospheric monitoring.

APPLICATION:Any area where the work environment is, or may become hazardous due to the presence of combustible or toxic gas, or when the oxygen content is less than 19.5%, or greater than 23% by volume.

Atm

osph

eric

Mon

itorin

g



180


181

DEFINITION:Atmospheric Monitoring includes:

• O2 Monitors• H2S Detectors• Combustible Gas Detectors• Toxic Gas Detectors• Carbon Dioxide Monitors

PRECAUTIONS:Some atmospheric monitoring equipment requires minimum oxygen content in order to perform according to manufacturer specifications. The O2 reading must be taken prior to an LEL reading to verify that the monitor can read properly.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:• Lack of oxygen• Combustible Gas• Toxic Gas: H2S, benzene and other toxic• Substances

PROCEDURES: • detection equipment:

• All work locations must have combustible gas, toxic gas and oxygen detection equipment available, as required, for monitoring the atmosphere, prior to and during work procedures.

• All worksite locations that have portable and permanent atmospheric monitoring equipment must develop site specific procedures that govern instrument use, care, maintenance, function testing, calibration and documentation, repairs and training.

• All survey equipment used for testing confined

Atm

osph

eric

Mon

itorin

g


180



181

spaces, hot work or any other permit required testing should be function tested prior to each use.

• Combustible gas testing:

A combustible gas test shall be taken when Hot work is performed within 8 meters of any well, process vessel, tank or related equipment, where combustible gas is, or may be present.

• H2S gas detectors:

H2S gas detectors are used to measure the concentration of H2S in a work area. There are two basic types of detectors:

• Drager and Gastec Sampling Tubes. NOTE: When monitoring in an unknown concentration, SCBA/SABA must be worn by the individual

[See: H2S Safety] [See: Respiratory Protection] • This method is considered to be accurate

plus or minus 25% when proper sampling procedures are used

• Electronic Sensor. Electronic sensors measure the airborne concentration of H2S on an electronic circuit. The signal, which can also be used to set audible and visual alarms at specific concentrations, identifies the H2S level on a gauge. The advantage of this type of unit is that monitoring can be continuous. The unit may be carried on a belt (personal monitor), or permanently mounted in areas where H2S could accumulate

• Monitoring units:

All buildings where H2S may exceed 100 PPM should have fixed monitoring units set to give an audible and visual alarm at 10 PPM. H2S visual alarm will be a blue beacon and LEL / General visual alarm will be a red beacon. Safe operating procedures must be written and followed should circumstances preclude such installation.

Atm

osph

eric

Mon

itorin

g



182


183

• Confined-Space entry:

Combustible gas, toxic gas, and oxygen-deficiency tests must be performed prior to a confined-space entry and at frequent intervals during the work period. Respiratory protection must be worn while the initial tests are being performed.

[See: Confined-Space Entry] [See: Respiratory Protection] • Hot Work:

All hot work requires monitoring of the atmosphere for combustible gas prior to and at frequent intervals during the work. If the hot work is being performed within a confined space, continuous monitoring is required for combustible gas, toxic gas, and oxygen deficiency. .If there is a potential for the atmosphere to change unpredictably after a worker enters the confined space, the atmosphere must be continuously monitored. Re-entry to a worksite must be accompanied by gas detection before work resumes.[See: Hot Work] [See: Confined Space]

• Precautions:

Some atmospheric monitoring equipment requires minimum oxygen content in order to perform according to manufacturer specifications. The O2 reading must be taken prior to an LEL reading to verify that the monitor can read properly. Equipment specifications should be verified for equipment operating conditions prior to installation and use.

• oil Spills:

Additional atmospheric monitoring may be required at spill sites.

Atm

osph

eric

Mon

itorin

g


182



183

[Contact RPU Safety Advisor or RPU Industrial Hygienist for advice]

TRAINING:All personnel that use or are responsible for atmospheric monitoring equipment shall be properly trained in the operation and use of the equipment and the site specific procedures that were written for the particular equipment.

BENZENE:For information on benzene, contact your RPU Industrial Hygienist. Refer to the sites-specific Code of Practice and BP Guidelines for Handling Benzene.

Canadian nuCleaR SaFetY CoMMiSSion (CnSC) Regulated iSotoPeS

PURPOSE:To establish the requirements for the safe handling of CNSC isotopes.

APPLICATION:All worksites where Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission (CNSC) regulated isotopes may be handled, i.e. radiographic inspection of vessels, piping and pipelines, radioactive isotope use, wireline logging, etc

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:Exposure to radioactive sources.

PREPARATIONS:• CnSC Certification:

Contractors must have a valid license issued by the Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission to per form all

Can

adia

n N

ucle

ar S

afet

y C

omm

issi

on

(CN

SC

) Reg

ulat

ed Is

otop

es



184


185

work involving CNSC regulated isotopes. [See: BP Canada Welding Quality Control Manual forradiographic inspection requirements]

• Work Planning Work planning for use of CNCS licensed isotopes must include consultation with the CNCS licensed Contractor.

• Pre-Job Safety Meeting:Must be conducted prior to commencement of operation. [See: Safety Meetings] [See: TDG-Packaging and Safe Transport of Radioactive Material] [See: Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission Act and regulations]

PROCEDURES:Safe handling procedures should include:

• Specific job procedures to be followed• A certification of the type and quantity of CNCS

licensed radioactive sources furnished and used• The expected effluent concentrations and methods of

control if applicable• The person in charge, responsible for the operation.

Equipment and worksite must be properly prepared (i.e. isolated, depressured, made accessible, etc.) The worksite should be roped off. Radiation warning signs must be posted, and unauthorized entry of personnel banned, in the area affected by the work.

In no event shall a pregnant employee be allowed in the vicinity of CNSC Licensed radioactive operations. CNCS licensed radioactive source shall not be left unattended at the jobsite unless it has been isolated to prevent any accidental exposure.

Can

adia

n N

ucle

ar S

afet

y C

omm

issi

on

(CN

SC

) Reg

ulat

ed Is

otop

es


184



185

PRECAUTION:Radioactive isotopes may affect some LEL monitors and fire detection systems. Station shutdown could result when using a highly energetic radioactive source in the vicinity of a detector. A risk assessment must be performed to determine the scope and risk from radioactive sources. Fire detection systems sensitive to radiation may have to be by-passed when radioactive sources are in use in the immediate area. Care must be taken to reactivate the detection system when the work is completed.[See: Equipment Shutdown Systems]

Radiation survey meters are not explosion proof, thus a Work Authorization commensurate with the level of risk is may be required.

RESPONSIBILITIES:The BP Canada Representative is responsible for ensuring that only CNSC licensed operators are used when handling CNSC licensed radioactive sources and that all procedures are supplied and followed.The CNCS licensed Contractor performing work with licensed isotopes is responsible for ensuring that safe handling procedures and contingency plans have been developed which comply with all government regulations. He is also responsible for ensuring that all applicable protective equipment, instruments, rescue and decontamination facilities are on hand and in operable condition before the job commences.

Can

adia

n N

ucle

ar S

afet

y C

omm

issi

on

(CN

SC

) Reg

ulat

ed Is

otop

es



186


187

Cutting deViCeS

All sites shall have a cutting device register approved by the site leadership, identifying appropriate cutting devices allowed for use. Selection of cutting devices must be based on a risk management plan. Consider using inherently safer designs of cutting de-vices whenever practicable e.g. self retracting or guarded blades, cutting devices with guides, enclosed blades, twin opposed blades (scissors, side cutters, tin snips). The original design of cutting devices shall not be altered unless approved by the manufacturer.

Before use: • Determine the right tool for the job as a part of your

hazard management process e.g. JSEA, work permit, safety conversations. Check your site cutting device register.

• Ensure that the cutting device to be used is the safest tool for the job, in good repair and appropriate size and design.

• Assess the potential for stored energy created either within the cutting device or the materials while performing the task.

• Discuss and document all other perceived hazards of using cutting devices prior to beginning the task.

• If available, review manufacturer’s instructions • Jack knife blades that do not use a lock blade

mechanism are not allowed. During use: • Do not use cutting devices for tasks other then their

designed purposes e.g. bending or applying side loads on cutting devices for prying objects loose or using a utility knife for stripping wire.

• Cut away from yourself.• Do not direct the blade toward any part of your

Cut

ting

Dev

ices


186



187

body or others around you who may be affected. Keep all body parts out of the line of fire.

• Use appropriate personal protective equipment. • Always check the length of the cut to ensure a clear

path.• Inspect the object to be cut and ensure that it is

stable. • Do not grab a falling cutting device. After use: • Do not leave cutting devices in an unsafe condition. • Inspect, replace or repair as needed.

dRaining and dePReSSuRing

PURPOSE:To provide safe precautions for the draining and depressuring of toxic or combustible materials.

APPLICATION:All plant and field operations.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Static Electricity- [See: Electricity] • Combustible and Toxic Fluids • Environmental Impact

PRECAUTIONS:Draining and Depressuring should be carried out in a controlled fashion. Valves should be opened slowly. • depressuring:

Caution should be exercised to ensure that any vessel, line, or piece of equipment to be depressured, has been completely isolated. Depressuring should be done only by qualified personnel. Valves that

Dra

inin

g an

d D

epre

ssur

ing



188


189

are blocked in should be tagged. Pressure gauges should not be relied on for assurance of complete depressuring. [See: Working on Energy Systems]

• draining:

When draining a vessel, certain precautions must be followed:

1. Before draining, the worker must know where the material is going, and the situation at that area (i.e., welding in the vicinity, or if it is a liquid, how it is being contained).

2. Pressured vessels should not be drained through hose. Temporary, secured piping or existing drain lines should be used.

3. When draining, the worker should not leave the area. If it is necessary to leave, he should close the valve.

eleCtRiCal

PURPOSE:To provide a general understanding of the hazards associated with electricity.


POTENTIAL HAZARDS:arch Flash:

Arch flash is defined as a dangerous condition associ-ated with the possible release of energy caused by an electric arc. An arc flash hazard can exist when energized electrical conductors or circuit parts are exposed or within equipment in a guarded or enclosed condi-tion, if a person is interacting with the equipment in a manner that could cause an electrical arc. Under normal operating conditions, enclosed energized equipment

Ele

ctric

al


188



189

that has been properly installed and maintained is not likely to pose an arc flash hazard. Design, maintenance and operation of electrical systems must be carried out by competent workers. Where mandated by applicable regulations and as needed a result of site specific risk management processes, an Arc Flash hazard analysis shall be conducted. Arc flash hazard analysis is a study investigating a worker’s potential exposure to arc flash energy, conducted for the purpose of injury prevention and determination of safe work practices, arch flash protection boundary and appropriate level of personal protective equipment. Safe working methods including safe approach boundaries, specific PPE and signage requirements for working on electrical systems must be determined by a competent worker.

Refer to CSA Z462-08, Workplace Electrical Safety and OMS CP 41-00-05, Working on Energy Systems Practice for further information.

Static electricity:

Sparks resulting from the accumulation of static electricity often cause fires. A static charge can be generated from friction resulting from the passage of oil through a pipeline, the pouring of liquid from one container to another, or steam passing through a hose. Static electricity can also be caused by the flow of air, vapor, steam, water, moving belts of flywheels or rubbing clothing. The hazard is more severe in dry cold weather than in humid weather when most surfaces are coated with a film of moisture, making them good conductors and draining off static charges.

Steam, a blast of sand, or hydrocarbons rushing through hose or pipe, or issuing from open end pipes, can generate a large static charge. The operator should refrain from opening sample lines or drains any wider than necessary.

Ele

ctric

al



190


191

Another source of potential static electricity is the use of portable plastic flammable liquid containers (1 - 5 gallon containers used for removing, filling, storing on a plastic pickup box liner).

PROCEDURES:Most power tools and portable electrical test equipment are not rated for use in hazardous areas, and are equipped with standard U-ground plugs. It is necessary, in many instances, to use a “short cheater” cord to adapt for explosion-proof electrical receptacles, or extension cords to the non-explosion-proof tool or test equipment. Due to the hazards of arcing electrical equipment or connections, the following procedures must be followed: • All electrical equipment not approved for use in

hazardous areas, must be treated as “hot work”. [See: Hot Work Practice]

• All extension cords used must have explosion-proof ends (connectors)

• All “cheater cords” must be less than 2 feet in length with one male explosion-proof end and one female standard U-ground plug, and must be used only at the immediate location of the tool or test equipment

• All connections at standard U-ground plugs must be made and adequately taped (to prevent them from pulling apart), before plugging into the explosion-proof receptacles

• When the job is completed, connections must be broken at the explosion-proof receptacle first

• All portable electrical equipment that is approved for use in hazardous areas (such as some pumps and air movers driven by explosion-proof motors) must have cords equipped with explosion-proof ends. This cord must be rated for extra hard usage as per the Canadian Electrical Code (re: rule 18-122) Where an electrical hazard exists because

Ele

ctric

al


190



191

of dampness (i.e., boilers being cleaned), portable lighting units should be used. Portable lighting units must have heavy-duty extension cords with ground fault interrupter, or that permitted by local regulations. Suitable guards must be provided for portable lamps

grounding/Bonding:

The terms “bonding” and “grounding” should not be used interchangeably, because the two processes have distinctly different functions. Bonding eliminates a difference in potential between objects, but does not eliminate a difference in potential between these objects and the earth. Grounding eliminates a difference in potential between an object and ground. The usual precaution to avoid static electricity sparking is proper bonding and grounding: • Bonding and grounding are effective only when

applied to conductive bodies. Bonding and grounding systems should be inspected regularly for good mechanical condition.

• Before loading or unloading any fluid/material by hose or piping, the truck/equipment must be grounded and bonded.

• When samples are taken in a container, the operator must ensure the container is in contact with the filling nozzle or bonded by cable. When drawing samples in a glass bottle, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the liquid in the bottle.

• When Draining or Depressuring fluid/material into a container, the container must be bonded to the drain and depressuring valve.

• All equipment and buildings must be grounded according to the applicable electrical regulations.

Cathodic Protection:

The nature of a cathodic protection system is to put an

Ele

ctric

al



192


193

electrical charge on the pipe or equipment in question, to prevent external corrosion. As a result, the cathodic protection must be shut off or disconnected, and the equipment bonded and grounded before work is started.

Work in the Vicinity of underground Power Cable:

No person shall commence excavation work until the vicinity has been checked and underground electrical power cables located. [See: Ground Disturbance]

Electrical power cables should be shut-off whenever possible, prior to commencing work. All underground power cables shall be located by hand digging method or Hydrovacing methods.

PRECAUTION:• Electrical Grounding:

Serious harm can result from electricity with relatively low voltages if equipment is not properly grounded.

• Batteries: Batteries used and/or stored in enclosed spaces must be vented to remove hydrogen gases. Sealed,

maintenance free batteries are excluded from this requirement.

• Inspection: Thermography (infra-red scan) is a recommended

practice on electrical equipment to locate potential problems. This should be done on a routine basis or

before any major shutdowns.• Identification: All electrical panels should be identified as to the

equipment they control. Appropriate signs should be posted on electrical

switch gear cabinets, sub-stations and rooms to warn personnel of electrical danger.

Ele

ctric

al


192



193

Danger – An “Equipment Starts Automatically” sign must be displayed on equipment which starts

automatically.

above ground Clearance:

PRECAUTION:Area Authorities / Issuing Authorities must accurately determine the voltage of any energized electrical equipment or conductor and the minimum distance from it. [See: Lifting Operations Practice, Table1] Minimum distances from live electrical power lines as referenced in Lifting Operations Practice Table 1 apply to any direction, vertical or horizontal. If it is necessary to work closer than the minimum distance, authorization shall be obtained from the utility company. When utility company approval or authorization is required, the operating line voltage must be verified by a designated, competent individual from the utility company. The area directly under or adjacent to an overhead power line shall not be used for storage of material, or equipment.No excavations or similar operation shall be carried out in the vicinity of overhead power lines that would reduce the original support of the power line. Earth or other material shall not be placed under or adjacent to an overhead power line in such a manner that the minimum ground clearance would be reduced.Vehicle load clearance shall not be of a height that would be in violation of the safe limits of approach from overhead power lines.

TRAINING: Only the following trained and BP authorized competent personnel will be allowed to do Electrical

Ele

ctric

al



194


195

work on BP Facilities and Pipelines: a) Journeyman Electricians b) Electrician ApprenticeOnly Journeyman Electricians or, Apprentices under the direct supervision of Journeyman Electrician, may work on equipment rated at more than 750 volts.Different regulatory requirements may apply for reporting electrical fires based on jurisdiction. Follow applicable provincial regulatory reporting requirements.

elCtRiCal StoRMS and ligHtining StRiKeS

GUIDELINES TO STAY SAFE DURING ELECTRI-CAL STORMS AND LIGHTNING STRIKES :

• Each morning check local weather websites for severe weather forecasts. Plan your day.

• If a potential electrical storm is approaching observe the 30/30 rule. The 30/30 rule states that people should seek shelter if the Flash-To-Bang delay is 30 seconds or less, and to remain under cover until 30 minutes after the final clap of thunder. If your work location falls under the 30/30 rule, outside work must cease until conditions permit the safe resumption of work activities.

• If a potential electrical storm is approaching, outside work must cease until safe to resume.

• If you can hear thunder you are still in the striking distance of lighting.

• If possible, go indoors or as a second option into a non convertible vehicle. Most homes, office, business and process buildings are grounded as per regulatory requirements.

• Once indoors, stay away from windows and doors.

Ele

ctric

al


194



195

• Do not use corded telephones except for emergencies.

• If possible unplug electronic equipment before the storm arrives and avoid contact with electrical equipment or cords during the storm.

• Avoid contact with plumbing, including sinks, baths and faucets.

• If outdoors, go to a low point. Lightening hits the tallest object. Get down if you are in an exposed area.

• Stay away from trees. Everyone has an obligation to stop work that is unsafe

• Avoid metal objects such as golf clubs, fishing rods, metal tools,...

• If you feel a tingling sensation or your hair stands on end, lightning may be about to strike.Crouch down and cover your ears.

• Stay away from all sources of water or wet grass.• Don’t stand close to other people - spread out.• Victims of lightning strikes should be given CPR

if necessary, and seek medical attention.

For more information refer to following sources.

Environment Canada http://www.mb.ec.gc.ca/air/sum-mersevere/ae00s19.en.html

US National Weather Service http://www.srh.noaa.gov/jetstream/lightning/lightning_safety.htm

Ele

ctric

al



196


197

eQuiPMent SHutdoWn SYSteMS, teMPoRaRY BY-PaSS

PURPOSE:To provide for the safe use of temporary bypasses of shutdown systems.APPLICATION:All Production Equipment

DEFINITION:Equipment shutdown systems are: a) Electrical b) Pneumatic c) Mechanical

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:If equipment shutdowns are left disabled, the potential for damage to equipment or injury to personnel exists.

PROCEDURES:Equipment protection devices must not be altered, tampered with, adjusted or repaired, except by qualified persons designated by the supervisor in charge.Equipment shutdown systems, whether electrical, pneumatic, or mechanical should not be by-passed. The piece of equipment should be taken out of service to make necessary repairs. However, there are situations where it becomes impractical or impossible to work with a piece of equipment without some manner of by-passing or jumping the shutdown system temporarily.In all areas the potential hazards must be evaluated and a site-specific procedure developed to maintain safe operation.

Equ

ipm

ent S

hutd

own

Sys

tem

s,

Tem

pora

ry B

y-P

ass


196



197

RESPONSIBILITIES:Responsibility lies with the Supervisor and employees installing, operating, or repairing equipment, while shutdown systems are by-passed.

eYeWaSH StationS & deluge SHoWeRS

PURPOSE:To provide guidelines for the provisions and placement of eyewash stations and deluge showers in BP Canada worksites.APPLICATION:All BP Canada worksites where personnel exposure to injurious chemicals exists.

PREPARATIONS:Each worksite must be evaluated to determine the need for emergency eyewash stations and safety showers. Minimizing exposure through the use of alternative chemicals, enclosed systems or bulk storage should be the first line of defense.Where the exposure cannot be eliminated, the risk should be categorized as high, moderate or low in accordance with BC Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 5.88: • High: risk of irreversible tissue damage to the

eyes or skin or of serious illness resulting from rapid absorption of a toxic substance through the eyes or skin, or where the risk of igniting clothing is present.

• Moderate: risk of irritation or other reversible harm to the eyes or skin, or of illness resulting from absorption of a toxic substance through the eyes or skin.

• Low: risk of mild eye or skin irritation. • Emergency eyewash and shower facilities must :

Eye

was

h S

tatio

ns &

D

elug

e S

how

ers



198


199

o Be designed so that once activated, the flow of water will continue without requiring the use of the operator’s hands.

o Clearly identify their location and provide directions for use.

o Be protected from all potential chemical contamination, freezing and from high heat exposure.

o Where specified, provide tempered water (15 – 30°C) unless non-tempered water is recommended by a Doctor to reduce the risk of worker injury.

Personal protective equipment must be supplied. The use of this equipment is mandatory.

note: Special care must be exercised in the selection of personal protective equipment at worksites where large volumes of water are not readily available.

PROCEDURES:location:

High Risk

Tempered continuous flow eyewash stations and deluge showers must be placed within 5 seconds walking distance but no greater than 6 m (20 ft) from high-risk areas. For high risk corrosive gases such as ammonia or chlorine, the facilities must not be located in the gas storage or use area, but rather adjacent to it.Showers may be located further than 6m if: • A non-tempered drench hose is within 5 seconds

walking distance but no greater than 6 m. • A tempered shower facility can be reached within

5 minutes of the accident.

Moderate Risk

Tempered emergency eyewash and shower equipment

Eye

was

h S

tatio

ns &

D

elug

e S

how

ers


198



199

must be within 10 seconds walking distance but no further than 30 m (100 ft) unless: • First aid services are maintained to start

treatment within 5 minutes of an accident. • A drench hose is located with 10 seconds walking

distance but no greater than 30 m.

low Risk

Effective means to flush the eyes and skin within 10 seconds walking distance but no further than 30 m (100 ft).Volume of Water Required: • Safety showers and/or emergency eyewash

stations must meet the requirements of ANSI standard Z358.1-1981.

• Safety showers, emergency eyewash stations and portable self-contained units must be capable of delivering sufficient water for not less than 15 minutes (or more if required by the nature of the material).

• Eyewash stations must be capable of delivering a minimum of 1.5 L/min of water with a pressure not exceeding 175 kPa (24psi) and with a spray pattern designed to effectively flush both eyes.

• Drench hoses must be capable of delivering a minimum of 11.4 L/min.

If potable water systems are available, eyewash and showers should be permanently installed.Where potable water systems are not available, approved portable or self-contained safety showers and/or eyewash units are recommended.

eyewash Bottles:

As a minimum, emergency eyewash bottles, one liter size, should be available at all worksites. This may require a bottle in each vehicle.Upon opening or breaking the seal of the one liter

Eye

was

h S

tatio

ns &

D

elug

e S

how

ers



200


201

eyewash bottle, the entire contents must be used or disposed. Only bottles with an identified expiration date are approved for use at BP Canada worksites.Employees should immediately go to the nearest available source of potable water to continue flushing for a minimum of 15 minutes, and to obtain medical help as soon as possible.

PRECAUTIONS:Alarm devices should be considered for remote or large worksites. This precaution will signal others that the shower or eyewash unit has been activated. Back-up personnel can then proceed to the location.Eyewash and shower stations should be: • Tested upon initial installation in accordance

with manufacturer’s instructions. • Checked weekly to ensure access is not blocked

by material or equipment. • Permanently plumbed eyewash stations should: • Use only potable water. • Be flushed weekly (note BC – requires monthly)

for a minimum of 5 minutes to completely flush the branch of water line supplying the unit. This will verify they are operational, and ensure a clean supply of water.

• Portable or self-contained eyewash or shower units should:

• Use only potable water or an isotonic saline flushing solution.

• Have the water replaced regularly or as per manufacturers’ specifications, to ensure a clean supply of water.

All operational checks and flushes should be recorded.

RESPONSIBILITIES:It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Supervisor in charge, and all employees, to assess the need and

Eye

was

h S

tatio

ns &

D

elug

e S

how

ers


200



201

provide emergency eyewash or safety shower units where required.TRAINING:Employees in charge of handling or working with injurious chemicals must be instructed in the proper use and location of all emergency eyewash and safety shower units.

FiRe PRoteCtion eQuiPMent

PURPOSE:To provide information on reliable fire suppression equipment, specific work areas with the proper type of protection relative to classification, and a method of inspection and training to ensure that equipment is properly maintained and functional at all times.

APPLICATION:All BP Canada field locations.

PROCEDURES:Classification of Fires:

• Class a Fires – Occur in ordinary combustible materials such as wood, cloth, and paper. Extinguishing agents most commonly used are water and type ABC dry chemical agent (Ansul Foray).

• Class B Fires – Occur in the vapor-air mixture over the surface of a flammable liquid such as grease, gasoline, or oil. BC type dry chemical, foam, carbon dioxide, and water fog may be used as extinguishing agents.

• Class C Fires – Occur in electrical equipment. Non-conducting extinguishing agents must be used. Carbon dioxide is the most suitable extinguishing agent. Dry chemical agents

Fire

Pro

tect

ion

Equ

ipm

ent



202


203

can be used, but require extensive clean-up of equipment after the fire.

• Class d Fires – Occur in combustible materials such as magnesium, titanium, zirconium, and sodium. Specialized techniques, extinguishing agents, and extinguishing equipment have been developed to control and extinguish fires of this class. The most commonly used agent is MET-L-X.

location and Placement of extinguishers:

Fire extinguishers must be placed in accordance with local fire regulations, National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) guidelines, and the guidelines included in the chart later in this section.

Recharge:

All fire extinguishers must be recharged with the proper chemical immediately after use. Only a certified technician can recharge a fire extinguisher in non emergency situations. Chemicals must never be mixed, as the resulting chemical reactions may damage the extinguisher, as well as create a safety hazard. Fire extinguishers that are of the external cartridge type or wheeled units must be recharged by personnel trained in recharging. Chemicals used for recharging must be of the type used by the manufacturer of the extinguisher.

inspection and Maintenance:

All maintenance must be performed by a competent person in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. (A competent person is one who has been trained in the required maintenance procedure.) The following inspections are the minimum requirement. The findings of inspections must be documented and retained on file at each BP Canada location.

Fire

Pro

tect

ion

Equ

ipm

ent


202



203

Monthly inspection Requirements:

1. All units must be in the designated location and visible.

2. All units must be checked to ensure operational reliability (i.e., seals in place, nozzle and hoses unobstructed, easy access to units).

Annual Inspections must be performed as per manufacturer’s specifications and applicable government regulations.TRAINING:The effectiveness of fire-fighting equipment may increase by as much as 40% when it is used by a trained employee. Regular fire training is a requirement under occupational health and safety legislation, and is also in the company’s best interest to prevent loss to people, property, and process.[See: Training]

RESPONSIBILITIES:It is the responsibility of BP Canada to ensure that adequate, properly maintained fire protection is available at each worksite.The contractor is responsible for the proper operation, inspection and maintenance of their fire protection equipment according to Government Regulations.

FiRe ReSiStant WoRKWeaR PRaCtiCe

1.0 Scope

1.1 This practice applies to all Canada RPU employees, contracters, and other visiting personnel doing work on BP premises and work sites.

2.0 Purpose

2.1 The fire resistant workwear (FRW) program is

Fire

Res

ista

nt W

orkw

ear P

ract

ice



204


205

designed to emphasize and enhance employee safety, through ensuring the use of appropriate personal protective workwear in potentially hazardous areas, by reducing the risk of thermal burns.

3.0 general Provisions

3.1 Fire resistant work wear must not be used as a substitute for proper job planning or minimizing potential hazards.

3.2 This policy is based on material contained within the Canadian General Standards Board, **CGSB 155.20, “Work Wear for Protection Against Hydrocarbon Flash Fire” and **CGSB 155.21, “Recommended practices for the Provision and Use of Work Wear for Protection Against Flash Fire”, and the Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers (CAPP), Consumer Guideline for the Selection of Fire Resistant Work Wear for Protection Against Hydrocarbon Flash fires.

3.3 The outermost garments must be fire resistant and shall have reflective striping as per the specifications outlined in Appendix IV of this policy. BP Canada requires that all employees, contractors wear fire resistant/retardant outerwear with reflective striping while working on BP worksites. Visibility is a safety requirement. See Alberta OH&S GSR Section 18, or B.C. WCB OH&S regulations section 8.24, 8.31., and Saskatchewan and Ontario Applicable Regulations. FRW coveralls are prone to damage from sparks, welders and welder’s helpers may wear FRW CarHarts or Leathers but the recommended garment for welders is FRW Excel Brown Duck. Regulation 851 Industrial Establishments section 84, and Regulation 213 Construction Projects, sections 21 and 25

Fire

Res

ista

nt W

orkw

ear P

ract

ice


204



205

4.0 limitations of Fire Resistant Work Wear:

4.1 The protective garments addressed in **CGSB 155.20, and outlined in Appendix II of this policy, provide a measure of protection against unplanned exposure to hydrocarbon flash fire (approximately 84 kw/m2) for relatively short periods of time, typically three seconds or less. Protective garments may serve to reduce the severity of burn injury as a result of a flash fire and may not completely prevent an injury. Garments that continue to burn after a flash fire incident are hazardous.

5.0 use of Protective Work Wear

5.1 The protective work wear should provide a good functional fit for maximum protection and comfort on the job. Users should be aware that the fit of the garment could have a direct influence on how much protection can be provided by a particular garment. For example, a garment that is too loose or too tight will not offer maximum FR protection.

5.2 The protective work wear must be worn properly. The zipper must be worn closed and sleeves and cuffs worn down and secured. For maximum protection collar should be worn closed.

5.3 Single layer protective garments are more effective when worn over an additional layer of clothing (See Appendix I)

5.4 Protective neck, head, hand and foot coverings should be worn if the occupational hazard warrants their use.

Fire

Res

ista

nt W

orkw

ear P

ract

ice



206


207

5.5 Certain synthetics or synthetic blends worn as undergarments may not be appropriate for use under fire resistant work wear, as the transferred heat from a flash fire may cause them to melt. Undergarments with melt resistant properties are required (e.g. cotton, aramid, wool). See Appendix I.

5.6 Rainwear, high visibility vests and garments shall be in accordance with applicable sections of **CGSB155.20.

5.7 Applications where disposable garments could be used are to protect regular FRW from extremely dirty jobs (e.g., tank cleaning, equipment tear down), or other fabric degrading jobs (e.g., painting).

WaRning: Disposable garments shall only be worn over fire resistant garments and must meet the flame resistant test and be approved as outlined in**CGSB 155.20. They are not intended to be the primary garment for workers.note: The outer most primary garment in any protective ensemble shall not be made of any fabric that burns, melts, or drips. The use of a garment that burns, melts, or drips that is worn over a Fire Resistant garment may contribute to the severity of a burn injury.

6.0 Where Fire Resistant Workwear is Required

6.1 Fire resistant work wear shall be worn whenever an employee enters a BP worksite where there is foreseeable exposure for a hydrocarbon flash fire or an explosion from combustible gas or natural gas liquids is present.

Fire

Res

ista

nt W

orkw

ear P

ract

ice


206



207

6.2 These foreseeable hazardous areas include but are not limited to:

• Service rig operations • Gas plants • Pipelines, pump stations • Oil batteries • Natural gas liquids facilities • Aircraft refueling operations • Laboratories • Wellheads • Construction sites • Drilling rig operations

6.3 If, following a documented (e.g. MOC) site-specific hazard evaluation, by the BP representative or designate in charge, it is determined that there is no foreseeable exposure to an accidental release of explosive, or flammable mixtures, (e.g. an office setting or while driving company vehicles), these areas or tasks of exception where fire resistant work wear is not required, will be exempt.

7.0 Fire Resistant Work Wear Material Selection and Ordering

7.1 BP Canada identifies the preferred material and garment selection for its workers, through contractual agreements with a garment manufacturer. (See Appendix II).

7.2 All fire resistant work wear selected for use must meet or exceed the requirements established in the Canadian General Standards Board, **CGSB 155.20, “Work wear for Protection Against Hydrocarbon Flash Fire”.

Fire

Res

ista

nt W

orkw

ear P

ract

ice



208


209

7.3 Use form OMS CF 32-00-01 to order work wear. Obtain appropriate approval prior to faxing to supplier.

8.0 Fire Resistant Work Wear Provisions

8.1 Management, either local or within a Performance Unit, must develop a site specific policy that addresses the following points:

• Employee eligibility for FRW • Quantity of garments • Frequency of replacement and process for handling • Approval process for purchasing FRW garment(s) • How garments will be repaired in their area • Handling of garment maintenance, and • Other sections of this policy as applicable

9.0 employee Responsibilities

9.1 Ensures that all work is conducted in accordance with approved procedures, equipment and training.

9.2 Maintains assigned fire resistant work wear in a proper manner, e.g. sleeves rolled down, to ensure maximum protection.

10.0 employee training

10.1 As an important part of using personal protective equipment employees must be familiar with:

• When and why FRW is required to be worn • The capabilities and limitations of FRW use • Proper garment care • The proper wearing of the garments • Th e potential hazards associated with the use

Fire

Res

ista

nt W

orkw

ear P

ract

ice


208



209

of non-fire resistant work wear in a flash fire situation

10.2 As with all employees’ training, this should be documented on individual training records or safety meeting attendance minutes.

11.0 Contractor and Visitor Requirements

11.1 Contractors are required to wear fire resistant work wear at all times and under the same conditions as that of BP staff.

11.2 Fire resistant work wear worn by contractors must meet or exceed the requirements of **CGSB 155.20, or as outlined in local area site-specific requirements for contractors.

11.3 Unless prior contractual arrangements are made with BP, contractors are required to have a fire resistant work wear policy that complies with the applicable safety regulations as detailed in Operating Policy.

11.4 Unless defined in the site-specific fire resistant work wear policy, a visitor is defined as a person who normally is not employed at the specific work location.

11.5 Visitors unless otherwise instructed by a local area site specific fire resistant work wear guideline, must wear fire resistant work wear at all times.

Fire

Res

ista

nt W

orkw

ear P

ract

ice



210


211

12.0 Maintenance of Protective Work Wear

12.1 To ensure proper repair and maximum garment longevity, repairs and approved alterations to fire

resistant work wear will be handled on a local basis, as required, at company expense.

12.2 Repairs should only be made with components, which comply with the original garment’s specifications and construction.

12.3 Adequate decontamination of protective work wear, according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, by laundering or dry-cleaning is imperative in order to maintain flame resistance and thermal protection. Where oily soil is present, periodic dry cleaning of garments may be necessary in order to remove flammable contaminants or contaminants which may impair the flame resistance. The site-specific FRW policy should also address this item.

12.4 When laundering protective garments, launder sufficiently to prevent build up of hard to remove stains, which could reduce flame resistance. Pre-treat oily stains by either rubbing liquid detergent or powdered detergent mixed with water into the stain or use a pre-wash product recommended for oil stains. Use a heavy-duty liquid or powdered laundry detergent and the hottest water recommended on the garment label. It is harder to remove oily soil with cool wash water

12.5 Follow all laundry precautions on the garment. There are products which will lessen the effectiveness of the flame resistance, in particular:

a) Whether the use of chlorine bleach is advised or should be avoided

Fire

Res

ista

nt W

orkw

ear P

ract

ice


210



211

b) Whether a heavy-duty soap can be used or laundering must be limited to a heavy-duty synthetic detergent

12.6 Unless otherwise decided by local management, the responsibility for keeping issued FRW reasonably clean and free of flammable or combustible materials that could degrade the fire resistant characteristics of the clothing will remain with the employee. All cleaning must be done in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.

12.7 See Static Electricity section for additional maintenance recommendations.

13.0 Static electricity

13.1 The major static hazard is the body which can store a large static charge. It is imperative that in situations where static electricity poses a significant hazard that the body be grounded regardless of the type of clothing worn. Clothing can generate static electricity of sufficient energy to ignite combustible atmospheres. It is important to minimize the build up of static electricity on work wear in order to prevent the clothing from becoming a source of ignition for a flash fire.

13.2 Workers should be grounded before entering a high-risk area to minimize the possibility of static build-up and discharge.

13.3 Workers should also avoid removing any garments while in the high-risk area. Friction of one fabric against another may contribute to the generation of electrical charge.

Fire

Res

ista

nt W

orkw

ear P

ract

ice



212


213

13.4 One approach to reduce the static build up on garments is to use an antistatic treatment during laundering. This treatment works by trapping water on the fabric to distribute the static charge through conductivity. The antistatic treatment must be added during each laundering according to the manufacturers directions.

13.5 Over drying in the dryer should be avoided to minimize static build up.

appendix i

Clothing Worn underneath Fire Resistant Work Wear

Other material worn in conjunction with fire resistant work wear (e.g. clothing worn underneath) should not contribute to the injury of a worker in a hydrocarbon flash fire situation. While the outermost layer of work wear worn must be of fire resistant material clothing worn underneath shall be of a nonfusible type. That is, clothing that does not melt.Examples of acceptable nonfusible materials that can be worn underneath fire resistant outerwear include:

Cotton linen Wool

Kermel Viscose leather

nomex Proban

appendix ii

Fire Resistant Work Wear Supplier

VF Imagewear supplies all Fire Resistant Work Wear to BP Canada. Use form OMS CF 32-00-01 to order work wear.

Fire

Res

ista

nt W

orkw

ear P

ract

ice


212



213

appendix iii

BP Canada’s Fire Resistant Work Wear Contacts:HSSE Site LeadsHealth and Safety Manager

appendix iVThe minimum configuration for reflective striping on outermost garments for use by workers working for BP or on behalf of BP.

BC WCB Standard Protective Equipment Standard 2-1997 – High Visibility Garment -

Welders

Ontario Regulation 213 Construction Projects, section 69.1 - Retro-reflective and fluorescent garment requirementshttp://www.e-laws.gov.on.caDue to the fact that welders wear leathers on the upper portion of the chest, their garments will need to have an additional band of striping around the waist of their garments. This will ensure that the minimum required amount of striping shows when they are wearing leathers.

FiRSt aid eQuiPMent and MediC

PURPOSE:To establish practices and provide equipment and emergency conveyance to ensure that adequate medical first aid treatment is available at all BP worksites.

APPLICATION:All BP Canada worksites where employees or other workers are present on a temporary or permanent basis. PROCEDURES:

Firs

t Aid

Equ

ipm

ent a

nd M

edic



214


215

Equipment: • Standard first aid equipment requirements must

be available and maintained for each worksite in accordance with provincial regulations

• Emergency conveyance must follow provincial regulations

• Each worksite should have access to occupational medical advice, i.e., off-site communications

• The attendant must not be assigned or undertake activities that will interfere with the attendant’s ability to receive and respond to a request for first aid

• The attendant should be present in the area served, during all working hours

• The service and attendant should be accessible where the attendant can reach injured workers within 10 minutes walking time or driving time to render first aid.

RESPONSIBILITY:It is the responsibility of the BP Employee in charge to ensure that adequate First Aid Equipment is available, and strategically located for ease of availability. As per provincial regulations employees must be familiar with their location and adequately trained as per provincial regulations to render first aid. In Ontario, minimum requirements are set out in Regulation 1101 First Aid, under the Workplace Safety and Insurance Act.

gaS and liQuid SaMPling

PURPOSE:To provide a guide for the safe sampling and handling of gas and liquids samples.

APPLICATION:All facility and field operations.

Gas

and

Liq

uid

Sam

plin

g


214



215

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:The sampling of gases and liquids represents a danger to personnel and equipment due to the nature of the fluids and the conditions of temperature and pressure present. Static Electricity – [See: Electrical]

PRECAUTIONS: • Prior to sampling, the approved container

must be checked to ensure that it is of suitable construction for the gas or liquid being handled, and has a pressure rating sufficient to handle the working pressure.

• Specific procedures are necessary when sampling propane and butane in special sampling “bombs.” They must not be completely liquid-filled, as they are not designed to withstand the extreme pressures of liquid expansion.

• All sample containers must be properly labeled. • Applicable personal protective equipment shall

be worn while sampling. • When sampling or checking is being done at a

bleed valve, the valve should be opened slowly. If no flow occurs, a blockage could blow loose when the valve is opened wide, resulting in a sudden release of energy. This could result in fire and/or injury due to the escape of gas at high pressure.

• Site-specific procedures shall be developed to identify the hazards associated with sampling. (i.e., sour gas)

[See: Respiratory Protection] [See: Personal Protective Equipment] [See: Work Authorization Practice] [See: Safety Standby] • Transportation and Handling: • The handling and transportation of samples must

Gas

and

Liq

uid

Sam

plin

g



216


217

comply with Government regulations for the transportation of dangerous goods (TDG) and the requirements of WHMIS.

TRAINING:Only properly trained personnel should be taking samples.

guaRdS

PURPOSE:To provide safe work practices for protection of personnel from rotating equipment and heat sources.

APPLICATION:All plant/field activities and equipment.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:All rotating equipment, belts, pulleys, grinder, etc., that present a hazard to personnel must be guarded.Any openings that could present a hazard to personnel must be guarded.All piping and equipment operated at a temperature that could cause personnel injury, must be insulated, clad, guarded or otherwise protected.

PREPARATIONS:Before any guards are removed from rotating equipment, the equipment must be locked out and tagged.[See: Energy Isolation]

PROCEDURES:The guarding requirements and design for various aspects of oil and gas operations are covered in

Gas

and

Liq

uid

Sam

plin

g


216



217

Provincial OH&S Regulations.Guards should be re-installed prior to start-up.

PRECAUTIONS:Under some maintenance circumstances, equipment may have to be operated without guards in place. In this case, the equipment must be marked and suitably illuminated to identify and minimize the hazard. Guards must be replaced as soon as possible.

Hand PRoteCtion PRaCtiCe


1.1 This practice is applicable to all Canada RPU employees, contractors, sub-contractors and visitors to Canada RPU work sites.

1.2 The purpose of this practice is to ensure that all reasonable precautions will be taken to protect the safety of personnel who are or may be required to work with their hands.

1.3 The requirement set forth in this practice will act as the minimum requirements. Specific contractors, manufacturers or plants may have more stringent requirements. In event of any discrepancies, the more stringent requirements will prevail.

2.0 Purpose Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is intended to protect, shield or isolate personnel from chemical and physical hazards. This practice outlines the type of gloves that personnel must wear when performing jobs that expose the

Han

d P

rote

ctio

n P

ract

ice



218


219

hands to absorption of harmful substances, cuts or lacerations, abrasions, punctures, chemical or thermal burns and harmful temperature extremes. Other types of PPE for hands include barrier creams, finger guards, thimbles, cots and palm pad mitts alone or in combination with Gloves. This practice addresses the proper selection of gloves for activities. Selection of hand protection is based on evaluation of the task being performed, conditions present, and duration of exposure, potential hazards identified and performance characteristics of glove material.

3.0 glove Selection

• General Purpose - Leather Palm Gloves

For general construction work, not including any hot work (i.e. welding), chemical handling, sheet metal handling and electrical work, leather palm gloves will serve as the minimum requirement for all BP Canada employees, contractors, subcontractors and visitors on any BP Canada controlled sites. Leather palm gloves will provide protection against abrasions, scrapes and cuts associated with the day-to-day activities on construction sites. Drilling and Well Service activities are granted an exception to use cotton Green King gloves.

• Chemical Resistant - Neoprene/Nitrile Gloves/ Natural Rubber/Polyvinyl Alcohol PVA / Polyvi

nyl Chloride PVC/Viton When working with chemicals, ensure that

the applicable Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) is available, has been read, understood and the protective measures as prescribed by the Manufacturer is followed. Important things to keep in mind when selecting gloves are cuff style, length, lined vs. unlined, chemical compatibility and gauge. Additional

Han

d P

rote

ctio

n P

ract

ice


218



219

information on the proper selection and use of chemical resistant gloves is available from the chemical manufacturer, glove manufacturer and occupational hygiene.

• Abrasion/Cut Resistant - Kevlar/Kevlar- Composite Gloves

In applications where the potential for cuts and abrasions to the hands are high, i.e. sheet metal handling and insulating, use of utility, banana, or lock blade knives, abrasion and cut resistant gloves shall be worn.

• Electrical Work - Rubber Gloves Important to ensure the gloves being used has

the correct voltage rating for the specific task. • Heat/Temperature Resistant - Welding Gloves Important considerations when selecting

welding gloves are not only the heat protection it provides, but also the dexterity and sensitivity that the gloves provide. [See: Cutting Devices]

noRM (naturally occurring Radioactive Material) - When working in areas where NORM could be present gloves should provide protection from physical hazards not chemical and most importantly must be disposable. other

Some specific tasks might require special and specific protection i.e. jack hammering, requires gel padded anti-vibration gloves.

Han

d P

rote

ctio

n P

ract

ice



220


221

Table 1 gives examples of job tasks and the proper selection of gloves for that task

Table 1 Glove Selection

Example Job Tasks / Work Activities Requiring Hand Protection

Leather

Chemical Resistant (per MSDS)1

Welders / Thermally Insulated

Cut Resistant (e.g., Kevlar®)

Voltage Rated (per NFPA 70E)2

Abrasive Blasting √ Biological Substances – √ Chemical Handling (e.g., paints, solvents, additives, lubricants, engine oils, hydrocarbons, & fuels)

√

Compressor / Pump / Engine / Crane – Maintenance √

Chipping, Chiseling, Grinding, Hammering, Scraping √ or √

Electrical Work on Energized Equipment √

Heaters / Reboilers – Lighting of √

Housekeeping (moving equipment & debris) √

Ladders – Use of √

NORM – Exposure to √

Pigging - Launching / Retrieving √ √ - If

retrieving

Pipe / Tubing Handling, Cutting, Threading √

Pressure Washing √ √ If using chemical additives

Process Equipment Modifications – • Pressuring / de-pressuring

lines & line breaking • Inserting / removing blinds,

sight glasses, & gauges • Operating valves, orifice

meters & controllers

√

4.0 tasks not normally requiring hand protection

While this practice requires the use of hand protection while conducting work it is recognized that some job tasks must be performed without an individual wearing hand protection. Although a thorough evaluation of the types of hand protection available should be carried out prior to making this decision.

The justification is two fold. First the task being

Han

d P

rote

ctio

n P

ract

ice


220



221

performed is considered low risk with respect to hand/finger injury potential. Second the task being performed requires micro/precise movement of hands fingers and the use of gloves cause a loss of dexterity. In order to comply with this practice, the minimum required hand protection defined in this practice must be worn by all employees, contractors and visitors to Canada RPU sites unless a properly performed and documented hazard assessment shows that hand injury hazards can be eliminated or controlled.

Examples of job tasks that may not require the use of gloves are listed in Table 2

Table 1 Glove Selection

Example Job Tasks / Work Activities Requiring Hand Protection

Leather

Chemical Resistant (per MSDS)1

Welders / Thermally Insulated

Cut Resistant (e.g., Kevlar®)

Voltage Rated (per NFPA 70E)2

Respirable Fibers – Handling of √

Rigging √

Scaffolding – Erection and use of √

Sharp Objects / Materials – Exposure to √ or √

Tank Gauging √

Temperature Extremes – Exposure to √ or √

Tool Use (non-powered and powered) √

Welding / Cutting / Brazing √ Fitters & Helpers √ Welders

5.0 Hazard assessments

OH&S Regulations require that an employer shall ensure that a known hazard which cannot be readily controlled or eliminated and that has the potential for causing serious injury be identified and brought to the attention of workers who may be exposed to the hazard. [See: Hazard Assessment and Risk Management Practice] [See: Work Authorization Practice]

Han

d P

rote

ctio

n P

ract

ice



222


223

6.0 Key Responsibilities

Operating supervisors are responsible for implementing and enforcing this practice, whereas all personnel are responsible for complying with it.

guidelineS FoR Field ViSitS


1.1 This procedure identifies the steps needed to promote HSSE issues during field visits by Canada RPU staff.

1.2 This procedure applies to all Canada RPU activities.

2.0 Responsibility

2.1 It is the responsibility of each team leader or his/her designate to review this procedure as part of employee training and awareness.

2.2 It is the responsibility of each employee to follow this procedure when preparing for a field visit.

3.0 general Procedures

3.1 HSSE issues at a site location will vary based on the daily activities. Communication topics should be adjusted to focus on the scope of work for the day and the site specific HSSE issues associated with the project.

3.2 Prior to the visit, contact the relevant HSSE coordinator and/or project manager and/or OSM and/or foreman to identify any functional group HSSE issues, site specific OMS Bulletins or alerts and any current HSSE.

Gui

delin

es fo

r Fie

ld V

isits


222



223

3.3 Prior to the site visit ensure all people traveling to the site have the appropriate PPE, HSSE tools (SOC cards if trained in SOC, HSSE opportunity cards), safety training tickets as required (e.g.H2S alive) and proof of indoctrination. Take time to ensure familiarity with HSSE awareness programs (e.g. stop, think, go; IFF ISO; 14001).

3.4 It is recommended to review the 8 golden rules of safety and identify relevant issues for the scope of work at the location before proceeding to the location.

3.5 While at the site, don’t stop the regular flow of work. If you wish to participate in a meeting with the work group, consult the person in charge of the site prior to your visit to determine what time pre-job operations or HSSE meetings are held.

3.6 Together with the foreman or the site supervisor, conduct a site walk around that can include any of the following components:

• Evaluate housekeeping • Talk to workers about their activities • Carry out Safety Observation Conversations (SOCs) • Review compliance with one or two practices or

relevant HSSE issues as identified by the group HSSE coordinator

• Review status on follow up of actions on gHSSEr OMS Bulletins and alerts for that location

• Review compliance with applicable permit conditions

3.7 Hold a debrief meeting with the foreman or site supervisor to discuss your findings and suggestions before leaving the site.

Gui

delin

es fo

r Fie

ld V

isits



224


225

3.8 Leave completed HSSE opportunity cards and SOC cards with the foreman or site supervisor or provide to the HSSE representative in Calgary to ensure inclusion in the monthly HSSE statistics.

3.10 Present your findings to the functional group manager or OSM as appropriate upon returning to the office.

4.0 documentation

4.1 Safety Observation Conversation (SOC) cards and HSSE Opportunity cards should be utilized during field visits. They are available through all HSSE representatives.

HouSeKeePing

PURPOSE:To outline the requirements for housekeeping from the point of view of safety of workers.

APPLICATION:All BP Canada employees, contractors and facilities

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:• Slipping• Tripping• Fire• Falls• Crushing• Caught Between (Pinned)

Hou

seke

epin

g


224



225

PROCEDURES:• Poor housekeeping practices are responsible for many

accidents in the work place. With a little effort, this problem is easily eliminated

• Good housekeeping practices include keeping tools, materials, equipment, buildings, and properties clean and in good order

• Good housekeeping is the day-to-day responsibility of all employees and is a continual process. Periodic cleanups, or cleanups when time permits, is not considered to be adequate

• Tools and materials shall not be scattered around the walking or working surfaces while the job is in progress. Haphazardly scattered tools, equipment and materials are an invitation to an accident

• No job is complete until tools have been cleaned and properly stored, scrap and waste materials disposed of, and the equipment and work location is in good orderly condition, and approved for continued operation

• Sharp and pointed tools shall be stored properly. Leaving such tools lying around loose creates an unnecessary hazard

• lick spots on the walking surface caused by water, oil or other substances shall be cleaned up immediately. Allowing this condition to exist, even for a short period of time, is dangerous

• Waste rags, trash, etc., must not be permitted to accumulate. All of it should be properly disposed of as soon as possible

• Materials or equipment delivered to the job site shall be kept well away from the working area until needed

• Protruding nails, straps, or wire shall not be permitted to exist in the work place. They shall be removed immediately when found

• Material which is to be stacked, shall be cross-tied or otherwise secured so it will not fall over. Rolling

Hou

seke

epin

g



226


227

stock such as pipe should be secured so it cannot roll onto an employee

• Aisleways and walking surfaces shall always be kept clear of materials and equipment

• It is each worker’s responsibility to take action and manage slipping hazards including that of mud, ice and snow build up. Worker’s must use caution in these conditions and apply immediate mitigating hazard controls such as: keeping walkways and stairs clean, spreading de-icer / sand / nut plug to improve traction and or barricading off unsafe areas to prevent workers from entry.

Hot and odd Bolting PRaCtiCe

1.0 Purpose/Scope

The purpose of this document is to describe the requirements and limitations for hot bolting and odd bolting in for the Canada RPU.

1.1 GeneralThe removal and replacement of flange bolts on live equipment is practiced for several reasons including:

• Repairing corroded or damaged bolts• Upgrading the material specification/grades of bolts• Minimizing time spent freeing bolts during plant

shutdownsnote: Hot and Odd bolting can be performed safely if planned, engineered, and executed properly. The risk associated with performing Hot and Odd bolting should be evaluated against the risks associated with the start-up and shut-down of process equipment that would be required to depressure the flange in question and the lower risk option selected.

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e


226



227

1.2 Potential Hazards 1.2.1 Hot Bolting

In hot bolting there is a potential risk of leakage caused by:

• Reduced gasket compression during bolt removal• Gasket failure from over-tightening of bolts on

replacement• Failure of bolts due to the increased stress resulting

from adjacent bolt removal 1.2.2 Odd Bolting

In odd bolting there is a potential risk of leakage caused by:

• Reduced gasket compression during bolt removal

• Inadequate tightening on bolt replacement• Inadvertent re-pressurization of the equipment

during and subsequent to odd bolting. note: The scope of application is covered in Section 3.0 of this document.Warning: Removing, replacing or retightening bolts on live piping and equipment is potentially hazardous but can be performed safely. Extreme caution needs to be exercised when assessing, planning, and carrying out these operations. Due to the potential risk, Performance Unit Leaders should carefully consider whether to allow Hot and Odd Bolting in their operating areas and retain the right to prohibit Hot and Odd Bolting.

2.0 definitions

• Accountable Manager is the person in the organization that has the ultimate responsibility.

• Competent Person (CPs : Area Authority / Issuing Authority) is the on-site BP representative that is competent to supervise the Hot/Odd Bolting operation. The CPs shall have a demonstrated

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e



228


229

knowledge and understanding of the process system that is to be Hot/Odd Bolted. The CP shall be designated by the Accountable Manager

• Document Control Management System is an established means of controlling the issue, use and updating of documents used in the management of a site

• Hot bolting is the sequential removal, cleaning, lubrication and refitting, or replacement of one bolt at a time in a flanged joint, when the system is pressurized or if the flange acts as secondary containment

• Odd bolting is the sequential removal of alternate bolts from a flanged joint when the system is shut down, isolated and at low pressure or depressurized but not necessarily gas-free

• The words bolt(s) or bolting includes bolts, stud bolts, studs, nuts and washers, as appropriate

• Performance Authority is a suitably trained and experienced individual who has been formally assessed as competent in Hot/Odd Bolting and has been given specific actions or areas of responsibility by an Area Authority

• Subject Matter Expert is an acknowledged expert in mechanical engineering.

• Technical Reviewer is a facility engineer or subject matter expert competent in the design, maintenance, and operation of mechanical pressure systems

3.0 applicability

3.1 Applicability This procedure applies to hot and odd bolting

activities on piping systems and piping connections at vessels that:

• Are standard joint types on weld neck flanges

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e


228



229

such as raised face (RF) or ring type (RT) joints in accordance to Tables 1 and 2

• Have steel flanges meeting the applicable ANSI or API specifications

• Meet the pipe size, pressure rating, flange type, and bolt count specified in the Tables 1 and 2. Older flanges may have a lower rating than those in Tables 1 and 2, and for these flanges the lower rating shall be used

• Have an operating temperature greater than 0°F(-18°C) and less than 140°F(60°C)

• Contain hydrocarbon liquids, sweet natural gas, produced water, glycol, or other non-toxic gases

3.2 Specific Exclusions This procedure specifically excludes hot and odd

bolting activities on piping systems and piping connections at vessels that:

• Contain steam, toxic oil or gas (sour gas), toxic chemicals, or asphyxiates

• Are in cryogenic service• Involve clamped flanges (e.g. Grayloc, Victaulic, etc.)• Are non-standard flanged joints and/or all those

found on heat exchanger head, tube sheet or shell joints. These joints shall be subjected to a full engineering assessment

• Are associated with transmission pipelines or regulated gathering lines due to regulatory restrictions and the potential for high external loadings

3.3 Restrictions

• Only one hot bolting operation may take place in a facility at a time unless approved by the Accountable Manager or his/her designee. An approved SIMOPS

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e



230


231

plan and MoC system may be required.• If the flange has an insulating kit, a replacement kit

must be available onsite prior to the commencement of work, in the event of an insulation washer / sleeve failure

• Flanges that have been sealed or patched shall not be hot or odd bolted

• No hot bolting shall be done at pressures higher than those listed in Tables 1 and 2

4.0 Control of Work and exception Process

4.1 Control of Hot Bolting Work that Conforms to the Allowable Guidelines within this Practice

The overall practice of Hot and Odd Bolting is prohibited until approved by the Accountable Manager using the Management of Change process. An Accountable Manager may decide to prohibit Hot and Odd Bolting in their area.

The Hot / Odd Bolting Work Form in Attachment 1 shall be used to verify and approve work in conformance with this practice.

4.2 Approval for Hot Bolting Outside of the Guidelines or any Odd Bolting

In circumstances where the Accountable Manager believes that hot bolting might be safely performed outside of the applicability criteria in Section 3.0 and/or outside of the requirements specified within Section 5.0 and where there is no other practicable alternative, an MoC is required that includes:

• A full engineering assessment of the flange• A Risk Assessment outlining rigorous control

measures must be conducted (i.e. SIMOPS plan, mitigation measures, drains, emergency response plan, fire hoses etc.)

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e


230



231

• A recommendation from the Subject Matter Expert and approval from the Accountable Manager

5.0 Procedure/Process

Hot Bolting allows for the replacement of one stud at a time until all the studs have been replaced on a weld neck flange. Prior to removing any studs, all existing studs shall be checked for tightness by torquing the flanged joint to the manufacturer specifications. Bolts should then be removed and replaced one at a time in accordance with a specified cross bolting sequence/pattern. All new studs and nuts shall be torqued according to the manufacturer specifications. Careful consideration must be given to corroded studs, nuts, and flanges. Degradation due to corrosion must be assessed by the Subject Matter Expert before the procedure is allowed to continue.Hot bolting of corroded nuts and studs is prohibited. Hot bolting and hot work are not allowed within 100 ft (30 m) of each other. A BP Competent Person shall be present during all hot bolting activities. Working on live piping and equipment should normally only be contemplated when the advantages have been assessed against the risk. The risk assessment should include: a) As-built design of the flanged joint including

bolting and gasket specifications. b) Contents of the piping or equipment (e.g. the

flammability and/or toxicity of the process fluid). c) Design and actual operating pressures and

temperature conditions - check that the pressure in the piping/equipment will be at the specified reduced value and that the process conditions can be held stable for the duration of the hot bolting operation.

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e



232


233

d) The possibility of process upsets occurring, the consequences of the upset and control measures that can be put in place to minimize/eliminate process upsets.

e) The location and condition of the nearest upstream and downstream isolation valves relative to the joint should be identified, documented and discussed with all involved personnel prior to commencing the work.

f ) Position and functionality of pipe supports relative to the flanged joint - From a mechanical standpoint, it must be established that there are no unacceptably high external loads and/or bending moments acting on the joint. There should be no significant vibration of the piping at the joint.

g) Position and type of flexible expansion joint affecting the flanged joint.

h) Maintenance history of the joint. i) Personnel access and egress as part of a

completed Emergency Response Plan for this work activity.

j) Method of removing seized nuts - Hot work cutting or burning of seized bolts is prohibited on flanges in hydrocarbon service due to the flammability hazard and/or the toxic fumes hazard when cadmium or zinc coated fastenings are burned. Cold cutting is permissible with the appropriate permit to work.

k) Possible degradation of the bolts, e.g. corrosion, stress corrosion cracking, fatigue.

l) Possible degradation of the gasket. m) Hidden or unseen anomalies or corrosion. Potential Hazards – In hot bolting there is a potential

risk of leakage caused by: • Reduced gasket compression during bolt

removal

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e


232



233

• Inadequate tightening on bolt replacement • Gasket failure from over-tightening of bolts

on replacementThe practice of hot bolting shall only be allowed for those flanges indicated in Table 1 (ANSI class flanges) and Table 2 (API class flanges).note: Some flanges require a decreased pressure rating during hot bolting (from 9% to 72% less than normal pressure rating) or are not allowed at all (ANSI 150 class flanges). Use Table 1 and Table 2 in conjunction with local hot-bolting safety practices to enhance personnel safety and insure code compliance.

5.1 Hot Bolting Procedure Cold cutting of bolts on non-hydrocarbon lines can

be used, but the blowout potential of the gasket and its ability to be retightened should be considered and included in the work plan.

Bolt removal, examination, and replacement shall be as follows:

(1) Before the work starts, authorized personnel shall check that:

a. All necessary materials, equipment, and personnel are onsite

b. All relevant procedural requirements have been met including all relevant HSSE requirements.

c. Appropriate safeguards are in place d. The pressure in the piping and equipment

is at the specified pressure and that process conditions are stable.

e. The work form for Hot /Odd Bolting is prepared (see Attachment 1).

(2) The Performing Authority shall check that: a. Each of the existing bolts is tight to the correct

torque to ensure that bolts have not relaxed in service.

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e



234


235

b. Any abnormal conditions, such as loose bolts, shall be reported to the Competent Person.

(3) Hot bolting shall be carried out on only one bolt at a time, in a sequence specified in Figure 1, or by other approved job-specific instructions.

(4) Each bolt complete with nuts will be removed and examined. Nuts and bolts found to be in reusable condition shall be cleaned and lubricated prior to reuse. Damaged bolts and nuts will be disposed of and replaced by new items of the correct specification. If there is any doubt as to the integrity of the bolting, it shall be replaced. Exposed flange surfaces must be cleaned and the area under the nuts thoroughly lubricated.

(5) The bolt shall be correctly tightened and tensioned to specified torque figures obtained prior to starting the task. The torque figures shall be consistent with the flange design, bolt type, material, and condition. Initial retightening of the bolts shall not introduce additional local compression of the gasket.

(6) After all the bolts have been replaced, a final tightness check will be carried out in the sequence specified in Figure 1.

(7) The Competent Person shall inspect the completed job and sign the Hot/Odd Bolting form and other required Work Authorizations. Any comments shall be attached to the form.

(8) On completion of work, the completed Hot/Odd Bolting form should be filed within the Document Control Management System.

5.2 Odd Bolting Procedure Bolt removal, examination, and replacement shall be

as follows: (1) Before the work starts, authorized personnel shall

check that:

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e


234



235

a. All necessary materials, equipment, and personnel are onsite

b. All relevant procedural requirements have been met including all relevant HSSE requirements.

c. Appropriate safeguards are in place (2) Normally, odd bolting is preceded by hot bolting

(to ensure that bolts to be removed are in good condition and reasonably free to move). The Competent Person should check the signed Hot/Odd Bolting form for any comments that could be relevant to the odd bolting activity.

(3) The Competent Person shall ensure that: 3.8.1 The pressure in the piping and equipment

is at the specified pressure and that process conditions are stable.

3.8.2 Each of the existing bolts is tight to the correct torque to ensure that bolts have not relaxed in service.

3.8.3 Any abnormal conditions, such as loose bolts, shall be reported to the Competent Person.

(4) Bolt removal shall be carried out according to the methods specified in the approved job procedure.

(5) The sequence of bolt removal will be specified as in Figure 2 or other job specific instructions.

(6) The Competent Person shall inspect the completed job and sign the Hot/Odd Bolting form. Any comments should be attached to the Hot/Odd Bolting form.

(7) On completion of work, the completed Hot/Odd Bolting form should be filed within the Document Control Management System.

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e



236


237

table 1 (anSi Class Flanges)Flange Pressure Ratings During Hot Bolting (1)(Temporary Removal (2) of Only One Bolt at a Time (3) Under Operating Pressure)

Normal Pipe Size

ANSI Class

Flange Type

(4)

Normal Bolt Count

Normal PSI Max

Hot Bolt PSI Max

Hot Bolt

Allowed

Comments

2” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2”

150 300 600 600 900 1500 2500

RF RF RF RJ RJ RJ RJ

4 8 8 8 - 8 8

285 740 1480 1480 - 3705 6170

- 740 1480 1480 - 2850 3700

No Yes Yes Yes - Yes Yes

Insufficient gasket-seating force Not available. Use 2ANSI 1500 23% pressure reduction 40% pressure reduction

3” 3” 3” 3” 3” 3” 3”

150 300 600 600 900 1500 2500

RF RF RF RJ RJ RJ RJ

4 8 8 8 8 8 8

285 740 1480 1480 2220 3705 6170

- 740 1325 1325 1975 575 3680

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Insufficient gasket-seating force 10% pressure reduction 10% pressure reduction 10% pressure reduction 30% pressure reduction 40% pressure reduction

4” 4” 4” 4” 4” 4”

150 300 600 600 900 1500

RF RF RF RJ RJ RJ

8 8 8 8 8 8

285 740 1480 1480 2220 3705

- 740 1350 1350 2220 3705

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Insufficient gasket-seating force 9% pressure reduction 9% pressure reduction

6” 6” 6” 6” 6” 6”

150 300 600 600 900 1500

RF RF RF RJ RJ RJ

8 12 12 12 12 12

285 740 1480 1480 2220 3705

- 740 1480 1480 2220 3705


Insufficient gasket-seating force

8” 8” 8” 8” 8” 8”

150 300 600 600 900 1500

RF RF RF RJ RJ RJ

8 12 12 12 12 12

285 740 1480 1480 2220 3705

- 740 1325 1325 2220 3705


Insufficient gasket-seating force 10% pressure reduction 10% pressure reduction

10” 10” 10” 10”

150 300 600 600

RF RF RF RJ

12 16 16 16

285 740 1480 1480

- 740 1480 1480

No Yes Yes Yes


12” 12” 12” 12”

150 300 600 600

RF RF RF RJ

12 16 20 20

285 740 1480 1480

- 740 1480 1480

No Yes Yes Yes


table 1 (anSi Class Flanges) -Continued

Flange Pressure Ratings During Hot Bolting (1)(Temporary Removal (2) of Only One Bolt at a Time (3) Under Operating Pressure)1. Ratings are for ANSI B16.5 flanges made of

American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) A-105 material at

-20° F to 200° F, and with A193 Grade. B7 bolts. Calculations are in accordance with ANSI B31.3.

2. Temporary is defined as no more than 10 hours at any one time and no more than 100 hours per year, per ANSI

B31.3 code for “Occasional Variations”.

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e


236



237

3. Only a single flange bolt can be removed at a time.

4. RF is raised face type and RJ is ring joint type. All flanges are weld neck.

Normal Pipe Size

ANSI Class

Flange Type

(4)

Normal Bolt Count

Normal PSI Max

Hot Bolt PSI Max

Hot Bolt

Allowed

Comments

16” 16” 16” 16”

150 300 600 600

RF RF RF RJ

16 20 20 20

285 740 1480 1480

- 740 1350 1480

No Yes Yes Yes

Insufficient gasket-seating force 9% pressure reduction

18” 18” 18” 18”

150 300 600 600

RF RF RF RJ

16 24 20 20

285 740 1480 1480

- 740 1250 1480

No Yes Yes Yes


20” 20” 20” 20”

150 300 600 600

RF RF RF RJ

20 24 24 24

285 740 1480 1480

- 740 1300 1480

No Yes Yes Yes


24” 24” 24” 24”

150 300 600 600

RF RF RF RJ

20 24 24 24

285 740 1480 1480

- 740 1300 1480

No Yes Yes Yes


table 2 (aPi Class Flanges)

Flange Pressure Ratings During Hot Bolting (1)(Temporary Removal (2) of Only One Bolt at a Time (3) Under Operating Pressure)

Normal Pipe Size

API Class

Flange Type

(4)

Normal Bolt Count

Normal PSI Max

Hot Bolt PSI Max

Hot Bolt

Allowed

Comments

1-13/16” 1-13/16”

10K 10K

RJ RJ

8 8

10000 15000

4100 5700

Yes Yes

59% pressure reduction 62% pressure reduction

2-1/16” 2-1/16” 2-1/16”

5K 10K 15K

RJ RJ RJ

8 8 8

5000 10000 15000

2900 3350 4650

Yes Yes Yes

42% pressure reduction 67% pressure reduction 69% pressure reduction

2-9/16” 2-9/16” 2-9/16”

5K 10K 15K

RJ RJ RJ

8 8 8

5000 10000 15000

3150 3350 4400

Yes Yes Yes


3-1/8” 3-1/8” 3-1/8”

5K 10K 15K

RJ RJ RJ

8 8 8

5000 10000 15000

2850 3300 4400

Yes Yes Yes


4-1/16” 4-1/16” 4-1/16”

5K 10K 15K

RJ RJ RJ

8 8 8

5000 10000 15000

2750 2800 4400

Yes Yes Yes


5-1/8” 5-1/8”

5K 10K

RJ RJ

8 12

5000 10000

3075 3100

Yes Yes

39% pressure reduction 69% pressure reduction

7-1/16” 7-1/16” 7-1/16”

5K 10K 15K

RJ RJ RJ

12 12 16

5000 10000 15000

3300 3400 4650

Yes Yes Yes


1. Ratings are for API 6B & 6BX flanges made of American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) A-105 material (for API 6B flanges 5K rating or less) or AIS 4130 (for API 6BX flanges 10K & 15K rating) at -20° F to 200° F, and with A193 Grade B7 bolts. Calculations are in accordance with ANSI B31.3.

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e



238


239

2. Temporary is defined as no more than 10 hours at any one time and no more than 100 hours per year, per ANSI

B31.3 code for “Occasional Variations”. 3. Only a single flange bolt can be removed at a time. 4. RJ is ring joint type. All flanges are weld neck.

6.0 Key documents, tools, References

BP GoM Safe Practices ManualUKCS-SOP-075, Hot and Odd Bolting Procedure (April 2005, Issue 2)D/UTG/054/00, BP Amoco Piping Joints handbook

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e


238



239

Figure 1: Hot bolting removal and tightening sequence.

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e



240


241

Figure 2: Odd bolting removal and tightening sequence.

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e

Hot and Odd Bolting Practice


240



241

attachment 1

Hot/odd Bolting WoRK FoRM - oMS CF 54-00-02


��



��

Attachment 1

HOT / ODD BOLTING WORK FORM

Ho

t &

Od

d B

olt

ing

PERSON Signature Date

FINAL INSPECTION: COMPETENT PERSON Signature Date

(1) DESIGN CONDITIONS (from P&ID’s, Piping Specs, Maintenance History, Current Operations)

Line/Vessel Number Line/Vessel Contents Normal Operating Pressure (psig)

Normal Operating Temperature (�C/�F)

Line/Vessel Service/Fluid Flange Standard/Rating Joint Location(s) Piping Specification

Gasket Type/Specification Location Sketch Attached: YES / NO

Number of Joints to be Hot Bolted Grade of Bolt Material Number of Bolts in Flange Torque Loading (max/min Bolt Diameter

(2) SITE INSPECTION (If NO is the correct answer (condition status) of any of the below items, then a full Engineering Assessment shall be completed as per Section 4.1 of the Procedure with the appropriate approvals prior to proceeding. The BU Management of Change Procedure shall befollowed to document the exception process required by Section 4.1.

YES NO YES NO Number of bolts as per Table in Section 5.0

Pipe supports inspected and found satisfactory

Joint inspected and found satisfactory and free from leaks. (No visual damage or signs of bending stress in joint)

Adequate access for safe work

Joint free from vibration Pressure of system at or below specified value as per Section 5.0

Operating Temperature <140�F (60�C) Operating Temperature > 0�F (-18�C) Flange type as per Section 5.0 Ambient Temperature > 0�F (-18�C) Flange rated as per Section 5.0 Risk assessment completed as required by

Section 5.0 Applicability requirements in Section 3.1 are met

Applicability exclusions in Section 3.2 are not violated

3) PREPARATION CHECKLIST (If NO is the correct answer (condition status) of any of the below items, the work shall NOT proceed)

YES NO YES NO Bolt removal sequence issued Provision for bolt cutting (if allowed) – Hot

cutting is NOT permitted on hydrocarbon service.

Bolt removal methods issued Emergency Response Plan prepared

Bolt tightening procedure issued Equipment/materials available at site

All requirements of Procedure met

(4) CONDITION CONFORMANCE TO SPU HOT / ODD BOLTING PROCEDURE

TECHNICAL REVIEW COMPLETE: TECHNICAL REVIEWER

Signature Date

APPROVAL TO PROCEED: RESPONSIBLE

Hot

and

Odd

Bol

ting

Pra

ctic

e

Hot and Odd Bolting Practice



242


243

HYdRateS, identiFiCation and ReMoVal

PURPOSE:To provide guidelines for the proper identification and safe removal of gas hydrates.

APPLICATION:All BP plant and field facilities.

DEFINITION:Gas hydrates are solid compounds formed by the reaction of a gas with water. Some of the light hydrocarbons that are components of natural gas, form hydrates under pressure at temperatures above 0 degrees Celsius. These hydrates form as crystals and look like snow. In pipelines, they can pack solidly to form a restriction resulting in partial or no flow. This is referred to as “line freezing.”

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:Caution must be exercised when a line where hydrates are suspected, is being de-pressured and opened; the hydrates may plug the line and trap pressure as well as dissolve and release hydrocarbons and toxic gases after de-pressuring: • High pressure • Propelled solids • Explosive forces • Flammable fluids • Toxic products

note:

1. Hydrates may occur as single or multiple plugs. 2. Hydrated lines should never be totally

depressured. Pressure should only be reduced to a point below the hydrate curve.

Hyd

rate

s, Id

entifi

catio

n an

d R

emov

al


242



243

PROCEDURES:identification:

Static pressure spiking on pipeline systems is the first indication that hydrates are beginning to form. A drop in flow should not be solely attributed to liquid hold-up; hydrates must be considered as the possible cause. The same applies to flowing wells, particularly if the wellhead temperature and pressure are dropping.A pipeline system should not be run when hydrates are forming, unless methanol is being injected or the flowing temperature is being increased over a short period of time.

Removal:

Prior to removal, a site specific procedure must be developed following the Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers guidelines for the safe handling of hydrates.Site specific procedure must include, but not be limited to the following: 1. All hydrates must be considered to be safety

hazards. 2. Supervisor or designate must be notified when a

hydrate is identified. 3. All piping/equipment used for de-pressuring

will meet BP Process Piping specifications; all threaded piping is to be no more than 1/2” NPT. Depressuring valves must be needle or globe valves.

4. When de-pressuring, the hydrate must be de-pressured from both ends with the differential pressure on both sides of the hydrate not to exceed 10%. If pressure is relieved on only one side of the hydrate, a potential exists for sudden rapid movement of the hydrate which may result in damage to piping or vessels.

Hyd

rate

s, Id

entifi

catio

n an

d R

emov

al



244


245

HYdRogen SulFide (H2S) SaFetY

PURPOSE:To set out safe work practices for the safe handling of hydrogen sulfide (H2S) gas by identifying the potential sources, training of employees, and developing and applying special work procedures.

APPLICATION:All personnel who may be exposed to Hydrogen Sulfide gas.

PROCEDURES:Properties and Toxicity of Hydrogen Sulfide: • All personnel entering a facility where H2S may

be present must be aware of the properties and toxicity of hydrogen sulfide gas. They must be able to recognize its presence, and know how to protect themselves from its lethal effects. The two tables on the following pages show the properties and toxicity of hydrogen sulfide

Identification of Sour Sites: • At each BP Canada work lease, all sources and

concentrations of H2S must be identified. All areas where concentrations may exceed 10 PPM must have a sign posted at the lease entrance showing the poisonous gas symbol. A sign stating the legal description of the surface location, name and telephone number of the licensee or operator must also be posted. The lease must be fenced in accordance with the applicable government regulations. Entrance roads to the lease must be considered part of the lease for posting purposes.

• All leases where H2S exists must have a form of wind direction indication.

Hyd

roge

n S

ulfid

e (H

2S) S

afet

y


244



245

PROPERTIES: • Color - Colorless • Odor - Very offensive, similar to rotten eggs in

small quantities • Vapor - Density 1.189 (air 1.0) H2S is heavier

than air (thus low-lying areas may be more severely contaminated)

• Boiling Point -60 Degrees C • Explosive Limits: 4.3 – 46.0 percent by volume

in air • Auto Ignition Temp 260 Degrees C • Water Soluble Yes (4 volumes gas in 1 volume

water at 0 Degrees C) • Flammability Forms explosive mixture with air

or oxygen

TOXICITY

Indoctrination Requirements for Work on Sour Sites: • At locations where H2S is present, H2S Alive

certification is required.Entry to Sour Work Sites: • Before any person enters the immediate area

where a system contains H2S in sufficient concentration such that the occupational exposure limits could be exceeded, all of the

Hyd

roge

n S

ulfid

e (H

2S) S

afet

y



246


247

following conditions must be satisfied: 1. The atmosphere in and around all buildings

and equipment located on a worksite must be controlled within the occupational exposure limits. The exposure limits are as follows:

15 PPM – ceiling exposure limit. This limit cannot be exceeded at any time without respiratory protection

2. All employees who work in operations where they may come in contact with hydrogen sulfide gas in excess of the occupational exposure limits should be equipped with a personal hydrogen sulfide gas detector that is capable of alarming at 10 PPM unless continuous atmospheric monitoring is conducted or checked according to a site-specific procedure.

3. Continuous monitoring equipment is present in all buildings to be accessed, or it has been checked according to a site-specific procedure.

4. Any duties other than routine shall be according to a site-specific procedure.

5. Communication monitoring, entry and work procedures are in place.

Complete risk assessment to determine if respiratory protection and emergency back-up personnel are required.

[See: Respiratory Protection] [See: Safety Standby]

H2S TRAINING DEVIATIONBP employees that are part of tours/ inspections and will not be required to do any physical work activities may enter potential H2S sites when they have completed the Enform on line H2S awareness training. These employees must show proof of H2S awareness with a BP issued training card. In this case, a deviation will not be required.

Hyd

roge

n S

ulfid

e (H

2S) S

afet

y


246



247

Other workers that are part of tours / inspections that want to enter potentially low risk conditions for H2S exposures and are not expected to engage in physical work activities may be provided with a temporary deviation to enter the site without having H2S Alive Training. A completed HARM with deviation form must be filled out in its entirety and signed by the OSM or his / her designate prior to entry. The worker being provided with the deviation is required to be accompanied with a BP representative for the duration of time on lease. The deviation must also be supported with the individual being escorted 100% of the time on site with a worker with valid H2S training.

Refer to Form OMS CF 41-00-03 – Deviation from Standard Form

inCident/aCCident RePoRting

PURPOSE:To provide incident/accident reporting requirements. [See: OMS 44-00-001 Nonconformance, Corrective Action and Preventive Action]

APPLICATION:All employees involved in, or witness to, an incident resulting in, or having the potential to result in injury or property damage.

PROCEDURES:When an incident occurs, the employees involved in, or witness to the incident, are responsible to:

• Prevent further injury and property damage if this can be accomplished without endangering their safety

Inci

dent

/Acc

iden

t Rep

ortin

g



248


249

• Report immediately to supervisor or designate• Log all pertinent data for inclusion in incident/

accident report• Secure evidence• Initiate Emergency Response Plan if warranted.

note: Contact your HSSE representative for assistance with incident investigation and report preparation.

JeWelRY

Wearing exposed jewelry on BP worksites is prohibited with the exception of office buildings. Rings, bracelets, watches, neck chains and exposed body piercing are considered jewelry. Medic Alert devices are not considered jewelry.

laddeRS and SCaFFolding – PoRtaBle

PURPOSE:To outline precautions for the safe usage of portable ladders and scaffolding.

APPLICATION:All plants, field, pipelines facilities or work locations where work is being conducted on behalf of BP Canada.

PROCEDURES:Storage:

• Ladders must be removed and properly stored after each use. Leaving ladders leaning against equipment, vessels, etc., is not acceptable.

inspection:

• Ladders and scaffolding shall be inspected prior

Jew

elry


248



249

to each use. Defective ladders or scaffolding in need of repair must be removed from service, tagged and replaced.

Maintenance:

• Ladders and scaffolding must be properly maintained to allow safe and trouble-free use.

PRECAUTIONS:Portable ladders:

• An employer must ensure that a portable ladder complies with:

o CSA Standard CAN3-Z11-M81 (R2005), Portable Ladders

o ANSI Standard A14.1-2000, American National Standard for Ladders – Wood – Safety Requirements

o ANSI Standard A14.2-2000, American National Standard for Ladders – Portable Metal Safety Requirements, or

o ANSI Standard A14.5-2000, American National Standard for Ladders – Portable Reinforced Plastic – Safety Requirements

o Ladders must be equipped with non-slip feet and be secured against movement

o Extension ladders must be equipped with suitable extension locks

o Wooden and fiberglass ladders may be used only when working near or with electrical circuits. Metal ladders must not be used in this application

o When in use, the ladder must extend 1 meter past any platform or landing, and be secured from movement. It must be positioned so that it is no more than one quarter of its height away from the well or structure against which

Ladd

ers

and

Sca

ffold

ing

– P

orta

ble



250


251

it stands, and is secured and placed on a base that is level and stable

o The ladder should be moved as the work progresses

o When on ladder the worker muster ensure three-point contact while climbing or stationary

o When working from a ladder at a height over 2 meters, the top must be secured, and the worker must have fall protection

o Both hands should be free when climbing up or down ladders. If material must be transported, it should be handled with a rope

o Only one person shall be on a ladder at a time • For heights over 6.5 meters, a ladder must not be

used; scaffolding must be in place • A worker may not work from the top 2 rungs,

steps or treads of a stepladder unless: (a) The stepladder has a railed platform at the

top, or (b) The manufacturer’s specifications for the

stepladder permit • A constructed portable/temporary ladder will

meet all material and construction specifications outlined in applicable government regulations.

Scaffolding:

• Standards and Applications: o CAN/CSA S269 (R2008) approved

scaffolding must be used when constructing and erecting scaffolding structures to work from.

o In applications between 2 and 6.5 meters, scaffolding is recommended as an alternative to a ladder.

Ladd

ers

and

Sca

ffold

ing

– P

orta

ble


250



251

o Scaffolding must be constructed/installed in accordance with all applicable provincial/federal regulations.

o Scaffolds must be constructed in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.

o Scaffolds must be tagged appropriate to the current inspected usable condition, with appropriate documentation and time of inspection

o No person shall utilize a scaffolding unit that does not indicate by tagging safe for use or, tagging has expired, or there is no tagging present.

o Scaffold must be equipped with acceptable access and egress.

o All Work conducted from scaffolding will require Toe boards, top rails, midrails and ladder well protection specifications prior to work commencing.

o Scaffold erection and construction will be conducted by a certifier competent person.

[See: Working at Heights Practice]

Ladd

ers

and

Sca

ffold

ing

– P

orta

ble



252


253

laddeRS, StaiRS and PlatFoRMS - FiXed

PURPOSE:To provide direction for the design and installation of fixed ladders, stairs and platforms.

APPLICATION:All plant, pipeline, rigs and field facilities.PROCEDURES:The design and usage of fixed ladders, stairs and platforms shall comply with applicable provincial/federal regulations.

PURPOSE: To outline the guidelines for working with fixed ladders and platforms on all facilities.

SPECIFICATIONS:Stairways:

o Facilities with Stairways utilized for access must ensure:

a. The width of the treads and the height of the rise of a stairway are uniform throughout its length, and

b. The treads of a stairway are level. c. A stairway with 5 or more risers has the

appropriate handrail, and d. A stairway with open sides has a handrail and

an intermediate rail or equivalent safeguard to each open side.

o Facilities utilizing stairs with 5 of more risers must ensure the stairway is equipped with a handrail that :

a. Extends the entire length of the stairway

Ladd

ers

and

Sca

ffold

ing

– Fi

xed


252



253

b. Is between 800 millimeters and 920 millimeters above the front edge of the treads, and

c. Is substantial and constructed of material with properties the same as or better of lumber 38 millimeters by 89 millimeters

d. Post supporting a railing are spaced not more than 3 meters apart at their vertical centers. A fixed walkway, service stair or stile shall be at least 55 cm in width.

Fixed ladders:

o Design criteria: a. Fixed ladder shall meet the requirements of

PIP Standard STF05501 (February 2002), Fixed Ladders and Cages, published by the Construction Industry Institute or the applicable provincial / federal regulations.

b. If a fixed ladder is made of a material other than steel, the facilities must ensure that the design is certified by a professional engineer as being as strong as or stronger than that required by PIP Standard STF05501 or the applicable provincial / federal regulations.

c. Facilities shall ensure that a self-closing double bar safety gate, or equally effective means, is provided at ladder way floor openings and platforms of fixed ladders, this does not apply at landings.

Work Platforms: o Covering Openings : a. When working on a platform with an opening

or hole through which a worker can fall personnel shall be protected by:

a. A securely attached cover designed to support an anticipated load, or

Ladd

ers

and

Sca

ffold

ing

– Fi

xed



254


255

b. Guardrails and toes boards. b. If personnel remove a cover, guardrail or toe

board, or part of them, protecting an opening or hole for any reason, then they must ensure a temporary cover or other means of protection replaces it immediately.

c. If a temporary cover is used to protect an opening or hole, an employer must ensure a warning sign or marking clearly indicating the nature of the hazard:

a. Is posted near or fixed on the cover, and b. Is not removed unless effective means of

protection is immediately provided.

guardrails:

o Facilities must ensure that a guardrail has: (a) A horizontal top member installed between

920 millimeters and 1070 millimeters above the base of the guardrail,

(b) A horizontal intermediate member spaced mid-way between the top member and the base,

(c) Vertical members at both ends of the horizontal members with intermediate vertical supports that are not more than 3 meters apart at their centers, and

(d) Despite subsection (1), a temporary guardrail does not require a horizontal intermediate member if it has a substantial barrier positioned within the space bounded by the horizontal top member, toe board and vertical members that prevents a worker’s falling through the space.

(e) A guardrail is secured so that it cannot move in any direction if it is struck or any point comes into contact with a worker, materials or equipment.

Ladd

ers

and

Sca

ffold

ing

– Fi

xed


254



255

toe boards:

o An facility must ensure that: (a) A toe board is not less than 140 millimeters in

height above the surface of the work area, and (b) The space between the bottom of the toe

board and the surface of the work area is not more than 6 meters high.

o An facility must ensure that toe boards are installed at the outer edge above the work area if a worker may be under a permanent floor, mezzanine, walkway, ramp, runway or other permanent surface where guardrails are installed, or materials can fall more than 1.8 meters

o A facility must ensure that toe boards are installed at the outer edge above the work area of temporary scaffolding or a temporary work platform if materials can fall more than 3.5 meters

o A facility must ensure that toe boards are installed around the top of a pit containing a machine with exposed rotating parts if workers may be working in the pit

o This section does not apply to the entrance of a loading or unloading area if the employer takes other precautions to ensure that materials do not fall from the permanent surface while loading.

Rest platform exemption: o If each worker working on a drilling rig or

service rig on a fixed double ladder is equipped with and wears a climb assist device that complies with the manufacturer’s specifications or specifications certified by a professional engineer, an employer is not required to:

a) Provide the ladder with rest platforms, or b) To have the side rails extend not less than

1050 millimeters above the point at which the workers go on or off.

Ladd

ers

and

Sca

ffold

ing

– Fi

xed



256


257

line tHaWing PRaCtiCe


1.1 The purpose of this practice is to establish a safe means to provide a sufficient heat source to thaw frozen liquids inside of steel piping.

1.2 This practice is applicable to all Canada RPU employees, contractors, sub-contractors and visitors to Canada RPU work sites.

1.3 The purpose of this practice is to ensure that all reasonable precautions will be taken to protect the safety of personnel who are or may be required to participate in these types of activities.

1.4 The requirement set forth in this practice will act as the minimum requirements. Specific contractors, manufacturers or plants may have more stringent requirements. In event of any discrepancies, the more stringent requirements will prevail.

2.0 Purpose

Thawing of frozen liquids in steel pipe is a high risk task that should never include the use of an open flame such as a “tiger torch” to transfer direct heat to the steel pipe. Frozen hydrocarbon lines may have reduced pipe wall integrity and when the frozen hydrocarbon is heated and changes state to a gas; may provide a most dangerous fuel source for an open flame. This practice outlines the types of safer heat mediums available to assist in thawing lines and the hazards associated with each application. Also included in the practice are considerations to prevent freezing in steel piping as well as options to consider during construction to assist in thawing lines

Line

Tha

win

g P

ract

ice


256



257

once the lines are put into winter service.

3.0 Pre-work required prior to heating of frozen steel lines

• Prior to applying a heat medium to a frozen line; workers must ensure that the line does not have a differential pressure greater then 2800 kpa(g)

• Operations should attempt to carefully depressurize both sides of the frozen section of the line

• Using methanol carefully pressurize (manually operated Baker pump) the upstream side of the ice plug without exceeding the MOWP of the line or 2800 kpa(g) differential across the ice plug. Consult the methanol MSDS to verify proper PPE

• Consideration must be made to allow for liquid and vapor expansion as the ice plug begins to change state. If at all possible the upstream product feed valve should be isolated

• The work area must be flagged off to prevent unauthorized workers from entry

• Sensitive instrumentation and non steel fittings must be protected prior to applying heat to a steel line

4.0 type of heat mediums available for thawing frozen lines

electrical Heat trace – Portable generator or purchased power

A good option is to strip insulation off of the frozen line and install electrical heat tracing. The heat trace must be installed as per both CSA and the Electrical

Line

Tha

win

g P

ract

ice



258


259

Code requirements. There are different options with the types of electrical heat trace being that it is available in both AC and DC supplies. After the installation of the electrical heat trace the line is wrapped with insulation to maintain the heat to the pipe wall. Hazards include electrical energy, sharp or damaged insulation, insulation fibers (glass foam, fiberglass or silicate), and if using a portable generator maintaining to the hot work permit and 8 meter rule for potential ignition sources. When utilizing purchased power the electrical connections must be explosion proof for a Class 1 Division 1 area. Prior to construction, selective piping should be evaluated during the HAZOP study to consider installing electrical heat trace lines before to the insulation is installed. If the heat trace is installed it does not have to be put into service and will provide an excellent option for assisting in thawing the line in the event of future freezing. There is minimal cost of doing this at the time of construction versus having to remove the insulation to apply a heat source.

Saturated steam – utility low pressure

With the availability of mobile steamer units (field operations / well servicing) and onsite low pressure boilers (drilling rigs / large service rig operations) provide a good option to provide heat for the thawing of frozen lines. The frozen line must have the insulation removed prior to applying steam to the bare pipe. Caution must be used if applying steam vapor near insulation as moisture directed inside the insulation may in fact lead to external pipe corrosion. A recommendation rather then applying steam directly to the pipe is to use heat conduction by strapping stainless steel tubing to the suspected section of frozen pipe, re-bundle the coupled lines with quick-wrap insulation, and connect the stainless tubing to the steam supply

Line

Tha

win

g P

ract

ice


258



259

and then carefully controlling the discharge out of the tubing with a control valve. Caution with regards to hot burner surfaces and steam burns must always be controlled in addition to the hazard of the open flame ignition source of the boiler (hot work permit and adhering to the 8 meter rule.) Hot air - supplied by a Herman nelson type of heater

Another option for heat medium is using hot air directed from a gas fired heater unit. The hot air is directed off of the discharge of the heater with the utilization of a series of flexible heater ducts. With this option it is more challenging to direct heat directly to the surface of the pipe without wasting heat. Hazards include: hot surfaces of the heater and open flame ignition sources as well as refueling requirements. The heater unit must again be positioned a minimum 8 meters from any process piping or building. Operations must maintain a continuous LEL monitor upstream of the unit (when the heater is in operation.) Hot engine exhaust – internal combustion engine

Another option that may be available is using the hot exhaust off of an internal combustion engine such as a field technician’s truck. A flexible rubber exhaust hose is connected to the tailpipe and directed to the frozen line. This type of application is dangerous and can only be used in open spaces and never used inside buildings due to the carbon monoxide concern. An additional hazard is ensuring that the vehicle is safely parked outside of the 8 meter minimum.

5.0 Hazard assessments

[See: Hazard Assessment and Risk Management Practice[See: Work Authorization Practice]

Line

Tha

win

g P

ract

ice



260


261

ManageMent oF CHange PRaCtiCe

1.0 Scope

CAN RPU has developed this document regarding the Management of Change (MOC) System which outlines the manner in which Canada RPU will manage change.MOC is a system to confirm that changes to existing and future facilities are properly recognized, reviewed, approved, communicated and documented. Temporary and permanent changes which impact the Regional Production Unit’s (RPU) operation or equipment and that are not replacement-in-kind will be evaluated and managed to confirm that health, safety, security, operational, and environmental risks arising from these changes remain at acceptable levels. It is the intention of this practice to highlight changes that affect the original ‘design intent’ of the facility, which include facility and equipment, organizational structures and supporting documentation, with the intention of maintaining an auditable trial from the original design through to the current status. This MOC system is designed to confirm compliance with the OSHA Standard 1910.119, Exploration and Production - Integrity Management Standard Element 7, and designed to confirm that:

• temporary and permanent changes to organization staffing levels, procedures, equipment, products, materials and substances are evaluated,

• processes are in place to confirm the practice has been correctly applied, the proposed modification is safe to commission, and/or strategies to manage organizational risks (transitional and long tem) are developed,

• authority for approving MOC decisions is clearly defined,

• documentation requirements including the scope, justification for change and updates to all engineering drawings and operating procedures.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


260



261

• potential consequences, required mitigation and any time limitations are communicated throughout the RPU to affected staff,

• a Pre-Startup Safety Review/ Pre-Startup Compliance Review is completed after modification to confirm the change was made as designed with relevant details / training communicated,

• the proposed changes do not compromise approved emergency response plans,

• individual MOCs are closed out after relevant documentation is updated and available to staff, and

• annual or more frequent review by a competent person to verify the RPU MOC system is being applied correctly.

For major modifications or additions to facilities where the Capital Value Process (CVP) for projects will be used, MOC will also apply. The operating facility will need to manage the modification/addition through the MOC practice. In addition, the project team may need to utilize the MOC practice after the design Process Hazard Analysis (PHA) has been completed to manage ongoing design changes.The Environmental Management System (EMS) Document Control Procedure provides MOC for the various procedures and documents in the EMS. The EMS Document Control Procedure may also be used for other procedural revisions, as appropriate, except for those management systems, operating and maintenance procedures required as part of OHSA’s Process Safety Management (PSM) program, Environmental Protection Agency’s Standard 68, Risk Management Plan, BP’s Integrity Management (IM) program or Health, Safety and Security Management System.Those US properties covered by the OSHA 29 CFR 1910.119 regulation for Process Safety Management (PSM) regulation Risk Management Plan are required to have site-specific details regarding review/approval delegations for each location. The MOC section of the

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



262


263

PSM Performance Baseline provides additional guidance on how the site MOC procedure will be applied.All locations shall utilize the Electronic Management of Change Application (eMOC) to document, track, and audit the MOC process against this Site Technical Practice (STP).

2.0 general Requirements

2.1 Site specific procedures and Delegation of Authority (DOA) documents may be developed but may not deviate from the requirements of this STP.

2.2 Verbal agreements on MOC requirements for different changes should be followed up with an email or comment reflecting the agreement to the MOC Coordinator.

2.3 The procedure covers modifications intended for implementation by BP personnel and contractors, as well as projects designed by an approved engineering contractor, but does not apply to project scope changes which are managed by the engineering contractor using their internal processes.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


262



263

3.0 terms, use of language and definitions

3.1 terms

The following terms are utilized in this STPCan CanadaCVP Capital Value Processdoa Delegation of AuthoritydPiC Designated Person in Chargeea Engineering AuthorityeMoC Electronic Management of Change ApplicationeMS Environmental Management SystemePa Environmental Protection AgencyetP Engineering Technical PracticeHSSe Health Safety Security EnvironmentalHazoP Hazard and Operability AnalysisiM Integrity ManagementJSea Job Safety and Environmental AnalysisKPi Key Performance IndicatorMoC Management of Changenag North American GasoMS Operational Management StrategyoSHa Occupational Safety and Health AdministrationPHa Process Hazard AnalysisPSM Process Safety ManagementPSSR Pre-Startup Safety ReviewPSCR Pre-Startup Compliance ReviewRat Risk Assessment ToolRiK Replacement-in-KindRPu Strategic Performance UnitStP Site Technical Practices

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



264


265

ta Technical Authority3.2 use of language

Throughout this document, the following words when used in the context of actions by BP or others have the specific meanings:

• “Will” - used in connection with an action by BP, rather than by a contractor / supplier

• “May” - used where alternatives are equally acceptable

• “Should” - used where a provision is preferred or recommended

• “Shall” - used where a provision is mandated by NAG SPU Standards/Policies/Practices and is a min. requirement

• “Must” - used only where a provision is a regulatory requirement or alternatives are not equally acceptable

• “Conformance” - meets the requirements of the NAG SPU Standards/Policies/Practices

• “Compliance” - meets the requirements of applicable regulations

3.3 definitions

The following definitions are used in this STPadministrative Change - Temporary or permanent changes to a policy, procedure (operating, maintenance, etc…), process or form made at RPU, OC or facility level that affects process safety, and integrity management.emergency Change - Action necessary to remedy an emergency that poses imminent danger to safety, health, the environment or has a serious financial impact, which demands an immediate response.Formal Safety assessment - The process of understanding hazards by hazard identification and

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


264



265

analysis of the causes, consequences, potential for escalation, and preventions.Management - Employees which are first line leaders.Organizational Change - A temporary or permanent change in the organization or in personnel with specific knowledge or experience who supervise or operate a facility which would lead to a loss of knowledge or experience.Permanent Change - A change that will remain in effect until another MOC is completed to remove it from service. Permanent MOCs are closed once all signatures have been gathered, all signatures received, and all filing requirements have been met.Pre-implementation action item - Action items which shall be completed prior to an MOC being authorized for implementation (startup).Post-implementation action item - Action items which shall be completed prior to MOC closure.Risk assessment / Hazard analysis - A broad term for formal and informal tools used to identify health, safety and environmental hazards and to develop controls to minimize, mitigate and/or eliminate them. Examples: RAT/JSA, Risk Matrix, What-if (brainstorming), What-if Checklist, HAZOP, Organizational Change Risk Assessment, Quantitative Risk Assessment, etc.Replacement-in-Kind (RiK) - Replacement-in-Kind (RIK) is the replacement of an item (e.g., equipment, chemical or procedure) with another item that meets the original design specification of the item being replaced.technical Change - A permanent or temporary change to an existing facility or process or deviation from the documented design limits.temporary Change - A change not intended to be permanent and that will not exceed the indicated time frame for the change without additional review and approval. A time shall be specified when the temporary change is to be returned to the original conditions and is subject to the same evaluation as a permanent change.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



266


267

4.0 Key Responsibilities

4.1 Management

All levels of Management are responsible for:• Implementing the requirements of this MOC Site

Technical Practice (STP),• Identifying competent persons and delegating to

them the responsibility for detailed development of MOC proposals,

• Approving and authorizing implementation of applicable changes,

• Coordinating assurance assessments, and• Confirming the MOC Site Technical Practice (STP)

is adhered to.

4.2 employee

All personnel (contractor and badged) assigned to work for BP in NAG are responsible for:

• Understanding the requirement for MOC,• Following this MOC Site Technical Practice (STP),

and• Identifying/recognizing technical, administrative,

and organizational changes before they occur.

Note:Detailed descriptions of all roles within the MOC process are covered in Section 5.0 - Procedural Steps

5.0 Procedural Steps

5.1 MoC determination

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


266



267

Once a foreseeable change is identified, the employee shall determine the type of MOC required and take the necessary actions to initiate an MOC. There are 4 types of MOCs within NAG - technical, administrative, organizational or drilling and wells. Each MOC type is listed below with examples for each.

5.1.1 technical MoC

A Technical MOC shall be performed if (this list is not all inclusive):

• Valve - style, pressure rating, size, packing, seals or pressure safety valves (PSV) setting changes,

• Piping and Flanges - size, schedule, material or flange rating changes,

• Pumps and Compression - If material (including internals), flange size, rating, capacity, head or type of seal changes,

• Drivers - horsepower rating, motor electrical classification or lubrication system changes,

• Vessel/Tanks - If nozzles, service configuration, Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP), relief capacity is changed, or if there is welding on shell, head or walls,

• Introduction process chemicals - if composition, function, or reaction is changed

• Equipment changes/modifications that require adjustments to pressure relief settings,

• Constructing new production/process facilities or new projects tied into existing facilities,

• Installation or relocation of temporary or permanent occupied buildings,

• Changes to process safety system design, function or information,

• Permanent bypassing/overriding of any Defeated Safety System (DSS) device. (Temporary bypassing/

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



268


269

overriding of safety systems for routine testing, maintenance or startup purposes is excluded), or

• Bypass connections/piping around equipment normally in service or removing equipment from service,

Refer to the Technical MOC Determination Tree AppendixB for further assistance.

5.1.2 organizational MoC

An Organizational MOC shall be performed if (this list is not all inclusive):

• Change results in a net reduction or gain in the number of workers from agreed/current level,

• Change results in a change of duties or authority levels for an individual or group,

• Change to the shift schedule or staffing approach,• Change in leadership (first line leaders and above), or• Change in professional staff (engineering, IM, etc.).

Refer to the Organizational MOC Determination Tree - AppendixC for further assistance.

An Organizational MOC is normally not required when filling a non-professional staff / non-management level position with a new person or for moving persons from one position to another. Existing job competencies and training processes are deemed sufficient. Special consideration should be given when replacing existing long term employees with new hires with the same core competencies but with far less experience on the job.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


268



269

5.1.3 administrative MoC

An Administrative MOC shall be performed if (this list is not all inclusive):

• Deviations from or exceptions to BP Group Standards

• Deviations from or exceptions to NAG/CAN STP’s. A separate approval, per the NAG Technical Practices Control Procedure (NAG-GP-00-0600), must be obtained for deviations/variance to applicable technical standards. The review and approval process utilizes e-MOC, but only covers the technical review of the variance-not the overall change which is covered by the site e-MOC, or

• Deviations from or exceptions to Operating Area’s HSSE Policies, Practices or Permits.

• Modifications made within one of the elements of the PSM Baseline, where specified, to adjust for site-specific condition,

• Updates to the overall PSM performance program made at the RPU level, or

• Regulatory or technical content changes made to any policy, practice, procedure, process, permit or form at the RPU, OC, site or facility level.

Refer to the Administration MOC Determination Tree - AppendixDfor further assistance.

5.1.4 drilling and Wells MoC

For the Drilling and Wells organization, a Drilling and Wells MOC shall be performed for:

• Deviations from or exceptions to Drilling & Wells Operations Policy Manual (DWOP - NAG version),

• Deviations from or exceptions to NAG/CAN Drilling and Wells STP’s. A separate approval, per

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



270


271

the NAG Technical Practices Control Procedure (NAG-GP-00-0600), must be obtained for deviations/variance to applicable technical standards. The review and approval process utilizes e-MOC, but only covers the technical review of the variance-not the overall change which is covered by the site e-MOC, or

• Deviations from or exceptions to Operating Area’s HSSE Policies, Practices, Permits, or License to Operate.

Appropriate levels of authorization and documenta-tion for the below changes can take the form of email confirmations or re-write with signatures, all kept in the original wellfile:

• Deviations from original well or wellwork plan, changes to completion program/design, well testing program or initial production procedure,

• Emergency changes require coordination between onsite personnel and appropriate levels of authority, and

• Major rig or other equipment modifications shall be managed in accordance with the contractor’s MOC process.

Other than as described in this section 5.1.4 above the construction of a new well does not require an MOC, as the appropriate procedures are covered in the NAG/CAN Application of DWOP and related Drilling, Completions and Wells ETPs.

5.1.5 Replacement-in-Kind (RiK)

RIK includes changes that use the same size, mate-rial, style, type, range, chemicals, control, operation, procedure, etc.

Examples of RIK are as follows (this list is not all

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


270



271

inclusive):• Valves - Replacement of existing valves with valves

of same design capabilities (e.g., pressure rating, materials of construction, nominal size, style, and flange facing),

• Piping and flanges - Replacement piping and flanges shall have matching nominal size and bore with the piping and flanges being removed. The manufacturer may change but the weight, schedule (wall thickness), flange rating, facing and materials of construction shall be the same,

• Pumps and compressors - Replacement shall match the existing equipment in pumping capacity, fuel type, materials of construction, seal type, suction and discharge rating and flow rate and shall also have same environmental standards (e.g., emissions and lubricants)

• Electrical - Replacement of a breaker or fuse with one of the same rating, replacement of wiring with same gauge and current carrying rating, or replacement of insulation,

• Electric motors - Replacement shall have matching materials, horsepower, efficiency, voltage rating, RPM, and frame size and type,

• Instrumentation/safety systems - New control valve with no change in design capabilities or materials of construction, adjusting operational set points within established operating range, or routine testing and maintenance of safety devices and alarms,

• Chemical - Changing the recommended concentration of a chemical additive, within established limits or product name change without alteration to composition,

• Operations - Variations in operating parameters (flow, pressure, and temperature) that are within the design limits as described in current standard operating procedures or changes in operating

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



272


273

efficiency that do not adversely affect the HSE Performance Agenda, or

• Organizational - Reassignment and replacement of qualified personnel or regular crew change.

5.2 initiation

MOC Initiation begins with a BP employee or contractor recognizing a change and initiates the MOC process.The initiator has the greatest knowledge of the change and needs to communicate that information in sufficient detail to eliminate delays in the evaluation of the change and include any supporting or relevant documentation.

The Initiator responsibilities include:• Discussing the proposed change with their first line

supervisor, facility engineer or other key personnel prior to initiating an MOC,

• Entering eMOC and creating a new MOC in the area / facility containing the change

• Identifying information regarding the proposed change such as:

o Type of change: Administrative, Organizational, Technical or Drilling and Wells

o Time in service: Permanent or Temporary (date of expiration required)

o Title: brief subject line of proposed change,o Scope: detailed description of the proposed

change, ando Justification: technical basis of the proposed

changed and why its to be doneo Estimated Implementation Date for the

change (expected date of change start-up or implementation - no restriction on time allowed)

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


272



273

• Selecting a Verifier(s), and• Assisting the Verifier(s) in selecting the workflow required for this change.

Refer to the MOC Workflow - AppendixA for further assistance.

Note:It is encouraged (but not required) that discussions be generated with and verbal agreement obtained from key personnel prior to initiating a new MOC.

5.3 MoC Verification

MOC Verification is normally performed by the initiator’s first line supervisor, facility engineer or an employee delegated this responsibility by BP management.

Verifier(s) responsibilities include:• Scrutinizing the requested change to determine

whether the change fits within the MOC applicability guidelines, or worthwhile taking into account cost benefits,

• Confirming financial support for the change,• Providing the initial approval to move forward or

rejection of the change,• Appointing the MOC Coordinator,• Assisting the MOC Coordinator with the selection

of the MOC workflow, and• Inputting a comment on any MOC which is not to

move forward explaining the reason for cancellation and checks “NO” on the MOC form.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



274


275

Note:When a Verifier disapproves of the change (checks “NO” on the eMOC form) eMOC will automatically cancel the MOC.

This is the only time within eMOC which the change is automatically cancelled.

5.4 MoC Coordination

Each MOC has one MOC Coordinator assigned. The MOC Coordinator is the person assigned by the Verifier(s) to manage the MOC process/workflow from review through closure.

Coordinator responsibilities include:• Reviewing the Verifiers initial workflow (if input)

and establishing the final workflow (review, approval, etc…) of the change,

• Assigning personnel responsible to review, approve, complete required action items, and authorize

a proposed change,• Confirming that required risk assessments are

conducted and recommendations are addressed,• Resolving conflicts/concerns associated with the

MOC,• Consulting with first line supervisors to confirm

that assigned personnel are addressing their responsibilities in a timely and efficient manner,

• Identifying and documenting Pre/Post-implementation action items,

• Confirming that the required PSSR/PSCR is conducted,

• Confirming proper communication, documentation, and follow-up of each assigned MOC,

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


274



275

• Confirming changes stay within the defined scope and that the recommendations/action items from the assessment are fully implemented,

• Confirming that relevant documentation is updated, and

• Confirming that the MOC process is completed by closing or cancelling the MOC when required.

5.5 MoC Review and evaluation

The review stage is an integral part of the MOC process and the level of detail for each review should be appropriate for the complexity of the proposed change and for the potential hazards the change poses.Reviewers shall have a thorough understanding of the MOC practice and be knowledgeable, trained and experienced with the equipment, practices and process changes under consideration. Review team members are responsible for evaluating and making available the appropriate level of documentation once completed.

Reviews are in place to confirm all changes meet the following:

• OMS and gHSEr expectations,• Adherence to all applicable codes and industry

standards,• Design specifications and generally accepted

engineering practices,• Adherence to all HSSE policies, practices, processes

and procedures,• Compatibility with existing processes or equipment,

and• Consideration of the impact on future operations.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



276


277

Note:Where new or used piping or vessels are to be added to a production/plant process, a qualified American Petroleum Institute (API) inspector or his local designate (facility engineer or other competent individual) should be involved with the design review, purchasing and/or construction to ensure fit-for-service equipment is installed. Some states require different certifications in addition to the API qualification.

5.5.1 Hazard analysis team Members

One of many key aspects to the review process is the completion of a risk assessment / hazard analysis.Risk assessments and hazard analysis are intended to be a thorough and accurate assessment of the potential hazards in a facility, minimizing the risk of personnel injuries, loss of equipment, and damage to the environment performed by a team of subject matter experts with the skills to properly evaluate the requested change. Risk assessments and hazard analysis shall be completed for all technical and organizational MOCs. Operations management shall be responsible for confirming the appropriate level (methodology) of risk assessments / hazard analysis is performed. These assessments are broken down into two types - informal and formal.informal assessments include techniques such as Job Safety and Environmental Analysis (JSEA),Risk Assessment Tool (RAT), hazard statement or risk matrix. Assessments are normally utilized for review of installation/implementation work steps.Formal assessments include techniques such as: Collective Reviews, Structured Brainstorming,Engineering Calculations, What-If/Checklist, HAZOP,

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


276



277

Failure Modes and Effect Analysis (FMEA), Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis (FMECA), Quantitative Risk Analysis (QRA) - IncludingFault Trees and/or Event Trees, Human Error Probability Analysis, Consequence Analysis - DispersionModeling, Fire and Explosion Studies, Safety Function Impairment, etc.Further guidance on hazard assessment can be found in NAG Process Safety Management (PSM)Baseline, NAG SPU Hazard Evaluation Practice, and gRP 3.3-0001: Selection of hazard evaluation & risk assessment techniques.

Refer to the Risk Assessment / Hazard Analysis Decision Tree - AppendixE for further assistance

Notes:1. Risk assessment / hazard analysis shall be performed for all technical and organizational MOCs.2. Risk assessment / hazard analysis for administrative MOCs are performed as deemed necessary.3. Risk assessment / hazard analysis for STPs deviations are at the discretion of the EA.

Hazard Analysis Team Members responsibilities include:• Identifying specific hazards that the proposed change may create. Determine if changes that significantly increase the possibility of an undesirable event or the severity of the event should receive more rigorous assessment methods (e.g., a formal process hazard analysis or a risk assessment).• Estimating the risk exposure, determine how to eliminate or mitigate hazards and identify opportunities to reduce the probability and consequence of an incident.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



278


279

• Determining if the change has any adverse affect on the HSSE Performance Agenda and review all aspects of the change and how it relates to the potential environmental impacts outlined in OMS.• Determining if the change can be safely implemented. Safety consideration should include both process safety and traditional safety concerns such as, but not limited to, industrial hygiene and the use of personal protective equipment (PPE).• Determining whether the proposed controls (e.g., permits, staffing, or specific supervision required during implementation) for implementation are acceptable.• Determining what additional activities (e.g., updating drawings and procedures, training of personnel, and appropriate communication of the change to personnel) shall be accomplished before implementation of the change.• Identifying the actions that need to be accomplished and documented after the change is complete to satisfy regulatory or BP requirements.• Confirming the hazard analysis is formally documented and attached to the MOC.

Documentation Requirement:All hazard assessments shall be documented and filed (electronically or in hard copy) with the MOC file.

Note:Individual reviewers are responsible for discipline specific reviews. The change type dictates the differ-ent disciplines included in the Review section of an MOC. Technical Changes shall however be reviewed by at least one of the following - Local CAN Engi-neer, Local Engineering Lead, Technical Authority or Engineering Authority. The following text has been adapted from NAG-GP 00-0600 Technical Practices Control procedure.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


278



279

5.5.2 local Can engineer

The Local CAN Engineer plays a vital role in the MOC review process. The level of review should be appropriate for the complexity of the proposed change and for the potential hazards the change poses. This includes evaluation of the proposed change as described in the MOC and making the appropriate recommendations which shall be documented. The primary focus of the discipline Reviewer(s) is in their area of expertise, but should highlight any other issue that may be identified.

Local CAN Engineer responsibilities include:• Advising Local Engineering Lead, staff / contractors

on issues relating to technical integrity,• Involvement/consultation in local MOC efforts that

require technical review,• Reviewing technical MOC’s for their assigned

location,• Assisting in the selection of discipline Reviewers and

appropriate Technical Authorities (TA),• Assisting in determining the appropriate level of Risk

assessment to be performed,• Following the NAG SPU Technical Practices Control

Procedure,• Utilizing the appropriate standards, practices and

design guidelines specified for NAG ,• Advising staff and Local Engineering Leads with

respect to exceptions to RPU STPs,• Utilizing NAG/CAN RPU Technical Authorities

where required to evaluate requests for exceptions to the STP/industry standards/project specifications as requested,

• Linking up with the relevant RPU TA to understand ETP/risk related issues, and network on potential exceptions to STPs,

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



280


281

• Recommending other personnel as additional discipline Reviewers,

• Identifying hazards along with mitigation actions required,

• Confirming adherence to applicable codes and industry standards,

• Requesting a more extensive hazard evaluation (Formal PHA or risk assessment),

• Determining if the change can be easily implemented. (This includes consideration of both Process Safety and HSSE concerns.),

• Determining whether the appropriate controls are identified. (Special permits, additional staffing, specific supervision during implementation), and

• Determining additional pre-implementation activities required prior to the implementation of the change (developing operating procedures, training personnel, etc).

The following boundaries should be applied by the Local NAG Engineer when considering whether other sources of review should be included for technical MOCs

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


280



281

Table5.5.2

Change Results in Following Situation Required technical Review involvement

Use of new technology (e.g. new type of pump/compressor/valve/instrumentation or electrical components or new metallurgy/materials not previously utilized in the asset.

Local Engineering Lead and appropriate CAN RPU TA

Use of non Original Equipment Manufacturer replacement parts

Local Engineering Lead

Modification to the Emergency Shutdown System (ESD) login/system for the process


Introduction of a Safety Instrument System (SIS) with a Safety Integrity Level (SIL) requirement of 2 or more


Change to previous alarm limits Local Engineering LeadChanges to the min/max temperature requirements of the system that are within 5% or 5 deg F of the design limit (whichever is greater)


Changes to the min/max pressure requirements of the system that are within 5% or 5 psig of the design limit (whichever is greater)


Rerate or derate of existing equipment via Suitability for Service (SFS) reviews that result in new minimum or maximum design limits


Introduction of a new chemical, catalyst, or feedstock to the process


Requires modification of Environmental or Operating Permit from a regulator


Introduction of a new hazard with a potential consequence of A to D utilizing the Group Defined Practice for Assessment and Prioritization of risk

Local Engineering Lead and appropriate CAN RPU TA and CAN RPU EA

5.5.3 local engineering lead

Local Engineering Lead responsibilities include:• Maintaining a list of approved technical

(engineering) reviewers for their area in the eMOC system. Approved technical reviewers should have a minimum of 3 years industry experience, demonstrated use and awareness of NAG/CAN STPs, have completed Level 2 IM training, and demonstrate an understanding of the CAN MOC STP (CAN STP GP 00-05),

• Confirming that Local CAN Engineers involved in review of technical MOCs provide consistent and quality reviews per the roles described, and

• Providing guidance/input on situations identified

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



282


283

in Table 5.5.2 requiring Local Engineering Lead involvement.

5.5.4 technical authority (ta)

The IM Standard defines Technical Authority (TA) as persons with specific discipline expertise appointed by the Engineering Authority (EA). The primary role of TAs is to act as the Technical Integrity Advisor within their designated engineering discipline or activity by confirming the safe and consistent application of company and regulatory codes and standards and good engineering practices.

Technical Authority responsibilities include:• Technical Risk and Integrity Management,• Application and upkeep of Engineering Technical

Practices (ETPs),• Application and upkeep of Site Technical Practices

(STPs),• Identification of risk and mitigation

recommendations,• Technical MOC Reviewer,• Review/approval of Technical modification or change

beyond company technical practices or industry standards,

• Technical reviews of non-major projects in CVP Select and Define stages, and

• To provide technical assistance to engineering staff, and

• Providing guidance/input on situations identified in Table 5.5.2 requiring TA involvement.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


282



283

5.5.5 engineering authority

The EA is accountable for confirming processes and systems are in place for the identification and management of engineering risk.

Engineering Authority responsibilities include:• Reviewing/approving all changes which do not fall

within company or industry standards• Controlling the application of Site Technical

Practices (STPs) appropriate to the BP Operation (RPU, OC or Project).

• Annual auditing of the MOC System, and• Providing guidance/input on situations identified in

Table 5.5.2 requiring EA involvement.

Refer to the Engineering / Project Checklist - Appendix I for further assistance.

Notes:1. Engineering / Project Checklist - Appendix I is intended to be a punch list to ensure key topics are considered during the design work. They do not replace the team hazard review using accepted industry methodology and is just an example which may be edited for site application.2. Always evaluate applicability of regulatory and permit requirements and Green House Gas initiatives.3. Every MOC shall be reviewed, and all reviewers shall agree before proceeding to the approve stage.4. Rejection by any member of the review team should be documented on the MOC form comments page.5. All affected personnel will be advised of the rejection rationale.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



284


285

Documentation Requirement:1. Checklists or review techniques shall be annotated / attached to the MOC upon completion.2. Rejection rational will be documented and / or Coordinator will include/attach the rejection rationale with the MOC documentation for future reference.

5.6 MoC approval

All MOCs shall be approved prior to the requested change moving forward. The Approver shall be appropriate for the type of MOC being conducted as specified in the CAN Delegation of Authority Document (Appendix F).

Approver’s responsibilities include:• Confirming that all appropriate Reviewers have

reviewed/recommended the change,• Confirming that all relevant personnel have indicated

agreement of the change by either electronic or hardcopy signature,

• Confirming that required documentation is available and is up to date,

• Confirming that the proposed changes accomplish their original intent,

• Recommending additional Reviewers,• Requesting additional information, and• Approving the MOC.

Refer to the CAN Delegation of Authority (DOA) Document - AppendixF for further assistance

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


284



285

Notes:1. APPROVAL of an MOC gives the authority permission to begin the ordering of materials / equipment and starting construction. For long lead items, management may elect to order earlier in the MOC process and accept the financial risk.2. Rejection by any member of the approval team should be documented on the MOC form comments page.3. All affected personnel will be advised of the rejection rationale.

5.7 Pre-implementation action item assign ment and Completion

Most MOCs will have some form of pre-implementation action items associated with them. The number of these actions can vary greatly based on the risk, complexity and magnitude of the change. The appropriate pre-implementation action items shall be chosen for completion along with a person responsible for completing each assigned action item.

Pre-implementation action items may include, but are not limited to:

• Updating Process Safety Information as required,• Redlining facility drawings (Process Flow Diagram

(PFD), Piping & Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID), electrical area classification, etc),

• Redlining operating procedures,• Redlining maintenance procedures and equipment

data files,• Redlining the emergency response plan,• Updating applicable regulatory requirements

(fugitive emissions inventories, emission factors, new regulatory reporting, etc),

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



286


287

• Confirming that training has been completed and documented on the MOC form or training rosters maintained onsite,

• Confirming that the PSSR / PSCR has been completed and documented, and

• Confirming that all action items identified in the risk assessment / hazard analysis have been resolved.

Affected Document Lists available for use:• Affected Documents List -AppendixK

Note:PSM facilities should use the Affected Documents form to aid in determining what process information needs to be updated.

5.7.1 notification and training Completed

The individual assigned the responsibility of providing notification/training (face to face, email notification, etc) and/or confirming that affected personnel have been notified/trained shall sign off on the “training completed” pre-implementation action if this action is required.

Notification/Training should include the following:• The change and its effects on the process,• Updates or changes to the Incident Management

Plan (IMP),• PHA recommendations and/or resolutions,• Changes to regulatory compliance obligations,• Changes to job duties or work tasks, and• Changes to startup, operations and maintenance

procedures.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


286



287

Training should fit the complexity of the change, be documented in the system or manner utilized by the site, and provide assurance of understanding, as needed. Email notification in lieu of formal training for minor, lower risk changes should provide an audit trail of who was notified and when.

5.7.2 Pre-Startup Safety Review (PSSR) oR Pre-Startup Compliance Review (PSCR)

The E&P Integrity Management Standard Implementation Guide refers to assessing the need for a PSSR be completed for every change. Canada requires a PSSR or PSCR be completed for all Technical changes.US based Assets should utilize a PSSR. There is no requirement to complete a PSSR and a PSCR for eachMOC. For OSHA PSM covered properties, a PSSR is legally required if the Process Safety Information will be affected by the change. The individual assigned the responsibility of conducting the PSSR shall sign off on the completed PSSR and the corresponding pre-implementation action once completed.

Example checklists for technical changes include PSSR, PSCR and the Affected Document Listsare available for use:

• Example Minor Pre-Startup Safety Review Checklist (PSSR) - AppendixG

• Example Major Pre-Startup Safety Review Checklist (PSSR) -AppendixH

• Pre-Startup Compliance Review Checklist (PSCR) -AppendixL

Note:The Pre Startup Safety Compliance Review (PSCR) Checklist is for Canada Gas use only.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



288


289

Documentation Requirement:All PSSRs / PSCRs shall be documented and attached to the MOC Form or all items listed within the MOC Forms - Pre Implementation Action Items section prior to closeout!

5.7.3 organization Change Pre-implementation Review Checklist

The organizational change pre-implementation review checklist completion aids in both the business continuity and hazard assessment aspects of managing organizational changes surrounding management and profession staff. Completion of this checklist is required for each individual involved in an organizational change and shall be attached to the MOC once completed.

Refer to the Organization Change Pre-Implementation Checklist - AppendixJ for further assistance.

5.8 MoC authorization to be implemented (Startup)

Prior to employees implementing (starting up) a change in the office or field, the change shall be authorized.The Authorizer shall have the appropriate level of authority, as prescribed in the CAN RPU Delegation of

Authority document, for the MOC involved and is responsible for:

• Confirming conformance to the MOC practice,• Confirming compliance with regulatory agencies,

company and industry standards,• Confirming that assigned pre-implementation

actions were appropriate/completed for the change

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


288



289

and that post-implementation actions are identified and assigned,

• Confirming that the change accomplishes its original intent,

• Authorizing the MOC on the MOC form, and• If applicable, notify the appropriate regulatory agency(s) with “Notice of Startup” for newly or amended permitted units.

Notes:1. All pre-implementation action items shall be completed before the MOC can be AUTHORIZED.2. PSSRs or PSCRs shall be completed for all technical changes and shall be introduced prior to Authorization.3. Persons responsible for post-implementation actions should be identified prior to Authorization.

5.9 Post-implementation action item assignment and Completion

The appropriate post-implementation action items shall be chosen for completion along with a person responsible for completing each assigned action item. Prior to close-out of an MOC all assigned postimplementation action items shall be completed. The number of these actions may vary greatly based on the risk, complexity and magnitude of the change.

Post-implementation action items may include but are not limited to:

• As-built of facility drawings (PFD, P&ID, area classification, etc),

• As-built of operating procedures,• As-built of maintenance procedures and equipment

data files,

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



290


291

• As-built of Incident Management (IMP) or Emergency Response Plan (ERP),

• Updating MAXIMO/Work Management System (WMS) and Master Equipment List,

• Updating Safety & Environmental Critical Equipment Lists, and

• Distribution of documents which have been updated to the designated individuals.

5.10 MoC Closeout

The MOC Coordinator / designated person(s) are responsible for closing out the MOC.

Closure actions upon completion of the project may include but are not limited to:

• Confirming the change was performed as intended,• Confirming that required / relevant MOC specific

documentation has been filed in the designated location, and

• Closing out the MOC in a timely manner. There is a 90-day window after implementation of the change in which an MOC shall be closed out.

Documentation Requirement:All MOC supporting documentation should be attached to the MOC prior to closeout. The minimum requirement for items attached electronically to an eMOC is the associated PSSR/PSCR and the risk assessment / hazard analysis.

6.0 emergency Changes

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


290



291

In Emergency Situations, it is understood that completion of the MOC practice usually cannot be applied until after the change has been implemented. Emergency changes require coordination between local management and facility engineering. Local management shall approve the change based on facility engineering’s hazard analysis. The MOC practice shall be completed after the fact to confirm change(s) has been made and that no additional actions necessary to secure the long-term acceptability of the change are required. The asset has 96 hours to complete a formal MOC though the Authorized Stage.

Some examples of when this type of change is justified include:

• Immediate danger to personnel,• Potential for major equipment damage and or

operational loss,• Serious environmental impact,• Community complaint, or• Regulatory violation

7.0 temporary MoCs

Temporary MOC’s will be of relatively short duration, from a few days to several weeks. The maximum time frame for a temporary change to be in effect is no longer than 90 days from the time the change was authorized. When the approved timeframe has been reached, the MOC will EXPIRE. When the time period expires, the change shall either become permanent or changed back to its original state. For a change to become permanent, the change shall be resubmitted through the MOC system as a permanent MOC. A few MOCs for various reasons will be required to be open for an extended period of time (red contractors, etc…).When a temporary MOC expires, the asset has 96 hours

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



292


293

to extend the expiration date if the temporary change is to remain in effect but will not become permanent change.

To extend the expiration date of a temporary MOC the following actions are required:

• the MOC coordinator will enter the MOC and adjust the temporary MOC expiration date (not exceeding the 90 day limitation),

• the MOC should be re-reviewed and re-approved as the coordinator sees fit, and

• the MOC shall be re-authorized by the appropriate individual identified in the MOC DOA document.

8.0 Cancelled MoCs

MOCs are cancelled for various reasons (lack of funding, determined unsafe to make the change, etc…). The responsibility of cancelling a specific MOC rests with the MOCs Verifier and/or Coordinator. Before the MOC is cancelled in the system, the person canceling the MOC is responsible for confirming that a reason for the cancellation is documented on the MOC form.

Note:All cancelled MOCs are filed and remain available for viewing for the life of the facility.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


292



293

9.0 MoC training

MOC Training will be required for those new and existing employees designated as key MOC personnel by local line management on a 3 year cycle. This training will be in the form of computer based training (CBT) which has been developed and uploaded into the Virtual Training Assistance program (VTA).

10.0 document Retention

MOC Documentation will be maintained for the life of the facility in eMOC until such time the documentation is no longer legally required while meeting the following minimum requirements:

• Technical MOC: retained for 6 years or until incorporated into the next PHA revalidation,

• Administrative MOC: life of process (PSM Only),• Organizational MOC: retained for six (6) years or

until incorporated into next major PHA revalidation,• Drilling Well MOC: retained in WELLS Document

Management System, and• Workover MOC: retained in OC Well file if done

at OC or Wells Management System if done in Houston.

Note:Technical MOC design documentation for equipment, piping, PSV, etc should be retained in the facility files, equipment file, drawings, etc. for the life of the facility.

US operations subject to the OSHA Process Safety Regulations shall retain ALL hazard studies for the life of the facility.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



294


295

11.0 MoC audit Process and Key Performance indicators (KPis)

Periodic assessments are necessary to give assurance that the MOC practice is meeting expectations. RPU assur-ance that expectations are being met is the responsibil-ity of the Engineering Authority and will be achieved through audits associated with S&O, OMS, PSM, DWOP and EMS programs. CAN Engineering Au-thorities will be responsible for coordinating assessments to prevent duplication of effort.

11.1 Quarterly assessments

Quarterly assessments will be conducted by the MOC Specialist and reported within the RPU Integrity

Management Scorecards. Items of interest include:• Number of MOCs currently open (based on type),• Number of MOCs Closed or Cancelled in current

and previous quarters, and• Number and Percentage of MOCs which have

been authorized and remain open more than 90 days. MOCs shall be closed out within this 90 day window or be considered overdue.

• Each location will receive a color code (green, yellow or red) which is determined by the percentage of overdue MOCs. This color code legend is as follows:

Green = <=10% of your MOCs are overdue

Yellow = <=20% of your MOCs are overdue

Red = > 20% of your MOCs are overdue

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


294



295

11.2 annual assessments

Annual assessments will be conducted by CAN Engi-neering Authorities or their delegate and will evaluate each location based on the following criteria:

• Confirm the process is being applied when required,• Confirm correct level of review was obtained

prior to MOC approval - this includes the usage of engineering leads, technical authorities and the engineering authorities when required,

• Confirm delegation of authority (DOA) adherence (utilizing the correct approvers and authorizers),

• Overdue MOCs at years end with trending against same year quarterly assessments and previous year’s annual assessment,

• Confirm pre-implementation action items (pre-startup) have been identified as required, were completed and documented on the MOC form. This includes items such as (pre-startup /compliance safety reviews (PSSR / PSCR), training of employees and contractors on new or updated equipment / procedures, hazard assessments usage and documentation requirements with emphasis on document completion, type of assessment conducted, documentation of team members and inclusion of hazard assessment within the MOC.

Note:Each location will receive a grade of either “needs improvement” or “meets expectations” with an explanation of how this grade was determined.

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e



296


297

12.0 appendices

(Refer to the OMS Navigator for Appendices)The following appendices support the MOC practice and are to be used whenever applicable.

• Appendix A Management of Change (MOC) Flowchart

• Appendix B Technical MOC Decision Tree• Appendix C Organizational MOC Decision Tree• Appendix D Administrative MOC Decision Tree• Appendix E Risk Assessment Hazard Analysis

Decision Tree• Appendix F Delegation of Authority (DOA)• Appendix G Example MINOR Pre-Startup Safety

Review (PSSR)Checklist• Appendix H Example MAJOR Pre-Startup Safety

Review (PSSR)Checklist• Appendix I Example Engineering Project Checklist• Appendix J Organization Change Pre-

Implementation Checklist• Appendix K Affected Documents List• Appendix L Pre Startup Compliance Review

Checklist (PSCR)

13.0 technical References and Relevant links

(Refer to the OMS Navigator for Links)Below are technical relevant links (if known):

• OMS, Operational Management Strategy - Link• BP Integrity Management Group Standard, IM

Standard V2 - Link• Engineering Technical Practices - Link• BP Group Integrity Management Portal - Link• COTS Integrity Management Portal - Link

Man

agem

ent o

f Cha

nge

Pra

ctic

e


296



297

• Process Safety Management Performance Program - Link

• Drilling and Well Operations Policy - Link• NAG Process Safety Management (PSM) Baseline

- Link• NAG SPU Hazard Evaluation Practice - Link• eMOC Application Reference Guide (available on

the main eMOC Page)

Manual liFting and Handling HeaVY oR aWKWaRd loadS

PURPOSE: To establish guidelines for lifting, moving or handling of any item.

APPLICATION:This policy applies to all BP employees, contractors and third parties who have a responsibility for ordering or carrying out manual handling activities.

DEFINITION:The identification of manual handling activities that pose a risk to health and safety and the development of workplace modifications are achieved through implementation of the procedure ‘Identifying and Assessing Manual Handling Risk’.

Manual Lifting and moving forces should not exceed 20 kg or 4.5 kg during seated work. However, this maximum force limit standard may be lowered to account for individual physical characteristics. These weight restrictions only apply to ideal lifting conditions such as smooth lifts, weight held close to the body, unrestricted lifting posture and a good grip.

Man

ual L

iftin

g an

d H

andl

ing

Hea

vy

or A

wkw

ard

Load

s



298


299

PREPARATIONS:All work involving manual lifting or moving must be evaluated before work begins. The evaluation should include identifying any manual lift or carrying tasks that have a potential to injure, perform a risk assessment and identify risk control measures that includes considering job redesign, mechanical lifting equipment and/or training. PPE should also be considered such as gloves, protection from chemicals, etc.For help on identification, risk assessments and risk mitigation, refer to Guidance for Assessors Manual Handling Programme: HSSE Group Resource Occupational Hygiene and Environmental Health Team.

PROCEDURES:SOC’s and/or Critical Task Analysis should have been completed for common and routine manual lifting and moving tasks. Examples of common, routine tasks are: barrel moving, small pump lifting, valve replacements, furniture moving, shipping and receiving goods on pallets. Refer to the site specific procedure, if available.

If it is not a routine task and procedures are not available, perform a HARM before commencing work and follow the guidance provided in Hazard Assessment and Risk Management and Work Authorization Practices. Answer the following questions: • Is the item to be moved greater than 20 kg? • Is it an awkward shape or have rough or sharp

edges? • Does it have to be carried greater than 10

meters? • Does it involve twisting of the body? • Do you have to bend down or reach for it when

picking it up or putting it down?

Man

ual L

iftin

g an

d H

andl

ing

Hea

vy

or A

wkw

ard

Load

s


298



299

If the answer is yes to any of the questions, consider using the proper moving equipment. If circumstances are such that is not possible to use equipment to lift heavy or awkward loads, then an alternative documented plan using a hazard assessment and site specific procedure must be developed to ensure an adequate level of safety to prevent injuries.

PROPER LIFTING TECHNIQUES:All workers should use mechanical means to lift objects heavier than 20 kg. Safe manual lifting requires the following steps: 1. Plan the lift. Get help for difficult loads. 2. Check your path is clear to where the object will rest. 3. Bend your legs half way, as if to sit. 4. Keep your back straight but inclined forward far

enough so that your arms can lift vertically. 5. Keep your feet flat and 30-40 cm apart for a

solid stance. 6. Grasp the object firmly. 7. Take a deep breath. 8. To lift, straighten legs and body, moving arms to

a comfortable position. Do not twist your back while lifting the load.

9. Keep the object close to your body. Know your limits.

note:

• All manual lifts should be planned to eliminate any twisting of the back during the lift.

• When in doubt, use mechanical means to make the lift or move.

Man

ual L

iftin

g an

d H

andl

ing

Hea

vy

or A

wkw

ard

Load

s



300


301

MeteR PRoVing

PURPOSE:To provide guidelines for safe Meter Proving operations.

APPLICATION:All BP Canada Plant and Field locations.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Static Electricity [See: Electricity] • Combustible/Toxic FluidsPREPARATIONS: • Safe work Permits should be issued for all meter

proving • Attention should be paid to lease lay-out to

provide safe and accessible prover connections. • Under most conditions, respiratory protection

will not be required. However, the meter prover operator must wear breathing apparatus when crude or products containing poisonous gases are handled, if tests indicate such protection is needed. A safety standby may be required.[See: Respiratory Protection Equipment], [See: Safety Standby]

• Appropriate personal protective equipment must be worn. [See: Personal Protective Equipment]

• Proving lines and connections must be properly identified according to government regulations, i.e., WHMIS. TDG

PROCEDURES: 1. Each portable meter prover must be equipped

with a minimum of 1 – 30# LTK B.C. dry chemical fire extinguisher. When proving meters, the fire extinguisher should be removed from its

Met

er P

rovi

ng


300



301

holder and placed on the upwind side, and in position for immediate use.

2. A bonding and grounding cable shall be provided for each meter prover. In order to protect against the build-up of static electricity, the bonding and grounding cable shall be properly placed so that the meters and prover are bonded together and grounded. This shall be the first thing hooked up at the beginning of a proving and the last thing disconnected at the end of the proving operation.

3. When using flexible hoses to connect the prover to the meter unit, be sure the hoses are rated to stand the operating pressure. They must be visually inspected prior to use and replaced if their condition indicates a possibility of failure.

4. It is recommended that the vehicle should not be left idling while proving operations are underway. Also the wheels shall be chalked with park brake set.

5. Always open the proper valves to relieve the pressure on dust covers before attempting to remove these covers. Extreme care should be used when breaking connections or purging hoses and piping. [See: Draining and Depressuring]

6. Connections should not be drained on the ground. Catch all drainings in a suitable container for proper disposal.

7. In all cases, when using a prover that employs an electronic counter system, all electrical connections shall be made before the power is turned on. After the meters have been proved, the power shall be turned off before the electrical connections are disconnected.

Met

er P

rovi

ng



302


303

PRECAUTIONS:When meter prover leveling jacks are used, they should be supported with blocks or firm footing, so that the additional weight of the liquid will not unbalance the trailer frame, making it a possible hazard to the operator.

RESPONSIBILITY: 1. The BP Canada employee in charge is

responsible for ensuring that safe meter proving operations are conducted.

2. For BP Canada-owned proving units, the prover operator is responsible for the safe operation of the meter proving unit.

3. The Service contractor is responsible for ensuring that equipment, personnel, and job procedures adhere to all applicable government and BP Canada regulations and practices.

TRAINING:Meter Prover Unit operators must be properly trained in the safe operation of their equipment.

MoBile SteaMeRS

PURPOSE:To provide guidelines for safe use of mobile steaming equipment.

APPLICATION:All BP Field facilities and leases.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Combustible Fluids • Steam Burns • Chemicals Hazards: Any chemicals used with the

water must have the applicable MSDS available

Mob

ile S

team

ers


302



303

on-site and the appropriate labeling requirements must be met, i.e., WHMIS.

• Static Electricity [See: Electrical]PREPARATIONS:Where steaming could generate a hazard to personnel or equipment, an authorized BP Canada Representative must be on-site. He must conduct and document a pre-job safety meeting, and an appropriate Work Authorization must be obtained.[See: Work Authorization Practice]

PROCEDURES: 1. All steaming operations must be risk managed and authorized as per Hazard Assessment / Risk Management and Work Authorization practices respectively. 2. The Steamer should be upwind of any potential

source of combustible gas, where possible. Caution must be exercised with respect to the expansion of metals and trapped fluid.

PRECAUTIONS: 1. All protective equipment required by

government regulations and BP Safety Requirements must be worn during all steaming operations.[See: Personal Protective Equipment]

2. Caution must be exercised to ensure that catalytic heaters, gas, fire and H2S detection heads, instrument recorders, instrumentation panels, and electrical or sensitive equipment are not steamed. This equipment should be protected prior to steaming to prevent damage.

Mob

ile S

team

ers



304


305

MoVing HeaVY eQuiPMent on BP WoRKSiteS

PURPOSE:This safety practice provides guidelines for the safe moving of heavy equipment on BP Canada worksites.APPLICATION:BP Canada Plants, Field Operations, Construction Sites and areas of heavy traffic.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Serious injury or death [See: Personal Protective

Equipment] • Contact with piping or stationary equipment

[See: Ground Disturbance] • Contact overhead power lines [See: Electrical

Equipment] • Lack of co-ordination with other operations [See:

Work Authorization Practice]

DEFINITION: 1. Heavy Equipment includes pump trucks, rig

trucks, pickers, tracked equipment (i.e. Dozers), graders, etc.

2. Heavy traffic areas include highways and secondary roads and construction sites.

PREPARATIONS:All routine job procedures and practices must be followed before the heavy equipment is moved on to BP property.

PROCEDURES: 1. Face to face communication with the person in

charge of the site must occur before the pick up

Mov

ing

Hea

vy E

quip

men

t on

BP

Wor

ksite

s


304



305

or unloading of equipment on the job site. If no one is at the site, the supervisor in charge or designate must be notified.

2. The pre-job meeting and a safe work permit must detail the specific instructions of where the equipment is to be loaded or unloaded on the job site and the potential hazards on the job site i.e. power lines, pipelines, wellhead, etc.

3. The right of way or lease boundary must be well flagged or otherwise defined such that the equipment operator will not enter into a trespass situation.

4. If unloading or picking up equipment in darkness, all lights on the equipment must be operational or there is an alternate light source available.

5. Before operating powered mobile equipment, the equipment operator must complete a visual inspection of the equipment and the surrounding area to ensure that the powered mobile equipment is in safe operating condition and perform inspections periodically in order to ensure the continued safe operation of the equipment.

6. Equipment operators must wear provided seatbelts in equipment when equipment is in motion or engaged in an operation where the equipment may become unstable.

7. If the equipment operator is using a ground guide, the communication hand signals at the end of this section should be used (See: Heavy Equipment Hand Signals at the end of this section.) and the ground guide must be visible at all times.

8. All employees must establish eye contact and have conformation of contact from the equipment operator (i.e. nod, hand wave, call on a radio…) prior to entering the hazard area

9. Every piece of moving equipment shall have only

Mov

ing

Hea

vy E

quip

men

t on

BP

Wor

ksite

s



306


307

ONE individual directing it on the work site. This person will be wearing distinguishable PPE

PRECAUTIONS: 1. Workers on the worksite must wear reflective

striping on the FRC that are visible day and night while working around heavy equipment.

2. Heavy equipment operators should be able to prove their competency operating the equipment.

3. Equipment must maintain 8 meters separation form wellheads and facilities, unless under the direction of a ground guide.

RESPONSIBILITIES:Responsibility lies with the BP supervisor on site to ensure the above procedures are followed.

Heavy equipment Hand Signals

1. Raise Attachment (bowl, blade)

2.Lower Attachment (bowl, blade)

Fingers Curled with Thumb Pointing Up.

Fingers Curled with Thumb Pointing Down.

3. Push 4. Pull

First of One Hand Smacking into the palm of the Other.

Both Fists Clenched Together Initially. Move Fists Apart in a Lateral Motion.

5. Lower the Load 6. Raise the Load

Elbow at 90° Index Finger Pointing Down Making Circular Motion.

Elbow at 90° Index Finger Pointing Up Making Circular Motion.

7. Slow Down 8. Unload

Palms of Hands Turned Down with a slight Up and Down Motion

Quick Motion of the Arm with Fingers Curled and Thumb Extended.

9. Stop 10. Emergency Stop

Raise Hand to Head Heights with the Palm of Hand Towards the Machine.

Hands Spread Sideways.

note: These signals are Intended for All Heavy

Mov

ing

Hea

vy E

quip

men

t on

BP

Wor

ksite

s


306



307

Equipment Other Than Cranes. Standard Riggers’ Signals are to be Used for Cranes. [See : Lifting Operations Practice]

noiSe eXPoSuRe & HeaRing ConSeRVation

PURPOSE: To prevent the occurrence of occupational noise induced hearing loss. All employees whose noise exposures equal or exceed the allowable exposure levels shall be included in the Hearing Conservation Program. Refer to the BP Canada RPU Hearing Conservation Code of Practice for more details.

APPLICATION: • All BP operating facilities and associated personnel • Selected contractors may be included in

audiometric testing and noise exposure monitoring

• All other contractors are expected to comply with provincial regulations regarding Hearing Conservations Programs

POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Noise levels in excess of the allowable 85 dBA

time-weighted average (TWA) for an 8-hour shift or 82 dBA TWA for a 12-hour shift

• Key Performance Indicators • The hearing loss rate target for each work group

is zero confirmed abnormal shifts and 7% confirmed early warning shifts

Noi

se E

xpos

ure

&

Hea

ring

Con

serv

atio

n



308


309

PROCEDURES: 1. Area Sound Surveys: (Format Section) • All facilities will have an initial sound level

survey conducted to establish a baseline. The sound level data shall be plotted on a diagram to generate the noise map of the surveyed area which includes buildings and outdoor areas. This noise map must be reviewed with onsite personnel and be posted at a prominent location and accessible for worker review.

• Areas shall be re-surveyed at a minimum of every five years or shortly after a change in production process, equipment or controls which may increase/decrease the noise levels.

2. Employee Dosimetry Monitoring: • A representative sample of employees, whose

work tasks may be exposed regularly to high noise sources, may be monitored to determine the time-weighted average (TWA) noise exposure of a work shift.

• If the employee’s exposure equal or exceed the 8-hour TWA of 85 dBA or 12-hour TWA of 82 dBA, the employee shall be included in the Hearing Conservation Program.

• Dosimetry monitoring shall be repeated whenever a change in production, process, equipment or controls increases the noise exposures.

3. Identification of High Noise Sources: • Where noise level in any location (buildings,

units, etc.) or outdoor areas that exceeds 82 dBA, must be marked with signs that identify it as a high noise area and requiring the use of appropriate hearing protection.

• All employees or contractors who enter areas where the sound levels are 82 dBA or greater shall wear appropriate hearing protection.

Noi

se E

xpos

ure

&

Hea

ring

Con

serv

atio

n


308



309

Areas where sound levels equal or exceed 100 dBA, appropriate double hearing protection devices (earmuffs over earplugs) are required.

4. Temporary Worksites: • It is the responsibility of the BP Canada

supervisor in charge, or his designate, to ensure adequatehearing protection is worn on all temporary worksites where noise levels exceed 82 dBA, i.e. rig operations.

• Noise Reduction Reviews:A formal, documented Noise Reduction Review must be conducted for all existing areas where noise levels exceed 100 dBA. A formal review must be completed for all new facilities expected to have noise levels exceed 100 dBA in the facility design phase. This review must include representatives from operations, engineering and HSSE. An acoustical engineer must also be included.

5. Hearing Protection Equipment: • Ear plugs and/or ear muffs must be made

available at all worksites. Contact Safety Coordinator or Industrial Hygienist to ensure appropriate hearing protectors are selected, fitted and used.

audiometric testing:

• All new employees must have a baseline audiogram (hearing test) in conjunction with their pre-employment medical or, at the latest, within six months of their hiring date.

• All employees who are included in the Hearing Conservation Program and are exposed to noise levels equal to or exceed 82 dBA TWA for a 12-hour shift or 85 dBA TWA for an 8-hour shift must have an

Noi

se E

xpos

ure

&

Hea

ring

Con

serv

atio

n



310


311

audiometric testing every two years, or as per jurisdiction regulations.

RESPONSIBILITIES: • It is the responsibility of each supervisor

and site Safety Coordinator to ensure that noise controls and hearing conservation are implemented and enforced

• Contractors are required to comply with these noise controls and hearing conservation measures with the exception of the Audiometric testing and noise monitoring. These should be part of their Safety Program

PeRSonal PRoteCtiVe eQuiPMent

PURPOSE:To outline the requirements for the selection, care, and use of personal protective equipment.

APPLICATION:All personnel working on BP Canada worksites.

POTENTIAL HAZARD: • Exposure to physical and chemical hazards

can occur through contact of the skin, eyes, inhalation, and ingestion

• All workers on BP Canada worksites must wear approved personal protective equipment as identified as needed in the hazard assessment that is appropriate to the work being done, and the nature of the hazards involved. [See: MSDS for hazardous material requirements.]

Per

sona

l Pro

tect

ive

Equ

ipm

ent


310



311

PREPARATIONS:OSMs may exempt certain offices, control rooms, vehicles, other non-hazardous areas, field tours, and casual visitors from some provisions of this section. These exemptions must be communicated to all applicable worksites, as required and a deviation from standard completed.

PROCEDURES:Head Protection:

Approved industrial protective headgear must be worn by all personnel on field work sites. During cold weather, hard hat liners and hats designed to be worn without compromising hard hat function or peripheral vision are to be worn. “Hoodies” may not be worn under or over hard hats. For further information see applicable provincial regulations.

NOTE: • Metal hard hats must not be worn • If hair is deemed to be of excessive length and

may constitute a safety hazard, a hair net or other means of confinement for the hair must be used

eye Protection:

• C.S.A.-approved safety glasses with C.S.A approved side shields must be worn by all personnel at BP worksites where required. When the nature of the work might result in an eye or facial injury, additional protection, such as a face shield or goggles, is required. Prescription glasses must meet C.S.A. specifications. Types of eye protectors are shown in the table at the end of this section

• Employees wearing contact lenses must wear all applicable safety eye protection.

Per

sona

l Pro

tect

ive

Equ

ipm

ent



312


313

An employer must ensure that, if wearing contact lenses poses a hazard to the worker’s eyes during work, the worker is advised of the hazards and the alternatives to wearing contact lenses. Permeable contact lenses are recommended over non-permeable

Respiratory Protection:

An employer must determine the degree of danger to a worker at a work site and whether the worker needs to wear respiratory protective equipment if:

(a) a worker is or may be exposed to an airborne contaminant or a mixture of airborne contaminants in a centration exceeding their occupation exposure limits, or

(b) the atmosphere has or may have an oxygen concentration of less than 19.5 percent by volume.[See: BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program]

Hearing Protection:

Whenever noise hazards exist at BP Canada worksites, all personnel entering will be provided with and must wear appropriate hearing protection.

[See: Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation]

Fire Resistant Clothing:

Fire resistant work wear shall be worn on all BP worksites. [See FRW Practice.]

Whenever special clothing is required for handling dangerous chemicals or for fire-fighting, it will be provided by BP Canada and worn only by trained and competent personnel.

Per

sona

l Pro

tect

ive

Equ

ipm

ent


312



313

Hand Protection:

See Hand Protection Practice.

Chemical Protective Clothing:

• Chemical Protective Clothing (CPC) includes chemically resistant gloves, aprons, boots and suits (both partially and fully encapsulating). CPC shall be selected specifically to provide protection for the particular chemical or chemical material in use. Refer to Material Safety Data Sheet for recommended CPC

• In situations where CPC is required, decontamination procedures must be utilized that enhances the removal of the particular chemical

• Procedures should reflect the type of CPC needed • Worksites should determine, in consultation

with the CPC manufacturer, when CPC should be replaced

Foot Protection:

• C.S.A.-Grade 1 (green triangle) approved footwear must be worn by all workers entering field worksites.

• Boot style is recommended minimum 150mm (6”) high, from the bottom of the heel to the top of the boot to provide ankle support.

• An aggressive tread designed for snow/ice or the use of boot grippers are required in winter conditions to reduce the risk of slipping on ice or snow pack. The use of boot grippers is only required for Operations. Drilling and Completions move onto and off of metal surfaces very frequently and are permitted to use sanding.

• Sole puncture protection is required • Safety footwear must be maintained in good

Per

sona

l Pro

tect

ive

Equ

ipm

ent



314


315

safe working condition. (i.e. no holes in upper material or soles, no steel toes exposed)

Personal Floatation device:

• All personnel working from a boat, barge, or in an area where a fall into water could result in drowning must wear a personal floatation device, i.e. life jacket that meets the Canadian General Standards Board Specifications 65.7-M88 or

• 65.11-M88. Additional safety equipment such as safety harnesses and lifelines should be used when working on ice or near cold, fast moving water

RESPONSIBILITY:It is the responsibility of all BP Canada employees to ensure potential exposure hazards are identified, and the appropriate protective equipments are worn by all (i.e. employees, contractors and visitors).

Per

sona

l Pro

tect

ive

Equ

ipm

ent


314



315

Chemical Protective glove Selection Chart

Eye

Inju

ry H

azar

d A

sses

smen

t Too

l

Type

of H

azar

dM

inim

um R

equi

red

Eye

Prot

ectio

n fo

r all

CE&

C e

mpl

oyee

s co

ntra

ctor

s an

d vi

sito

rs to

CE&

C s

ites

(Eye

pr

otec

tion

mus

t be

prop

erly

fitte

d an

d C

SA a

ppro

ved)

1 G

ener

al h

azar

ds

Safe

ty g

lass

es w

ith s

ides

hiel

ds C

SA a

ppro

ved

pres

crip

tion

safe

ty g

lass

es w

ith s

ides

hiel

ds

Type

of H

azar

dTa

skC

ontr

ol M

easu

res

Req

uire

d Ey

e Pr

otec

tion

(Pro

perly

fitte

d an

d C

SA a

ppro

ved)

2 Fl

ying

par

ticle

s,

du

sts

and

obje

cts

Any

act

ivity

whi

ch

gene

rate

s fa

st m

ovin

g or

fa

lling

par

ticle

s, d

usts

and

ob

ject

s i.e

. Chi

ppin

g, d

rillin

g,

Buf

fing,

grin

ding

, pol

ishi

ng.

Ham

mer

ing,

nai

ling

Ove

rhea

d in

sula

tion

or ti

le w

ork

Bar

riers

Ex

haus

t sys

tem

s D

ust c

olle

ctio

n sy

stem

s W

et d

own

area

Impa

ct/d

ust g

oggl

es F

ace

shie

ld m

ay

also

be

requ

ired

3 C

hem

ical

spl

ash

and

harm

ful g

ases

or v

apor

s

Any

act

ivity

whi

ch in

volv

es a

ch

emic

al p

roce

ss o

r han

dlin

g a

chem

ical

i.e.

Ope

ning

line

s or

equ

ipm

ent w

ith re

sidu

al

gas,

vap

or o

r liq

uid,

Spr

ayin

g ch

emic

al o

r pai

nt A

ny a

ctiv

ity

whi

ch p

rodu

ces

inju

rious

opt

i-ca

l rad

iatio

n.

Fum

ehoo

ds, p

aint

spr

ay-

boot

hs, d

egre

asin

g ba

ths

Exha

ust s

yste

ms

Spla

sh

guar

ds, s

pill

tray

s

Che

mic

al s

plas

h go

ggle

s fo

r liq

uids

G

as-ti

ght g

oggl

es fo

r vap

ors\

gase

sFac

e sh

ield

may

als

o be

requ

ired

4 R

adia

tion

Gas

Cut

ting

or W

eldi

ng

Ele

ctric

\lner

t Gas

Shi

eld

Arc

W

eldi

ng S

olde

ring,

bra

zing

Bar

riers

Lim

it ac

cess

to a

rea

Gas

wel

ding

or c

uttin

g re

quire

s ra

diat

ion

gogg

les

All

arc

wel

ding

requ

ires

a w

eldi

ng h

elm

et o

r hoo

d B

razi

ng re

quire

s ra

diat

ion

safe

ty g

lass

es w

ith s

ide

shie

lds

Per

sona

l Pro

tect

ive

Equ

ipm

ent



316


317

Chemical Protective glove Selection ChartT

ask

Che

mic

als

Glo

ve M

ater

ial

Typ

e of

Glo

ve

Bra

nd N

ame

Ack

land

s Ord

er N

umbe

r •

Lube

oil

• G

lyco

l •

Con

dens

ate

• G

asol

ine/

Die

sel F

uel

• M

IDEA

/DEA

•

Frac

Oil/

Inve

r Mud

s

1.

Vilt

on

2.

Nitr

ile

3.

Vito

n/N

eopr

ene

Thin

glo

ve

(4-5

mil)

•

Bes

t N

-Dex

G

love

s(N

itrile

) (B

EM 7

23)

• A

nsel

l E

dmon

t T

ouch

an

d T

uff

(Nitr

ille

pow

der

free

)(A

NL

92-6

00-1

0)

Fine

wor

k re

quir

ing

light

gl

oves

•

Engi

ne o

verh

auls

•

Hea

d ch

ange

s •

Pist

on/li

ner r

epla

cem

ent

• Se

al

chan

ges/

pum

p re

pairs

•

Sam

ple

colle

ctio

n •

Orif

ice

plat

e ch

ange

s

• M

etha

nol

1.

Vilt

on

2.

But

yl

Nat

ural

R

ubbe

r (la

tex)

Thin

Glo

ve

(5 m

ils)

• A

nsel

l E

dmon

t D

urat

ouch

Sh

eer

(late

x) (A

NL

34-5

25)

• Lu

be o

il •

Gly

col

• C

onde

nsat

e •

Gas

olin

e/D

iese

l Fue

l •

MD

EA/D

EA

• Fr

ac O

il/In

vert

Mud

s

1.

Vilt

on

2.

Nitr

ile

3.

Vito

n/N

eopr

ene

Sum

mer

W

inte

r

• B

est

Ans

wer

Nitr

ile l

amin

ated

(B

EM 2

735)

•

Bes

t N

itri-P

ro

Nitr

ile

coat

ed

(BEM

716

6)

• A

nsel

l E

dmon

t H

ycro

n G

ener

al P

urpo

se g

love

s N

itrile

co

ated

(AN

L 24

-805

-10)

•

Ans

ell E

dmon

t H

ycro

n N

itrile

co

ated

jer

sey

linin

g –

Win

ter

(AN

L 52

-590

-10)

Rou

gh o

r ab

rasi

ve w

ork

requ

irin

g he

ave

glov

es

• M

anua

l m

ater

ial

hand

ling

• Pu

lling

or

st

ringi

ng

join

ts

• Li

ne p

iggi

ng

• V

ac tr

ucki

ng

• Fr

ac o

r will

com

plet

ions

• M

etha

nol

1.

Vilt

on

2.

But

yl

Nat

ural

R

ubbe

r (la

tex)

Sum

mer

•

Bes

t N

itty

Gri

tty

natu

ral

rubb

er c

oate

d (B

EM 6

5NFW

)

Per

sona

l Pro

tect

ive

Equ

ipm

ent


316



317

PetS

Pets will not be permitted on BP Canada premises with the exception of service animals (animals that have been trained and certified to assist persons with disabilities) and dogs used for Drug and Alcohol Policy enforce-ment.

Pigging oF PiPelineS and FloWlineS

PURPOSE:To provide safe practices for pigging operations of pipes, pipelines, and flowlines for the removal of wax, other solid deposits, and trapped fluids.

APPLICATION:All BP Canada Field operations are affected.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Combustible/Toxic Fluids • May have Toxic Vapour [See: Benzene, Hydrogen

Sulphide] • May have NORM, depending on product

line [See: Radioactive or Normal Occurring Radioactive Materials (NORM)]

• High Pressure • Static Electricity [See: Grounding and Bonding] • Hydrates [See: Hydrates]

PROCEDURES: 1. Pigging operations must be managed as per

Hazard Assessment and Risk Management, Work Authorization and other applicable safe work practices.

2. Pigging operations in gas and oilfield operations

Pet

s



318


319

represent a serious hazard. 3. In all areas a site-specific procedure must be used

and it must address the following: 4. Characteristics of the fluid to be pigged. 5. Proper isolation and depressurization. 6. Draining and ventilation. 7. The hazard of potential plugging of the bleed-off

valves and gauges. 8. Proper receiving and launching techniques,

stressing potential hydraulic shock. 9. Routine inspection of the cap, barrel and seals. 10. Individual marking or identification of pigs and

logging with respect to launching and receiving times.

11. Purging – [See: Purging]

note: Proper disposal methods must be used for pigging wax and fluids. [See: BP Environmental Guidelines]

PRECAUTION: a. Where the receiver is vented to a proper drain

or flare system, the barrel must be vented to atmosphere prior to opening the receiver or launcher. Ensure vent valve is free and clear by some means.

b. No worker shall position themselves in front of the pig launchers or receiver at any time during the pigging operation. All quick opening closures on pig launchers and receivers must be equipped with a pressure interlocking warning device with a safety catch.[See: ASME Code VIII, Paragraph UG .35]

Pig

ging

of P

ipel

ines

and

Flo

wlin

es


318



319

PoSitiVe aiR SHut-oFF ReQuiReMentS (PaSo)

PURPOSE:To provide guidelines for the requirement of positive air shut-offs on diesel powered equipment.

APPLICATION: • All diesel powered equipment, Contractor or BP

owned, including those used to load or unload flammable liquids or gases at all BP Canada sites.

• All diesel powered equipment includes pick up trucks, and diesel powered heavy machinery used within 25m of a wellhead OR where there are piping, process vessels or tanks containing combustible fluids or gasses that may release hydrocarbons to atmosphere within 25 m of diesel powered equipment. (E.g. they are open or being worked on or with)

POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Uncontrolled engine operation resulting in an

explosion. • Personal injury from exploding engines or

exploding hydrocarbon mixtures. • Equipment damage because of engine overspeed.

DEFINITION:A positive air shut off (PASO) is a device that cuts the air supply to diesel engines resulting in immediate engine shut down.

PROCEDURES: • When loading or unloading flammable liquid

or gas products at all BP facilities using diesel-powered equipment, this equipment must be equipped with a PASO.

Pos

itive

Air

Shu

t-off

Req

uire

men

ts

(PA

SO

)



320


321

• All positive air shut offs must be in good working condition and tested monthly.

• PASO operation may be either automatic or manual.

• Manual PASO’s must have the capability to be operated from normal workstations around the vehicle, e.g. pump control panels.

• Requirements for PASO’s should be included in pre job meetings.

RESPONSIBILITIES: • Responsibility for installation, maintenance and

testing of PASO’s lies with the owner of the equipment with a PASO.

• Accountability for verification is with the BP site supervisor or designate.

PRaCtiCe FoR WoRKing in a CoMBuStiBle gaS enViRonMent


1.1 This practice applies to all BP Canada RPU employees, contracted employees, contractors and other visiting personnel doing work on BP premises and work sites.

1.2 This practice applies to any work area where personnel have the potential to be exposed to combustible gas.

1.3 The purpose of this practice is to: 1.3.1 To establish practices for providing a safe work

environment while working with or around combustible gas.

1.3.2 Provide requirements for the training and qualifications of personnel conducting combustible gas tests, as well as regulatory

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Wor

king

in a

C

ombu

stib

le G

as E

nviro

nmen

t


320



321

requirements for the maintenance and calibration of portable gas test equipment.

2.0 Scope of definitions

2.1 Competent person - one who has completed training, as per manufacturer specifications and site specific procedures.

2.2 Function(Bump)Test - A test conducted by introducing a known concentration of gas (Pentane) to the sensor of the combustible gas detector. The detector must read within +or-20% of known concentration and to ensure that the 10% LEL alarm on the detector is functioning properly.

2.3 LEL - The Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) is the lowest concentration of combustible gas in air at which an explosion could occur. The percentage of LEL represents the amount of combustible gas present between 0 and 100, 100% being the Lower Explosive limit. With Methane approximately 5% in air is equal to 100% of the LEL.

2.4 AtmosphericRelease - For the purpose of this Practice an atmospheric release is defined as 20 % LEL 8 inches (20 cm) from the source.

3.0 Scope of Responsibility

3.1 A proper functioning approved combustible gas detector will be used for every task being performed on a BP work site that has potential exposure to a combustible gas environment.

3.2 The on-site BP representative in charge or designate must ensure that:

• Regular documented surveys (“sweeps”) are conducted annually of all facilities including wells and pipeline risers to detect excessive

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Wor

king

in a

C

ombu

stib

le G

as E

nviro

nmen

t



322


323

LEL levels and meet EUB Directive 60 LDAR requirements.

• Any excessive atmospheric release greater than or equal to 10% is detected, roped off and will be repaired as soon as possible following a proper risk assessment

• For any LEL reading greater than or equal to 20%, the equipment should be shutdown until repaired

• Any LEL reading exceeding 20% LEL is an incident classified as an Atmospheric Release under Canada RPU Nonconformance, Corrective Action and Preventive Action Practice OMS 44-00-01 and followed up with an incident investigation to prevent re-occurence. Otherwise, any gas release exceeding 10% LEL is reported as an HSSE opportunity

• All workers have read and follow a safe building\lease entry procedure. (See Sample Lease entry procedure)

• All workers have received instruction in the use of combustible gas detection equipment and understand the hazards associated with combustible gases. (Appendix 2 Training and Exposure sections of this document)

4.0 Scope of general expectations

4.1 Only personnel who are trained or have received instruction may conduct gas tests.

4.2 The person conducting the gas testing for work authorization must sign or initial the work authorization. (see Work Authorization Practice)

4.3 Only CSA approved combustible gas detection equipment (see appendix 1) shall be used.

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Wor

king

in a

C

ombu

stib

le G

as E

nviro

nmen

t


322



323

4.4 Continous gas tests will be conducted where ever Canada RPU employees, contracted personnel, contractors and other visiting personnel will be entering an area that has the potential for the atmosphere to contain combustible gas.

4.5 The gas detection devices must have a documented Function (Bump) Test at the beginning of each shift. If the detector fails the bump test, the detector must be taken out of service, tagged as defective and sent for calibration. The detector must have a current calibration sticker to be in use. Detectors must be calibrated as per manufacturers specifications.

4.6 Combustible Gas Monitoring must be conducted before any work taking place within 8 meters of any well, process buildings, vessel, tank or related equipment, where combustible gas is, or may be present.

4.7 Portable Combustible Gas Detector alarms must be set at: Low alarm 10% LEL and High Alarm 20% LEL. Fixed combustible gas detectors should alarm at 10% LEL and shutdown at greater than or equal to 20% LEL.

4.8 If while working, the combustible gas detector alarms, personnel must leave the area immediately to determine the appropriate action.

4.9 Before entering a lease where combustible gas may be present, a gas test must be done (see attached lease entry procedures). The test must also be done before and during entry into lease buildings. The detector is to be kept in the work area while personnel are conducting their work to ensure that personnel are not exposed to over 10%

5.0 Scope of occupational exposure limits

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Wor

king

in a

C

ombu

stib

le G

as E

nviro

nmen

t



324


325

lel (lower explosive limit) Hazards

% of Lower Explosive

Limit Guidelines

LEL 0% Area may be entered. Other toxic contaminates such as benzene or H2S may exist in concentrations above the exposure limits

LEL >0 - <10% Entry into these areas is permitted. A risk assessment must be conducted to determine appropriate action.

LEL>10% Evacuation of personnel, no entry into area permitted.

• Combustible gas containing light hydrocarbons may cause symptoms such as dizziness, headaches, and errors in judgment and in some cases loss of consciousness. These symptoms known as a ‘narcotic effect’ may occur at 10 % of the LEL

• Combustible gas concentrations may contain other potentially harmful substances such as hydrogen sulfide H2S and benzene. If the stream concentration is greater than 0.2 –0.4 % H2S the greater health risk is H2S as the exposure limit will be exceeded before the LEL concentrations reaches 10%. If the stream concentration is greater than 0.1% benzene the greater health risk is benzene as the exposure limit will be exceeded before the LEL concentration reaches 10%

• LEL detection equipment must not be used to try to determine H2S or benzene concentrations

6.0 Scope of appendices

APPENDIX 1- Equipment Type and Care APPENDIX 2- Training APPENDIX 3- Lease Entry Procedure

7.0 Scope of References

7.1 Canada RPU Hazard Assessment and Risk Risk Management Practice

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Wor

king

in a

C

ombu

stib

le G

as E

nviro

nmen

t


324



325

7.2 Canada RPU Work Authorization Practice

appendix 1

equipment type and Care

approved equipment

Gas detection equipment must include a LEL detector and oxygen sensor and should include a carbon monoxide and hydrogen sulfide sensor.All gas detection equipment must be CSA approved.

equipment testing and Care

Each area must ensure that an inspection and testing program is implemented whereby all combustible gas detection equipment is inspected by a qualified technician on a frequency consistent with manufacturers requirements and with prevailing regulation requirements (minimum every three (3) months. A tag must be attached to the gas detectors showing the latest inspection/due date. Records of all calibrations must be maintained.Gas detection devices must be “Bump Tested” before each daily use and documented in a bump test log, and after 12 hours of continuous use. A test would also be required if the detector comes in contact with water is over ranged or suffers trauma ie: dropping the detector.

Precautions:

The bump test must be conducted by introducing a known concentration of gas (Pentane) to the sensor of the combustible gas detector. The detector must read within +or-20% of known concentration and to ensure that the 10% LEL alarm on the detector is functioning properly

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Wor

king

in a

C

ombu

stib

le G

as E

nviro

nmen

t



326


327

All gas detection equipment requires a minimum oxygen content in order to perform according to manufacturers specifications. The oxygen reading must be taken prior to an LEL reading to verify that the monitor can read properly

appendix 2

training

All employees and contractors must be knowledgeable on the hazards of combustible gas and the use of detection equipment being used.Each area in the Canada RPU is responsible to ensure that all BP and Full Time Equivalence workers have a satisfactory course available to teach the proper methods in the use of combustible gas detection equipment including: • Operation • Calibration • Storage • Limitations • Alarm settings • Site specific proceduresPersonnel training records will be maintained on site. Training is to be conducted every (3) years and is expected to include passing a documented test to ensure personnel are qualified.

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Wor

king

in a

C

ombu

stib

le G

as E

nviro

nmen

t


326



327

appendix 3

Lease Entry Procedure

Step

H

azar

d C

ontr

ol

1. V

erify

per

sona

l mon

itorin

g eq

uipm

ent i

s op

erat

iona

l onc

e pe

r sh

ift.

H2S

or h

ydro

carb

on e

xpos

ure.

-

Bum

p te

st p

erso

nal

mon

itorin

g eq

uipm

ent

prio

r to

the

begi

nnin

g of

the

shift

. - C

alib

rate

mul

ti-he

ad g

as m

onito

r as

per

man

ufac

ture

’s in

stru

ctio

ns

2. S

top

at le

ase

entry

and

con

duct

a

visu

al in

spec

tion

of a

rea

Hig

h H

2S o

r LEL

co

ncen

tratio

ns, o

xyge

n de

ficie

ncy,

exp

losi

ons,

fire

or

spills

Bef

ore

ente

ring

leas

e:

1.

Vis

ual i

nspe

ctio

n 2.

C

heck

win

d di

rect

ion

3. C

heck

for

H2S

and

LE

L al

arm

and

fla

shin

g be

acon

3.

Reg

iste

r per

sonn

el e

nter

ing

the

site

thou

gh th

e us

e of

an

auto

mat

ed

syst

em (V

MS

) or b

y no

tifyi

ng th

e co

ntro

l roo

m.

H2S

or h

ydro

carb

on e

xpos

ure

- E

nsur

e th

at s

yste

m a

ccep

ts t

he i

nput

or

that

con

trol

room

sta

ff re

cord

s th

e tim

e of

en

try in

the

log.

S

TOP

-TH

INK

-GO

4. I

f sa

fe f

or v

ehic

le e

ntry

, pr

ocee

d to

the

MC

C /

RTU

(Sca

da) b

uild

ing.

(IF

NO

RTU

OR

MC

C IS

PR

ESEN

T G

O T

O S

TEP

6.)

Hig

h H

2S o

r LEL

co

ncen

tratio

ns, f

ire, e

xplo

sion

s or

spi

lls

Bef

ore

ente

ring

leas

e:

1.

Vis

ual i

nspe

ctio

n 2.

C

heck

win

d di

rect

ion

3.

Che

ck f

or H

2S a

larm

an

d fla

shin

g be

acon

LEA

SE E

NTR

Y PR

OCE

DU

RE

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Wor

king

in a

C

ombu

stib

le G

as E

nviro

nmen

t



328


329


Step

H

azar

d C

ontr

ol

5. U

se m

ulti-

head

gas

det

ecto

r to

ch

eck

for

high

LE

L or

H

2S

gas

leve

ls i

n th

e vi

cini

ty o

f M

CC

/RTU

. E

valu

ate

risk

of o

ther

atm

osph

eric

ha

zard

s su

ch

as

benz

ene,

su

lfur

diox

ide

or c

arbo

n m

onox

ide.

H2S

or

LEL

expo

sure

, ox

ygen

de

ficie

ncy,

exp

losi

ons

or fi

re.

H2S

> 1

0 pp

m

LEL

> 10

%

19.5

% >

O2

> 23

%

SO

2 >

2 p

pm

CO

> 2

5 pp

m

Ben

zene

> 1

ppm

- Per

sona

l mon

itor

- Mul

ti-he

ad G

as M

onito

r - C

ontin

uous

Gas

Mon

itor (

if a

pplic

able

) - B

enze

ne, S

O2,

CO

mon

itorin

g eq

uipm

ent

(if a

pplic

able

)

6. If

H2S

or L

EL g

as li

mits

are

with

in

Pra

ctic

es,

vehi

cles

m

ay

now

pr

ocee

d on

to

the

leas

e an

d pa

rk

appr

opria

tely

.

H2S

or L

EL

expo

sure

, oxy

gen

defic

ienc

y, e

xplo

sion

s or

fire

- P

erso

nal m

onito

r - M

ulti-

head

Gas

Mon

itor

- Con

tinuo

us G

as M

onito

r (if

appl

icab

le)

- p

ark

vehi

cle

faci

ng th

e le

ase

exit

for

ease

of

egr

ess

- the

veh

icle

can

be

driv

en d

irect

ly o

ff th

e si

te- c

ompl

y w

ith th

e “8

met

er ru

le” f

rom

pro

cess

eq

uipm

ent a

nd p

ipin

g - C

heck

win

d di

rect

ion

and

park

upw

ind

- C

heck

bea

cons

or a

larm

s

LEA

SE E

NTR

Y PR

OCE

DU

RE

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Wor

king

in a

C

ombu

stib

le G

as E

nviro

nmen

t


328



329


Step

H

azar

d C

ontr

ol

7.

Whe

n ex

iting

ve

hicl

e,

stat

ic

elec

trici

ty s

houl

d be

con

side

red

and

pers

on s

houl

d gr

ound

them

selv

es to

m

etal

ob

ject

be

fore

op

enin

g bu

ildin

gs.

Hig

h le

vels

of

H

2S

or

LEL'

s re

sulti

ng in

exp

losi

on

- G

roun

d ba

re h

and

to m

etal

sur

face

to

disc

harg

e st

atic

ele

ctric

ity.

8. O

pen

build

ing

door

whi

le u

sing

m

ulti-

head

mon

itor.

Oxy

gen

defic

ienc

y, L

EL o

r H2S

, ex

posu

re e

xplo

sion

s or

fire

-

App

roac

h bu

ildin

g us

ing

caut

ion

& t

ake

hesi

tatio

n st

ep a

fter o

peni

ng d

oors

-

chec

k en

tranc

e ar

ea

usin

g M

ulti-

head

he

ad m

onito

r to

ensu

re re

quire

d O

2, H

2S &

LE

L lim

its

- Per

sona

l mon

itor

- Con

tinuo

us G

as M

onito

r (if

app

licab

le)

9. If

H2S

or L

EL li

mits

are

exc

eede

d -

D

O N

OT

EN

TER

. H

2S o

r LE

L ex

posu

re,

oxyg

en

defic

ienc

y, e

xplo

sion

s or

fire

- P

erso

nal m

onito

r - M

ulti-

head

Gas

Mon

itor

- Con

tinuo

us G

as M

onito

r (if

app

licab

le)

- ope

n do

ors

and

vent

s us

ing

caut

ion

10.

If le

vels

do

not

clea

r co

ntac

t ba

ck

up

pers

onne

l an

d no

tify

supe

rvis

or.

H2S

or

LEL

expo

sure

, ox

ygen

de

ficie

ncy,

exp

losi

ons

or fi

re

- Per

sona

l mon

itor

- Mul

ti-he

ad G

as M

onito

r - C

ontin

uous

Gas

Mon

itor (

if a

pplic

able

) 11

. O

nce

back

up

has

arriv

ed

on

loca

tion,

ga

s le

ak

can

be

inve

stig

ated

and

/or r

epai

red

H2S

or

LEL

expo

sure

, ox

ygen

de

ficie

ncy,

exp

losi

ons

or fi

re

- bre

athi

ng a

ir eq

uipm

ent

donn

ed

- Per

sona

l mon

itor

- Mul

ti-he

ad G

as M

onito

r - C

ontin

uous

Gas

Mon

itor (

if a

pplic

able

)

LEA

SE E

NTR

Y PR

OCE

DU

RE

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Wor

king

in a

C

ombu

stib

le G

as E

nviro

nmen

t



330


331


Step

H

azar

d C

ontr

ol

12. I

f gas

leve

ls c

an n

ot m

eet

Pra

ctic

e re

quire

men

ts a

fter

inve

stig

atio

n an

d/or

repa

ir,

equi

pmen

t sho

uld

be s

hut-i

n.

H2S

or L

EL

expo

sure

, oxy

gen

defic

ienc

y, e

xplo

sion

s or

fire

- P

erso

nal m

onito

r - M

ulti-

head

Gas

Mon

itor

- Con

tinuo

us G

as M

onito

r (if

app

licab

le)

- shu

t in

usin

g si

te s

peci

fic s

hut d

own

proc

edur

es.

13. I

f no

gas

leve

l pre

sent

pro

ceed

in

to b

uild

ing

usin

g ca

utio

n, w

hile

m

onito

ring

gas

leve

ls w

ith m

ulti-

head

gas

mon

itor.

Pro

ceed

thro

ugh

the

entir

e bu

ildin

g sw

eepi

ng fo

r gas

be

fore

com

men

cing

wor

k.

H2S

or L

EL

expo

sure

, oxy

gen

defic

ienc

y, e

xplo

sion

s or

fire

- P

erso

nal m

onito

r - M

ulti-

head

Gas

Mon

itor

- Con

tinuo

us G

as M

onito

r (if

app

licab

le)

14. W

hen

leav

ing

leas

e no

tify

BP

pe

rson

al a

nd lo

g ou

t of a

utom

ated

or

off v

ms

syst

em. R

egis

ter p

erso

nnel

ex

iting

the

site

thou

gh th

e us

e of

an

auto

mat

ed s

yste

m (V

MS

) or b

y no

tifyi

ng th

e co

ntro

l roo

m.

H2S

or L

EL

expo

sure

, oxy

gen

defic

ienc

y, e

xplo

sion

s or

fire

- e

nsur

e V

MS

or m

anua

l log

in s

yste

m c

lear

s pe

rson

nel f

or s

ite

LEA

SE E

NTR

Y PR

OCE

DU

RE

Pra

ctic

e fo

r Wor

king

in a

C

ombu

stib

le G

as E

nviro

nmen

t


330



331

PReSSuRe SaFetY ValVeS

PURPOSE: To provide instructions for adequately protecting all pressure systems.

APPLICATION:All pressure systems.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • System Overpressure. • Toxic/Combustible fluids. • Pressure on flare system (where applicable). • Explosion: Air in flare system and/or piping.

PREPARATIONS: • Site-specific procedures are required for

removal and installation of all PSV’s. The procedures must be discussed and documented prior to carrying out the work, and before the applicable work permit is issued. [See: Work Authorization and BP PSV handling and servicing procedure (Part of owner inspection program)]

• All block valves on the upstream and/or downstream side of a PSV must be sealed or padlocked in the open position.

• All pressure safety valves (PSV’s) must be maintained in operable condition, in accordance with Provincial Regulations.

• All PSV’s will be checked as per provincial regulations.

PROCEDURES:Pressure safety valve repair shops require certification approval from applicable government agency per CSA

Pre

ssur

e S

afet

y Va

lves



332


333

B51.All PSV’s are to remain in service while the equipment that they are protecting is in service, except for repair as noted in ASME Code.

PRECAUTIONS: Taking a PSV out of Service for Repair on equipment in operation: 1. No PSV may be taken out of service at any time

without approval from the Supervisor responsible for that facility.

2. No PSV may be taken out of service unless adequate protection is maintained by adjacent equipment, or by being continuously manned by a designated Operator to control the working pressure of the equipment as per ASME Section VIII Div.1 Appendix M.

3. All PSV’s removed from service must be immediately logged and documented on the PSV handling and servicing procedure tracking sheet.

4. Repairs to the PSV must be made as quickly as possible with an emergency priority designation.

5. The PSV must be replaced immediately after the repair is complete.

6. When transporting a PSV for service or returning it to the facility the PSV must be transported in the vertical position. [See: Working on Energy Systems Practice ]

7. Returning a Pressure Safety Valve to Service 8. After Repair on Operating Equipment: 9. All block valves must be opened, sealed or

padlocked. 10. The Supervisor in charge, or his designate, must

witness the installation of the seals or padlocks on the block valves connected to the pressure safety valve.

11. It is then to be logged that the PSV is in service.

RESPONSIBILITY:

Pre

ssur

e S

afet

y Va

lves


332



333

The BP Canada Representative in charge of the job is responsible for ensuring that safe work procedures are developed and followed.REFERENCE: • BP Quality management system for Boilers

and Pressure Vessels and process piping. • ASME Code Section VIII, latest edition. • CSA B51 Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Pressure

Piping Code. • BP PSV Handling and servicing Procedure.

PReSSuRe and leaK teSting

PURPOSE: To establish pressure and leak testing safe work practices for vessels, piping, and pipelines.

APPLICATION:New installations, repairs and replacements of vessels, piping, and pipelines.

DEFINITION: There are two types of pressure tests of which hydrostatic is the preferred method. Pneumatic testing is only permitted under special conditions, Engineering Authority (EA) and Regulatory Approval (where applicable) are required.

PREPARATIONS: [See: Purging]

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:[See Purging] • Overpressure – operating above the system

MAWP. • Leaks – Test medium leaking during test,

environmental, stored energy and combustible

Pre

ssur

e an

d Le

ak T

estin

g



334


335

issues. • Explosion – Through overpressure or ignition of

flammable gas.Methods:

Hydrostatic:

This is the preferred method because energy release causes minimal concern: • Water/glycol – preferred hydrostatic test medium

(minimum danger). • Hydrocarbon based fluid – the potential for

explosion, fire, toxicity, environment damage must be assessed and documented.

Pneumatic:

When leaks or ruptures occur energy release can be extremely dangerous and prolonged: • Inert gas – preferred pneumatic test medium • Air/Flammable Gas – mixing these two test

mediums can result in explosion and fire. • Pneumatic testing is not recommendedleak Check:

Combustible Gas can be used for Leak Check test on piping, equipment or vessels only after the system has been properly purged.

PROCEDURES: 1. All mechanical/integrity work on the system

should be complete before the system pressure test commences.

2. When pressure testing, a low pressure test must be performed before the high pressure test to prevent failure of a component at high pressure and the resultant danger of this situation. The pressure set points for these tests should be stated in the procedure along with the systems MAWP.

3. Site-specific procedures should be developed for all hydrostatic pressure tests.

Pre

ssur

e an

d Le

ak T

estin

g


334



335

4. An approved site-specific procedure must be developed for all pneumatic pressure tests.

SIGNS:Warning signs must be positioned prohibiting the presence of workers in the immediate area of the vessel or lines while pressure testing.Consideration of the following sections may be required: • WHMIS • Purging • Blinding and Blanking (Energy Isolation) • Draining and Depressuring • Pre-job Safety Meeting • Work Authorization

PRECAUTIONS: 1. All non essential personnel should be removed

from the area being tested. 2. Pressures intended for hydrostatic test must not

be used for pneumatic tests. When changing from hydrostatic to pneumatic testing, the test pressure must be recalculated.

3. Disposal of test mediums should be in accordance with environmental guidelines.

RESPONSIBILITIES:Area Authorities are responsible for ensuring that safe pressure testing practices are followed.

note: For pressure test design, [See: Applicable Government Regulations:]

• ASME Pressure Vessel Code • Provincial Boilers Branch or equivalent • ERCB or equivalent

Pre

ssur

e an

d Le

ak T

estin

g



336


337

PuRging

PURPOSE:To provide guidelines for safely removing combustible, chemical, toxic or other hazardous materials from vessels and piping systems.

APPLICATION:Any vessels or piping systems being prepared for inspection, construction, repair, or returning to service.

DEFINITION:Purging is the removal of any undesirable medium from vessels or piping systems.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Leaks from uncontrolled points. • Toxic vapor /Inert gas oxygen deficiency:

simple/chemical asphyxiation • Combustible material: explosion the system

contents could be in the zone between the LEL and UEL

Static electricity:

• Displaced fluids • Explosion due to combustible material being

vented to atmosphere • Operating the system outside its design

conditions (Pressure/Temperature/Combustible gas in inert systems)

PREPARATIONS: a. All mechanical/integrity work should be

complete before the purging operation commences.

b. Steam, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, or water or combustible gas may be used as a purging medium. If using combustible purge medium,

Pur

ging


336



337

the explosive risk associated with the transition zone of incomplete purge must be recognized, and all potential ignition sources must be eliminated. If combustible gases are used for the purge medium the Engineering Authority (EA) must approve the procedure.

c. The worker must know where the displaced fluids (i.e., combustible, toxic) are going, and the condition area is suitable to receive the fluids.

d. A site-specific procedure must be developed for each purging operation.

Safety equipment:

a. The necessary safety equipment must be on hand (e.g. breathing apparatus, fire extinguishers, etc.)

b. Purge warning signs should be posted as required.

isolating:

a. Vessels or piping must be isolated before purging.[See: Working on Energy Systems Practice]

b. Associated instrumentation must also be isolated. c. Flare pilots/igniters might have to be isolated.

PROCEDURES: a. Purge gas should be introduced into the system

very slowly. Inert gas should be used where possible. Velocities should be kept very low to sweep the undesirable medium out of the system with as little mixing as possible, and should be done at atmospheric pressure. Low point drains should be checked periodically for water removal. When purging for start-up, air must be completely displaced from the system to a level that the system is no longer operating in the flammable/explosive zone, before attempting to pressure up the system.

b. If the hydrocarbon is heavier than the purge medium, purging should be from top to bottom. If it is lighter, from bottom to top.

Pur

ging



338


339

PRECAUTIONS: a. All non-essential personnel should be removed

from the purge area. b. Some combustible gas detectors require oxygen

for analysis of the sample, and therefore will not give a true indication when a vessel or piping is checked for the removal of hydrocarbons, if the detector is inserted in an oxygen-deficient atmosphere.

c. Creating or pulling a vacuum on piping or vessel (i.e., introducing air), when using steam.

d. Make sure there are no dead legs in the vessel or piping to be purged.

e. Tests must always be made to determine if purging has eliminated the undesirable medium from the vessel or piping system. SCBA/SABA must be worn when performing atmospheric monitoring prior and during Confined Space Entry.[See: Confined Space Entry], [See: Atmospheric Monitoring]

f. Vessels or equipment may still contain toxic and/or combustible sludge or scales after purging. Consideration should be given to the removal of this material to maintain and ensure a safe atmosphere.

g. Purge medium temperatures must be considered for affect on the system to be purged.

Pur

ging


338



339

RadioaCtiVe oR natuRallY oCCuRRing RadioaCtiVe MateRialS (noRM)

PURPOSE:To establish the requirements for the safe handling of Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials (NORM).Contact your RPU Industrial Hygienist.

APPLICATION:All worksites where NORM contamination may occur.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:Exposure to NORM.

PREPARATIONS: a. An ENFORM trained and qualified NORM

Control Coordinator must be assigned for all worksites where there is or likely to be NORM contamination.

b. All personnel performing work that involves NORM contaminated equipment must be trained in personal protection and safe handling. Refer to the Code of Practice and contact your Industrial Hygienist for advice on training, specific monitoring and PPE.

Survey:

All sites that may have NORM contamination must have completed a NORM survey of the applicable equipment performed before work planning commences to ensure all hazards are identified. Work Planning: • Work Planning for NORM contaminated

equipment must include provisions to ensure the personnel are trained

Rad

ioac

tive

or N

atur

ally

Occ

urrin

g R

adio

activ

e M

ater

ials

(Nor

m)



340


341

• the necessary equipment and PPE is available • the need for personnel decontamination facilities • possible facilities for equipment decontamination • ventilation • filtering exhausted air or waste water and • waste storage, recordkeeping, analysis and

disposal of NORM materials and/or NORM contaminated equipment and PPE

Pre-Job Safety Meeting:

• Must be conducted prior to commencement of operation. The NORM Control Coordinator must attend all pre-job safety meetings. [See: Safety Meetings], [See: TDG-Packaging and Safe Transport of Radioactive Material, [See: Canadian Guidelines for the Management of NORM; Guidelines for the Handling of NORM in Western Canada]

• Contact the NORM Control Coordinator, Safety Coordinator or Industrial Hygienist for advice before any work proceeds.

PROCEDURES:Safe handling procedures should include:

• Specific job procedures to be followed • The expected effluent concentrations and

methods of control if applicable • The person in charge, responsible for the

operation • Storage, testing and disposal of NORM wastes • Equipment and worksite must be properly

prepared (i.e. isolated, depressured, made accessible, etc.) The worksite should be roped off. Radiation warning signs must be posted, and unauthorized entry of personnel banned, in the area affected by the work

Rad

ioac

tive

or N

atur

ally

Occ

urrin

g R

adio

activ

e M

ater

ials

(Nor

m)


340



341

• All women who are pregnant or are considering pregnancy must declare this to the Occupational Health Centre prior to work commencing so that an exposure risk assessment can be completed. The risk assessment may include restricted work with NORM contaminated materials.

PRECAUTION: • Highly energetic NORM may affect some

LEL monitors and fire detection systems. Station shutdown could result when using a highly energetic radioactive source in the vicinity of a detector. A risk assessment must be performed to determine the scope and risk from NORM and radioactive sources. Fire detection systems sensitive to radiation may have to be by-passed when radioactive sources are in use in the immediate area. Care must be taken to reactivate the detection system when the work is completed.[See: Equipment Shutdown Systems]

• NORM survey meters are not explosion proof, thus a Work Authorization may be required where applicable. [See: Hot Work Practice].

RESPONSIBILITIES: • The BP Canada Representative is responsible

for ensuring that all procedures are supplied and followed.

• The BP NORM Control Coordinator is responsible for ensuring that all NORM control procedures meet regulations, the BP Codes of Practice and that all procedures are followed.

• The Contractor performing work on NORM contaminated equipment and waste is responsible for ensuring that safe

Rad

ioac

tive

or N

atur

ally

Occ

urrin

g R

adio

activ

e M

ater

ials

(Nor

m)



342


343

handling procedures and contingency plans have been developed which comply with all government regulations. He/She is also responsible for ensuring that all applicable protective equipment, instruments, rescue and decontamination facilities are on hand and in operable condition before the job commences.

Rail CaR loading

PURPOSE:To provide procedures for the safe loading of tank cars.

APPLICATION:Tank car loading at plant and field locations.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Static Electricity • Combustible Fluids • Tank Car Movement

PREPARATIONS: a. Loading racks and loading rack trackage must be

securely and adequately grounded and bonded. All ground and bond connections should be frequently inspected.[See: Electrical]

b. Before loading tank cars, the loader shall check the derail, ensure that it is in a closed and locked position, and erect the required warning signs.

PROCEDURES: a. Tank car loading encompasses similar concerns

and problems as transferring fluids by truck. However, a site-specific procedure is required, and the following general guidelines apply. [See: Tank Truck Loading/Unloading]

Rai

l Car

Loa

ding


342



343

b. Car wheels must be chocked to prevent the car from accidentally rolling.

c. The loader must attach the ground cable to each car before connecting the loading hoses.

d. Tank cars must be inspected prior to loading.Tank cars found in bad order must be reported to the supervisor immediately, and must not be loaded until repairs have been made.

e. The loader must label loaded cars with the proper placards designated for this purpose and required by regulations. Proper documentation is also required.[See: TDG]

f. Leaking valves or loading hoses must be repaired or replaced immediately.

g. The loading rack must never be left unattended while loading or offloading a tank car.

h. When using a top loading spout, the spout must be chained to the tank car during loading.

i. Tank cars must be filled to the proper level as instructed, and the loader should stand by to shut off the loading valves when this level is approached.

j. When loading is complete, the block valve on loading hose and tank car must be closed, and liquid petroleum gas vented to the vent stack before loading hoses are disconnected.

k. The loading hoses must be hooked back to the loading rack when loading has been completed.

PRECAUTIONS: a. No part of the body shall be positioned over the

slip tube gauge. b. Walkways and platforms must be inspected

frequently and kept in good condition. c. Workmen must refrain from jumping from the

loading rack to the tank car or from car to car. d. Company employees must stay away from tank

cars when the train crew is coupling, switching,

Rai

l Car

Loa

ding



344


345

and spotting cars. e. All loaders must be familiar with the location of

fire-fighting equipment and must be trained in its use.

f. Extension cords with lights attached must not be used at the loading rack. Only approved flashlights for hazardous locations are permitted.

RESPONSIBILITIES: • It is the responsibility of the BP Canada

employee in-charge of the operation; to ensure that safe loading procedures are followed.

• The train crew is responsible for ensuring that safe tank car coupling, switching and spotting procedures meet applicable government regulations.

ReSPiRatoRY PRoteCtion

PURPOSE:To provide safe work practices for workers in areas where there is a respiratory hazard.

APPLICATION:All personnel who are required to or may use respiratory protection to mitigate inhalation risks. This also applies to visitors to field locations who may use respiratory protection. POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Toxic atmospheres • Oxygen deficient atmosphere

DEFINITION:*IDLH – Immediately dangerous to life or health. Any atmosphere where the concentration of oxygen,

Res

pira

tory

Pro

tect

ion


344



345

flammable or toxic air contaminants would cause a person without respiratory protection to be fatally injured, or cause irreversible and incapacitating effects to that person’s health.

PROCEDURES: [See: BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program]

equipment for idlH* environment:

Self-contained or supplied-air breathing apparatus (SCBA/SABA) must be worn where danger exists from reduced oxygen content of the air (less than 19.5% oxygen), or toxic contaminants exceed the allowable exposure limits, The limitation and use of SCBA/SABA are outlined in the BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program and the Canadian Standards Association CSA Z94.4-02 (Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators), and CSA Z180.1-00 (Compressed Breathing Air and Systems).

equipment for non-idlH environment:

Air-purifying respirators filter and remove specific contaminants from the air. These respirators are never to be used in oxygen-deficient IDLH atmospheres.

There are two main types of air-purifying respirators:

1. Particulates filters (P100 or HEPA – High Efficiency Particulate Air filters)

2. Chemical cartridgeThese respirators are limited to the uses outlined in the BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program and the Canadian Standards Association CSA Z94.4-02 (Selection, Use, and Care of Respirators), and CSA Z180.1-00 (Compressed Breathing Air and Systems). The BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program also includes a selection chart for the type of respiratory equipment required for specific hazards.Fitness to Wear Respirators:

Res

pira

tory

Pro

tect

ion



346


347

All personnel required to wear respirators must be evaluated by a Health Professional to ensure pre-existing health conditions are not affected by respirator use. BP Occupational Health Centre will perform the assessment on BP employees and full time contactors.Contract companies must provide documentation that demonstrates contract employees are fit to wear respirators.

Fit testing:

All BP Canada employees, contracted employees, contractors, and visitors doing work on BP premises or operating sites who are required to wear appropriate respiratory protective equipment must have quantitative or qualitative fit testing records available for review. A quantitative or qualitative fit test shall be performed on new employees and long-term contractors within the first three months of commencing work. Repeat testing is recommended annually thereafter, or not to exceed 2 years.

Individuals who are required to wear respiratory equipment must be clean-shaven where the face piece of the respirator seals with the skin of the face. Conditions such as unusual face contours, scars, skin eruptions, eyeglasses, facial surgery, injury or missing dentures might interfere with the seal. For this reason, the seal must be positive and negative tested and a satisfactory fit obtained prior to each use. Most manufacturers provide instructions for fit testing; if these are unavailable, refer to BP’s Respiratory Protection Program or contact your Safety Advisor or Industrial Hygienist for guidance on how these tests should be performed and documented.

Res

pira

tory

Pro

tect

ion


346



347

Maintenance, Cleaning, and Storage of Respiratory Protection equipment:

Immediately after use, the equipment must be cleaned, the face piece sanitized, and the equipment stored in the proper location. The maintenance, cleaning, and storage of respiratory protection must be consistent with the BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program. The user of the equipment should perform this task.

inspection:

A competent worker must inspect respiratory protective equipment that is not used routinely, but is kept ready for emergency use, at least monthly. The inspection must ensure that the equipment is in satisfactory working condition, clean, and in its proper location. Written documentation of this inspection must be retained at the worksite and must include the name of the inspector and the date the inspection was performed. The supervisor in charge of the work location must designate a trained worker to complete the monthly inspection. The inspection must follow those established in the BP Canada Respiratory Protection Program.Contractors using their own respiratory equipment on BP sites must have documentation available regarding the testing, inspection and maintenance of respirators.

PRECAUTIONS:• Compressed breathing air must meet quality

specifications for breathing air specified by CSA Standard Z180.1-00.

• Air from respiratory air compressors must be tested annually by a qualified person to ensure analysis includes particulate and oil mists. This analysis must be performed on site. Taking an air sample in a bomb and the sending the sample to a laboratory for analysis is prohibited.

Res

pira

tory

Pro

tect

ion



348


349

TRAINING: All workers entering a BP Canada field worksite where a respiratory hazard may exist must be: 1 Educated on the hazards present. 2 Educated on the reason a particular piece of

respiratory equipment was chosen, and its capabilities and limitations.

3 Trained in the proper use, care, maintenance, and fitting of the respirators they will be using.

The frequency of training will be determined by the particular job requirement. Repeat training is recommended annually, or not to exceed 3 years (see BP Respiratory Protection Guidelines). Documentation of training frequency, type, and session attendance must be retained on file at each area office.

For each confined-space entry, training in the use of self-contained, supplied-air respiratory protective equipment will be a requirement of each site-specific pre-entry safety meeting.

task Hazard assessment:

All tasks requiring respiratory equipment must be identified and assessed to ensure all hazards have been identified and mitigated. The mitigation measures should be documented in procedures/HARMs/Work Authorizations.

RESPONSIBILITY: The Supervisor in charge of the work location must ensure that:

• Employees and full time Contractors have been deemed fit to wear respirators by the Occupational Health Centre;

• Contractors have performed fit testing and fitness to wear respirators medical assessment has taken place;

Res

pira

tory

Pro

tect

ion


348



349

• All tasks which have respiratory hazards are identified, evaluated, documented and included in procedures / HARMs/ Work Authorizations. ;

• personnel are trained in the use, maintenance and inspection of the respiratory equipment,

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: 1. Industrial Hygiene Manual 2. Respiratory Protection Program 3. Site specific code of practice

HSSe MeetingS

PURPOSE:To describe the composition and scope of the Joint Work Site Safety, Health and Environment Committee meetings and identify the requirements of the pre-job meetings to be attended by both contractor and BP Canada personnel before any potentially hazardous activity is started.

PROCEDURES:Joint Worksite Health, Safety, Security and environment Committee:

1. A Joint Worksite Safety, Health and Environment Committee is a group of worker employee representatives working together to identify and solve safety, occupational health, and environmental problems at the worksite. The Operating Centre Manager is responsible for the formation of the committee at each worksite. The committees will hold regular meetings.

2. The committee shall consist of an adequate number of members to provide representation for all workers, and shall include at least one supervisor or equal numbers of workers and

HS

SE

Mee

tings



350


351

supervisors. The term of a committee member will usually be a minimum of one year.

3. The committee will address the safety, occupational health and environmental concerns of both management and workers. The committee members will either address these concerns immediately or bring them to the attention of the committee at a meeting. Members of the committee will inspect the worksites regularly and report their findings to the committee. Where applicable, workplace inspections must be done by a certified committee member representing workers (or if done by a team, the team must include a certified committee member representing workers).

4. Committee concerns and recommendations must be documented and filed.

Committee Meetings:

The committee will hold meetings on a regular basis, at least once a month. A suggested meeting format is included at the end of this section.

general Meetings:

The BP Canada Supervisor in-charge of the work area is responsible for ensuring safety, health and environment meetings are held. In most areas, there will be one meeting per month. Employees should attend all health, safety, security and environment meetings but must attend a minimum of four meetings a year. An attendance record must be signed by the attendants and retained at the worksite with the minutes of the meeting.

The agenda will follow that of a regular business meeting:

1. Discussion of all incidents and near misses within the area.

HS

SE

Mee

tings


350



351

2. Discussion of incidents, and near misses throughout company and industry.

3. Health, Safety, Security and Environment committee concerns and recommendations.

4. Discussion of all bulletins and safety information.

education programs such as:• Review of regulations• Review of safety practices and site-specific procedures• Seminars on new equipment• Hazard identification and training.

(e.g. WHMIS)The minutes of the meetings must be recorded and distributed, as follows:

• A copy posted at the facility• A copy sent to appropriate personnel

HSSe opportunity/near Miss Reporting:When a worker has reason to believe that an unsafe condition or practice may exist, he/she shall take immediate corrective action where practical, and report the condition/practice to his supervisor.HSSE Opportunity/Near Miss reports will be filled out and returned to the onsite HSSE representative. Alternatively reports may be submitted via CAIT or Traction systems.Suggested format for recording the minutes of joint worksite Health, Safety, Security and environment committee meetings:

1. Date, time, and location of meeting. 2. Chairperson of Meeting. 3. List of attendees. 4. Consecutive days since last Lost Time Accident. 5. Consecutive days since last Preventable Vehicle

Accident. 6. Old safety concerns reported but not corrected

(including specific details).

HS

SE

Mee

tings



352


353

7. Old safety concerns reported and corrected. 8. New safety concerns and recommendations. 9. Safety concerns corrected but not reported. 10. Discussion of accidents, incidents and near

accidents (in area, throughout the company and the industry).

11. Safety topics discussed and/or education program.

12. Distribution list for minutes. 13. Must complete a full work place level one

inspection per year. 14. This can be split into smaller monthly ones.

SaFetY StandBY

[See : Confined Space Entry Practice]

Sand BlaSting / aBRaSiVe BlaSting

PURPOSE:Provide general guidelines for safe sand blasting operations.

APPLICATION:All BP Canada Plant and Field sites.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:• Dust created by blasting operations (i.e., silica sand,

walnut shells)• Dust from material removed

(i.e., lead base paints)• Sparks caused by the blasting operation• Static electricity build-up• Possibility of physical injury from the blasting

operation

Saf

ety

Sta

ndby


352



353

• Noise exposure• Heat stress

PREPARATIONS:• Work area should be checked for combustible gas

prior to commencing operation and as required throughout.

[See: Working in a Combustible Atmosphere Standard]• A work authorization may be required depending on

the risk level of the task. [See: Work Authorization Practice / Hazard Assessment and Risk Management Practice][See: HSSE Meetings][See: Personal Protective Equipment][See: Confined Space Entry][See: Noise and Hearing Conservation]

PROCEDURES:The compressor, hose, nozzle and operator must be properly grounded to prevent build-up of static electricity. Ventilation requirements for the work area must be considered.The equipment operator must be able to stop the flow of material immediately, i.e., shut-off device located at nozzle.

PRECAUTIONS:• If conducting abrasive blasting ensure that crystalline

silica is replaced with a less harmful substance.• Minimize any release of dust (nuisance particulates,

silica, lead, etc.).• Approved respiratory protection must be used to

guard against inhalation of air borne contaminants.[See: Respiratory Protection]

San

d B

last

ing/

Abr

asiv

e B

last

ing



354


355

• Safe handling requirements for sand blasting material, or material removed from surfaces must be addressed.

[See: MSDS]• Consult Safety Coordinator or Industrial Hygienist

for advice on working with silica, lead or other toxic fumes, vapors or particulates.

• Approved personal protective equipment must be used to guard against injury to the operator.

[See: Personal Protective Equipment]

RESPONSIBILITIES:The BP Canada Representative, or his /herdesignate, is responsible for ensuring that safe sand blasting procedures are followed.The Contractor is responsible for ensuring:

• That all personnel are properly trained in the safe use of the equipment

• That the material hazards are identified• That approved respiratory protection and personal

protective equipment are used.

SeCuRitY

Just as no single risk threatens our security, no single factor contributes to effective mitigation of the risks. Therefore the BP Group Security Standard is underpinned by six core elements that, when taken as a whole, create a common, holistic security management process and responses that can be rigorously managed and examined to create a safer and self-improving environment for the protection of BP’s people, our operations, assets and reputation.

These elements are outlined below, requiring all Canada RPU entities to:

• complete an annual business security risk

Sec

urity


354



355

assessment using ‘Getting Security Right’• have a Security Management Plan in place, which

is a natural output of the ‘Getting Security Right’ business risk assessment process

• enter security incidents in Traction• identify a person with single point of responsibility

for security• understand and comply with BP’s Security Crisis

Plans and responses including, where applicable, its kidnap response procedures

• adhere to BP’s Security of Information requirements and guidelines.

For further information and guidance contact your site Business Security Representative or Canada RPU Business Security Managers at 403-233-5660.

SeRViCe Rig SaFetY

PURPOSE:To review the major areas of concern in regard to service rig safety to ensure compliance of service rigs with all applicable government and BP Canada regulations and practices.

APPLICATION:All BP Canada operated service rig operations.

PREPARATIONS:Pre-employment Meeting:

A Pre-employment meeting should be held with the service rig contractor to ensure compliance with Service Rig Safety requirements. In the pre-employment meeting, the HSSE assurance plan should be discussed and clearly communicated. [See: Contractor Safety Program]

Ser

vice

Rig

Saf

ety



356


357

Controlled areas:

Where service rig operations are required in a controlled area, that is, adjacent to airports or populated areas, additional equipment and/or procedures may be required to meet government regulations.[See: Applicable Government Agency]

Signs:

Post appropriate signs at the lease entrance advising H2S, hard-hat area, overhead power lines, restricted access, etc.

PROCEDURES:detailed Rig inspection Report:

Form C-79 (88-08)Must be filled out and sent to the appropriate supervisor according to the following schedule: • When using a service rig that has not worked for

BP Canada before, or • When a service rig has not worked for BP

Canada for a significant length of time (several jobs), or

• Once every three months during continuous operation for BP Canada, or

• When it is deemed necessary by BP Canada Wellsite Leader

note:

• This inspection must be reported on the daily report and service rig tour sheets

• For critical wells, this inspection should be completed within the 24 hour period prior to initiating operations

Weekly Rig inspection Report:

Form C-125 (88-08)In addition to the detailed Rig Inspection, service rig

Ser

vice

Rig

Saf

ety


356



357

inspections must be carried out each week, or once per well, whichever is more frequent. The report must be filled out and sent to the appropriate supervisor, and must be reported on the daily report and service rig tour sheets.

daily inspections:

A walk around inspection must be done on a daily basis with the contractor representative. This should be done first thing in the morning and reported on the daily report and service rig tour sheets. Ideally this inspection could be carried out in conjunction with the daily mechanical testing of the BOP equipment.

Service Rig Blow-out Prevention drill Report:

Blow-out drills must be performed by each rig crew every 7 days, or once per well, whichever is more frequent. Performance and certification of the rig crew and supervisors must be recorded on the form. Drills should be done at various stages of activity ( i.e. tripping, drilling, out of hole, etc). All tests should be reported in the morning report.

Blow-out Preventers:

1. When BOP’s require winterizing, the heat source must be suitable for the electrical area classification in which it is used.

[See: Electrical Protection Regulations] 2. Whenever bolts are loosened or flanges broken,

that section of the BOP system must be pressure-tested as if it had just been hooked up.

accumulator:

Lines shall be tested to the maximum operating pressure of the accumulator for 5 minutes prior to commencing

Ser

vice

Rig

Saf

ety



358


359

operations. Hose couplers within 7.0 meters of the wellbore must be “lock-type” or “Hammer Union type”.

BoP Remote:

Must be shielded from the wellhead and may be located at the accumulator.

Kill and Bleed off System:

Wellhead casing valves must not be used as part of this system. These valves are reserved for emergency use only. Threaded BOP ports are not acceptable because of potential thread damage.If fire sheathed hoses are used, they shall be shop serviced in three year cycles and service reports made available.

Rig Savers/Shut-offs:

All diesel engines within 25 meters of a wellhead or a tank must be equipped with a positive air shut-off valve (PASO), either automatically or manually operated. This valve must be function tested prior to commencing operations and at least once a week thereafter. Tests shall be recorded on daily reports.Vehicles, without air intake shut-offs, essential to operations may operate within this distance, provided the BP Canada Representative in-charge or his designate assesses the on-site safety, i.e. Gas detection. This does not apply to where a vehicle is performing an operation on the well.

lighting:

All rig lights must be enclosed in vapor-proof glass covers and should be controlled by an explosion-proof switch within reach of the driller while at the brake.Rig Cleaning:

The rig should be kept clean using rigwash chemicals and water. Gasoline must not be used.

Ser

vice

Rig

Saf

ety


358



359

Hydrogen Sulfide and Combustible gas (l.e.l.)

Monitors:

Ensure Drager or Gastec H2S sampling devices are available with an adequate range of dated sampling tubes. H2S electronic monitors, complete with audible and visual alarms, are required on critical sour wells. The monitor must be capable of detecting H2S at 10 PPM. The monitor should provide alarms as follows:

• Low Alarm – 10 PPM H2S• High Alarm – 20 PPM H2S

Monitors must be routinely calibrated and tested by a qualified person. A minimum of two detectors are required; one located as close to the return line in the rig/mud tank as possible, and the other placed under the rig floor.[See: Standard for Working in a Combustible Gas Environment]

equipment Placement:

On initial set-up, the rig should be upwind of the wellhead, based on the prevailing wind direction. The line from the tank to the wellhead should run at 90 degrees to the wind, and the pump must be upwind of the tank.[See: ERCB Equipment Spacing Diagram included at the end of this section.]

note: If the lease is too small to position equipment according to the applicable regulations, approval for exemption must be obtained from the appropriate regulatory agencies prior to performing the work. (e.g. ERCB and/or OH&S).

Power line Spacing:

Guy lines must not cross under or over any existing

Ser

vice

Rig

Saf

ety



360


361

power line. For minimum clearances from overhead power lines, [See: Electricity].

Wind direction:

A method of determining wind direction shall be used. This should be supplemented by streamers in the derrick, guy wires and rig tank to ensure that a correct wind direction is always available.

access and Parking:

The parking area should be as far away from the wellhead as possible, but in no case closer than 25 meters. Access to and from this area should be outside the 25 meter radius.

Sump, Swab tank and Flare Stack:

The sump, swab tank and flare stack must be located 50 meters downwind of the rig based on the prevailing wind direction. On sour wells, the flare stack must be equipped with a continuous Pilot. For critical sour wells, continuous ignition is suggested as a back-up to the continuous pilot.

anchors:

All underground piping, cable and cathodic protection beds must be located prior to driving in anchors.[See: Ground Disturbance Practice]Anchors must be properly spaced and pull tested according to the rig manufacturer’s specifications.[See: BP’s Completion Operations Manual for further details]

Safety trailer Requirements:

Safety trailers are required where the H2S concentration in the vapor phase is equal to or greater than 1 percent. A safety trailer and safety supervisor is required on all wells where the H2S concentration in the vapor phase is

Ser

vice

Rig

Saf

ety


360



361

equal to or greater than 5 percent.For wells where the H2S concentration is low and risk to personnel associated with an H2S release is minimal, the non-requirement for a safety trailer can be addressed in the work plan.

electrical grounding/Bonding:

All electrical systems must be properly grounded. Ground electrodes must have a resistance of no more than 10 ohms.Ground the service rig, pumps, pump trucks and rig tanks, etc. The electrode resistance should not exceed 7 ohms.Cathodic protection must be shut off and the pipeline properly bonded to the wellhead and service rig before it is disconnected.[See: Electricity]When ground electrodes are to be used, these will be driven rods or pipes.

RESPONSIBILITIES:The BP Canada representative in-charge is responsible for ensuring that all personnel on-site fully understand the safety considerations and service rig safety requirements. He is also responsible for ensuring that service rig inspections are performed, and that all service rigs that work for BP meet the applicable BP and regulatory requirements. The service contractor is responsible for ensuring that his equipment and personnel comply with the applicable government regulations and BP HSSE Policies.

Ser

vice

Rig

Saf

ety



362


363

SignS and BaRRiCadeS

PURPOSE:To provide safe work practices to reduce hazards by the use of signs or barricades.

APPLICATION:All BP plant and field roads and facilities.

PROCEDURES:Road Hazards:

Where a hazard exists on a road, e.g., closure, bridge out, or culvert out, proper signs and barricades must be used to ensure public safety. Road signs addressing dust hazards, ice, curves, hills, speed limits, etc. should also be considered. Local management should assess the need on all company roads.

Road Maintenance:

Whenever road maintenance (i.e., sanding, grading, gravelling, etc.) is being conducted on BP Canada roads, all signs required by applicable regulations must be used. BP Canada roads are open to public use and must be treated as such.temporary Hazards:

Wherever a temporary hazard exists during maintenance or operating activities, (i.e. open ditches, spills, wet floors, etc.) the necessary signs or barricades must be in place to ensure the safety of uninvolved personnel.RESPONSIBILITIES:All employees and contractors are responsible to identify hazards and ensure that proper and adequate signs and barricades are used as required. Use of reflective vests are required for people involved in setting, manning signs and barricades on roadways.

Sig

ns a

nd B

arric

ades


362



363

StReSS RelieVing PURPOSE:To provide guidelines for safe stress relieving practices.

APPLICATION:All BP Canada Facilities.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:Fire, Explosion, Electrical Shock, Burns

PREPARATIONS:The stress relieving unit and associated equipment are both potential ignition sources, and therefore necessitates the need for extreme caution and proper procedures to eliminate the safety hazards.[See: Work Authorization Practice] [See: HSSE Meetings]

PROCEDURES:Whenever stress relieving is performed on piping or vessels in place, site-specific procedures must be developed.[See: Welding Practices - General]Refer to BP’s Welding Quality Control Manual for stress relieving requirements and techniques.

Signs:

Appropriate signs should be erected around the work area to warn of the hazard and to keep out non-essential personnel.

RESPONSIBILITIES: • The BP Canada Representative in charge of the

Stre

ss R

elie

ving



364


365

operation is responsible for ensuring that safe stress relieving procedures are followed

• It is the responsibility of the qualified engineer in charge to ensure that the appropriate stress relieving requirements and techniques are met

• The contractor is responsible for the safe operation and use of his equipment while on an BP Canada worksite

SWaBBing

PURPOSE:To provide a general guide for safe swabbing operations.

APPLICATION:All swabbing operations conducted by service rigs, swabbing units and wireline units.

DEFINITION:Routine Work:

Frequently performed swabbing operations on wells of similar set-up. Does not include swabbing operations on sour wells.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:Combustible Fluids:

As excessive gas becomes evident, production must be switched through testers and gas flared. Wind indicators must be present at all locations.toxic return fluids:

[See: WHMIS for Fluid Handling Requirements][See: H2S Safety][See: Static Electricity] Swabbing Unit, wireline unit, service rig and associated

Sw

abbi

ng


364



365

piping and equipment must be properly bonded to wellhead and grounded.[See: Bonding and grounding]

PREPARATIONS:non-Routine Work:

A Work Authorization (where applicable) must be issued and a pre-job safety meeting conducted, prior to commencing operation. If swabbing is part of service rig operations, only a pre-job safety meeting needs to be conducted.[See: Work Authorization Practice][See: HSSE Meetings]

Routine Work:

Swabbing procedures must be developed for all routine swabbing operations where a work authorization not issued. The procedure must cover all pertinent safety and operation considerations and emergency plans. This procedure must be reviewed with all pertinent contract personnel. Procedures reviewed and individuals trained must be documented.

PROCEDURES:Company Representative:

A properly trained BP Canada Representative, or his designate, must be on-site for all swabbing operations. An BP Canada Representative must be on-site when swabbing operations involve sour wells.Cathodic Protection:

If flowline is to be disconnected, or swab return line is to be connected to flowline, cathodic protection must be shut off. The wellhead, swabbing unit and swab return line must then be electrically bonded to the flowline to eliminate any electrical potential before disconnecting.

Sw

abbi

ng



366


367

Fluids should be swabbed through a poorboy degasser into a rig tank, only if the Hydrogen Sulfide concentrations are less than the occupational exposure limit.[See: H2S Safety] If the H2S concentrations exceed the occupational exposure limit, all fluid should be swabbed through proper testing equipment, which may include a separator, flare stack, continuous flare pit, gas boot, and vented tanks. Two qualified personnel should supervise the equipment, configured appropriately for the specific well.[See: BP’s Completion Operations Manual]

Swab Return Vent lines:

Must be equipped with block valves, which are closed when running in the hole with the swab mandrel.

Swabbing unit:

Must be securely anchored according to manufacturer’s specifications.

Swab tank:

Must be spaced as per rig tank spacing requirements.Swabbing with service rig or swabbing unit must not be done after dark. A wireline truck equipped with adequate lighting and a meterage wheel may be used with the approval of the supervisor, or his designate and the appropriate government agency.

Purging:

Purging of lines and equipment is a potential hazard that must be handled appropriately. refer to IRP Volume 18-2006 and SSPM “Purging”.

Sw

abbi

ng


366



367

diesel engine Shut-offs:

[See: PASO]

oil Savers:

Lubricator oil savers must be equipped with controls which can be readily operated.

tank trucks:

If swabbing to a tank truck, the engine must be shut off, and the driver must not be in the cab.

Swab Cable:

Should be flagged and well maintained.

PRECAUTIONS:Swab tank should be externally gauged. If external gauging is not possible, suspend swabbing operations and ensure that the swab return line block valve is closed prior to any personnel going up on the tanks. Fluid must not be unloaded from the swab tank while a swab is being pulled.[See: Tank Gauging]

RESPONSIBILITIES:It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Representative in charge of the operation to ensure that safe swabbing procedures are followed.The service contractor is responsible for the safe operation of his equipment, and for the adherence to all applicable government and BP Canada regulations and practices.

TRAINING:[See: Training]

Sw

abbi

ng



368


369

tanK gauging

PURPOSE:To provide a guide for safe gauging of tanks.


POTENTIAL HAZARDS:Gauging operations present a hazard to the worker due to the presence of toxic or flammable gases and the tank height.

PRECAUTIONS: • Tanks installed on a permanent basis should have

gauge boards or an external gauging mechanism. • All tank ladders shall conform to applicable

government regulations and BP Specifications.[See: Ladders – Fixed] • No person should stand on a tank roof. • Where tanks are handling toxic fluids, the

worker may require breathing apparatus and a safety standby person.

[See: Respiratory Protection] [See: Tank Truck Loading/Unloading] • Consult Safety Coordinator or Industrial

Hygienist for advice on specific respiratory protection.

• When gauging a tank from a ladder at a height greater than 2.0 meters, where a hoop, guardrail, platform or cage has not been supplied, a fall arresting device must be worn.

[See: Working at Heights Standard and Golden Rule]

Tank

Gau

ging


368



369

tanK tRuCK loading /unloading

PURPOSE:To provide guidelines for loading and unloading products and fluids safely.

APPLICATION:Movement of fluids at plant and field operations via bulk truck transport.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS: • Combustible/Toxic Fluids[See: Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) Safety][See: Atmospheric Monitoring][See: Respiratory Protection] • Static Electricity [See: Electrical Bonding and Grounding] • Elevated Worksite – Top of Tank [See: Working at Heights] • Fluid temperature, i.e., Sulfur, LPG.

PREPARATIONS:Where caustic, acids, or extremely volatile, corrosive, or sour fluids are being transported, site-specific procedures must be followed. These will address the unique hazards and safeguards required.

PROCEDURES:Before loading or unloading, all trucks must be suitably grounded. The grounding cable connection should be made at the Tank Truck to eliminate any possible spark at the ignitable source.All trucks must be parked at least 25 meters from any combustible source, and pointed off the lease for quick exit. All diesel engine vehicles working within 25 meters must be equipped with a positive inlet air shut-off.

Tank

Tru

ck L

oadi

ng/U

nloa

ding



370


371

While loading or unloading, the truck must be located a minimum of 8 meters from the production tanks and outside of any tank dykes. In areas where spacing relaxation has been approved by the necessary government agencies, the distances so approved shall be maintained.[See: Service Rig Safety for Spacing Diagrams]All trucks must be equipped to allow determination of levels in the receiving tank without the driver being on top of the tanks.When loading has started the driver must walk around the unit to ensure that the product is not leaking from hoses, connections, valves, or pump seals. If a leak is spotted, the driver will immediately stop the activity, and if safe to do so, correct the problem. Unless specific safety related considerations require otherwise, the driver will remain outside the vehicle at all times during loading and unloading operations to continuously monitor tank levels and connections. No truck maintenance shall take place during these operations. Prior to loading and unloading a vehicle, the wheels must be chocked.The appropriate personal protection must be worn.[See: Personal Protective Equipment]Tank trucks must be equipped with at least 1-30# LTK Fire extinguisher, placed ready to use, during loading and unloading operations. Truck to truck transfer of hydrocarbon products is not permitted.

Special Precautions for Handling Sour Fluids:

When handling fluids containing H2S, where the potential exists for H2S to exceed the occupational exposure limits, truck operators must wear breathing equipment while connecting or disconnecting load lines, gauging tanks, and checking truck compartments during loading or unloading operations. This equipment must

Tank

Tru

ck L

oadi

ng/U

nloa

ding


370



371

be supplied and maintained by the contractor. A safety standby should also be considered. In systems with low H2S content and/or the risk to worker exposure is minimal, the non-requirement for a safety standby can be addressed by a site-specific procedure.[See: Hydrogen Sulfide Safety][See: Respiratory Protection][See: Safety Standby]

RESPONSIBILITIES:It is the responsibility of the BP Canada employee in-charge to ensure that safe loading and unloading procedures are conveyed and followed.The service contractor is responsible for ensuring that safe loading/unloading procedures are followed

tHReaded ConneCtionS

Threaded connections shall not be allowed in hydrocarbon service. Threaded connections are acceptable on instrument air and water lines.

toolS

All tools must be inspected prior to use and only used if in safe working condition. Tools must be used as per manufacturer’s recommendation. This means all guards must be in place and no modifications made to the tool.

Studs and nuts must be tightened as per manufacturer’s recommendation (i.e. torque wrenches to be used vs. impact wrenches). All other options must be ruled out before hammer wrenches are used. Options include non-strike face lever wrenches, torque wrenches, hydro torque, or multiplier style tools.

Thre

aded

Con

nect

ions



372


373

inspection of Hand tools prior to use:

• Perform a complete inspection of all equipment and job related tools prior to starting any job. All tools and equipment used must be clean and in good working condition prior and during use.

• Ensure wooden or fiberglass handles used on hammers and similar tools are not damaged or have been modified (i.e. taped wooden handles may hide damage to the handle.) Damaged handles on hammers, axes and similar equipment shall be immediately taken out of service and replaced promptly.

• Ensure hand tools such as hammers, chisels and punches, which develop mushroomed heads during use, are reconditioned or replaced as necessary.

• Check to ensure that tool handles are wedged tightly in the head of all tools. Check for tightness at head/handle connection point.

• Replace worn or bent wrenches, pliers, etc. regularly.• Store tools in dry secure locations where they will

not be tampered with.• Never attempt to repair damaged or modified tools.• Utilize appropriate eye face and hand protection

while using hand tools or equipment which might produce flying materials or be subject to breakage? (See Personal Protection Equipment for further information)

• Preference is to select a tool that will keep your wrist in neutral position.

Tool

s


372



373

tRaining

PURPOSE:To describe the safety training courses and certification required by employees and contractors to ensure safe and productive on-site operations.

APPLICATION:Employees and Contractors as required by job function and/or designated by the line manager.

PREPARATIONS:Pre-Job risk assessment Meeting:

Should provide details of the job and all safety considerations related to the job could include but not limited to; required training and certification. This on-site communication will provide informal training and open channels for encouraging awareness and information flow as the operation progresses.[See: Safety Meetings]

Contractor Safety:

All contractors should have a Safety Program in place which meets the training requirements of the applicable government regulations and BP Canada requirements. This should be reviewed prior to awarding work.

PROCEDURES:Safety is a function of every job task, however, in several special safety training areas, certification is a requirement. Safety training will be instituted to comply with mandatory requirements and other safety training as deemed necessary by Management.

Trai

ning



374


375

training Courses:

Employees will be trained to a competent level on job tasks, operating procedures, and mandatory safety training.

Safety training Records:

A complete record of all safety training must be maintained by the Local VTA Administration section in the Department/Area, and should be retained in the VTA database. The Safety and Industrial Hygiene section provides for the required safety training in-house or through recommended outside agencies. It also promotes the compliance of all employees with safety training requirements, by monitoring changes in regulations and advising the Operating Management of the requirements.

Wellsite training:

The On-Site BP Representative in charge of any rig operation must have the following qualifications:

• Second Line B.O.P. certification (for Drilling Operations)

• Well Service B.O.P. certification (for Service Rig Operations)

• H2S Alive certification (as applicable)• Respiratory Protection Training certification (as

applicable)• First Aid & C.P.R. (in accordance with appli-

cable government regulations)• Worksite Hazardous Materials Information System

(WHMIS)• Transportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG)• Confined Space (as applicable)• Specific Training in the type of Operations being

performed.

Trai

ning


374



375

The Service Rig/Drilling Contractor/Service Company personnel must have the following qualifications:

• First Line B.O.P. certification for Drillers (for drilling operations)

• Second Line B.O.P. certification for Toolpush/Rig Manager (for drilling operations)

• Well Service B.O.P. certification for Toolpush and Driller (for service rig operations)

• Boiler Tickets certification (as applicable)• Basic specific training in the operation or service they

are to perform.

RESPONSIBILITIES:The BP Canada Supervisor/Representative in charge is responsible for verifying that the required training and certification requirements are met as per the Canada RPU Required Training Matrix. This matrix must provide for, at a minimum, all legislated training requirements. The Field Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all workers are properly trained or under the direct supervision of a worker who is, in accordance with the applicable government regulations and BP Canada requirements.For a complete list of training and competency assessment requirements see OMS CF 22-00-09 and OMS CP 22-00-06 respectively.

VeHiCle StandaRd and Road SaFetY PRaCtiCe


1.1 This standard applies to all drivers operating vehicles for BP Canada RPU sites. This includes employees using personal vehicles for company business. In this standard, these vehicles are referred to as

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice



376


377

“company vehicles”. The standard is applicable to summer and co-op students, full time equivalent contractors and office staff that may be traveling on company business.

1.2 The purpose of this standard is to ensure BP Canada RPU employees, contracted employees, contractors and other visiting personnel use vehicles in a safe manner.

2.0 Scope of Vehicle Standard elements

2.1 Vehicle Specifications-The vehicles must be fit for purpose and has been maintained in safe working condition with seatbelts installed and functional. Seat Belts must be worn at all times while a vehicle is in motion.

• Always refer to the vehicle owners’ service manual for the proper maintenance inspections and required service

• It is highly recommended that all vehicle maintenance be completed by the appropriate (Ford, GM, Dodge) authorized dealership while the vehicle is in the warranty period

• All BP, Personal, and rented vehicles must be equipped with Anti-Lock Brakes and Standard Air Bags

• Monthly vehicle safety check sheets must be filled out by the designated driver for that vehicle

• All drivers are required to complete daily vehicle logs, complete monthly vehicle usage reports (per local area schedule) and report all personal and commuting mileage as requested

• The driver will walk around their vehicle prior to each trip to check for potential hazards such as objects, people or other vehicles prior to driving and observe the condition of the vehicle such as tires

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice


376



377

and lights are in good working condition and that window, lights and mirrors are clean

• The vehicle must be equipped with tires properly selected and maintained for the driving conditions that could be experienced in the area. During the period of November 1 to March 31 all BP vehicles and other vehicles being used on a full time basis within the Canada RPU , must be equipped with winter tires (see Appendix 1 Winter Tire Requirements in this Practice)

• Headlights/Driving Lights – As a best practice when driving in conditions that may include reduced visibility such as fog, smoke, snow, dust or low light; it is required that drivers turn on their headlights rather than relying on the vehicle’s daytime running lights. When traveling in the above conditions it is paramount to provide maximum visibility to third party drivers that may be traveling behind our vehicle

• Fit for purpose also refers to using the right vehicle for the right purpose. An example of this would be to use a 4 wheel drive truck to access a drilling rig at a remote site.

• No alterations or modifications are to be made to the vehicle that can affect the functionality of the vehicle safety equipment (E.g.: a bush guard will alter the effectiveness of the air bags.)

Additional vehicle specifications:o ‘4 Wheel Drive’ for all field service vehicles.

Exceptions will be allowed based on approval of local management

o A seat which provides good vibration dampening, lumbar support, and good adjustability of body position to provide ergonomically sound driving position

• A method of communication (cell phone or radio) – may be portable or permanently installed.

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice



378


379

note: a cell phone or other two way communication device is not to be used when vehicle is in motion. an exception would be when traveling on a road which requires the use of two way communication. See section 2.6

• Local area management may determine that the following items are appropriate based on risk assessment for that area:

o Auxiliary driving lights installed according to applicable regulations.

o High frequency deer whistleso Back up alarms

2.2 Passengers-The number of passengers does not exceed the manufacturers specifications for the vehicle.

2.3 Loads-Loads are secure and do not exceed manufacturers specification and legal limits of the vehicle.

All equipment, tools or other cargo being transported in the cargo and passenger areas of all vehicles shall be secured to prevent serious injury to occupants, in the event of a sudden stop or an incident. All vehicles should be assessed to see if headache racks are needed and if so should be installed.

2.3.1 Securing of loads (load Binders) - BP Canada RPU has determined that the use of levertype load binders poses an unnecessary level of risk and shall be phased out of BP operations. Advances in equipment technology provide the opportunity for continual improvement by replacing lever-type load binders with the comparable, safer ratchet-type load binder.

• Warnings and Application Instructions:

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice


378



379

o Failure to use load binders properly may result in serious injury or even death to you or others

o Do not operate a load binder while standing on the load

o Move the handle with caution. It may whip – Keep all body parts clear

o Keep yourself out of the path of the moving handle and any loose chain lying on the handle

o You must be familiar with state and federal regulations regarding size and number of chain systems required for securing loads on trucks

o Always consider the safety of nearby workers as well as yourself when using load binders

o While under tension, a load binder must not bear against an object, as this will cause side load

o Do not use a handle extender (cheater pipe) - see instructions

o Do not attempt to close or open the binder with more than one person

• Instructions - Ratchet Load Binderso Manually unscrew the end hoods to get enough

reacho Position ratchet binder so it can be operated from

the ground, ideal placement is between waist & chest high

o Attach one hook on the chain close to an anchor point to minimize hook rotation

o Take up as much slack as possible and hook the chain to the opposite end of the load binder

o Set the pawl and start closing the load binder, use clean gloves

o Keep fingers and hands away from pawl and gearo Maintain a buffer zone from the end of the

ratchet handleo Secure footing and stroke handle until desired

tension is achieved, handle extensions are

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice



380


381

prohibitedo Loads can shift, check the tension of the load

binder frequently, re-tighten as needed• Maintenance of All Load Binders

o Routinely check load binders for wear, bending, cracks, nicks, or gouges. If bending or cracks are present - Do not use load binder

o Routinely lubricate pivot and swivel points of Lever Binders, and pawl part and screw threads of Ratchet Binders to extend product life and reduce friction wear

2.4 Driver Training-All drivers are appropriately assessed licensed, trained and medically fit to operate the vehicle.

• It is the responsibility of the driver to inform their supervisor within the next working day of a drivers’ license suspension. Failure to inform is considered a severe offence, and will be subject to discipline

• All drivers shall have their appropriate class of drivers licence and TDG or DOT certificate (if applicable) in their possession

• A risk assessment must be performed at each job site to determine what type of additional driving training is needed. The following are examples of the types to consider

• Adverse road conditions (gravel, lease roads, snow and ice, mud, etc.):

o Winter Drivingo Backingo Sloped surfaceso Reverse skiddingo Fatigue and Journey Managemento Deer and animal avoidanceo Understanding 4 X 4’s

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice


380



381

• All drivers shall have passed a BP approved drivers’ evaluation course (with skid control if available) prior to operating a BP vehicle. All professional drivers shall complete a BP approved defensive driver training course as per the HSSE training matrix

• All areas within the Canada RPU will assess their roads as per Local Hazard Maps to determine which areas would require chaining on tires. Areas must develop a plan for chaining requirements. Areas on roads must be identified which would be used for safe installation of chains. Things that should be considered are:

o Winter driving conditions(November 1-March 1 minimum)

o Muddy driving conditionso Grade of roads (e.g. 10% grade)

2.5 Driver Fatigue and Alertness-All drivers are appropriately rested and alert.

• Fatigue and stress are two common mental factors which affect a drivers’ ability to perform. When a driver finds they are in this condition, they should not drive, pull over and take a break or a nap, or pull over and stretch

• Professional drivers as defined by the BP Global Driving Standard must have fatigue training as per HSSE Training Matrix.

2.6 Mobile Phones-Driver. Drivers must not use a mobile phone or other two way communication device while a vehicle is in motion. Only short duration calls on a radio are permitted by exception on roads which are radio controlled or required by regulation (e.g. when moving oversized loads in a convoy with escort vehicles(s)

Cellular phones, voice mail devices, recording pagers or

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice



382


383

other communication devices which are not intrinsically safe(explosions proof ), may not be used in classified areas where a hazardous atmosphere could exist.

2.7 Journey Requirements-• Drivers will contact the local BP management to be

familiar with area specific regulations and policies and, where possible, acquire a local road hazard analysis map

• Driving time should be taken into consideration as part of the hours of travel and work for that day in order to address the issues of fatigue and journey management. STOP, THINK, GO

• High risk road locations should be identified, communicated to all drivers, and posted in a conspicuous location

• All BP light vehicles within the Canada RPU will be equipped with VDR’s (Vehicle Data Recorders). VDR set points should be set at acceleration threshold .45, deceleration threshold .45, and maximum speed 116 km/hr.

2.8 Seatbelts-Seatbelts are worn by all occupants at all times whenever the vehicle is in motion. All people in the vehicle must be wearing a three point seat belt. Lap belts may not be used unless a hazard assessment has been completed and approved by the Area Authority

2.9 Alcohol and Drugs-The driver is not under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or any other substance or medication that could impair their ability to drive.

• Read the label of all over-the-counter medications before considering driving. Refer to BP’s Alcohol and Drug Policy. Consult your physician if questions arise regarding prescription medication

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice


382



383

3.0 additional Specific Requirements.

3.1 Regulatory or posted speed limits shall not be exceeded and all vehicles must be driven in a manner that respects the road conditions.

3.2 Firearms shall not be carried in company vehicles. Where ‘Bear Watch’ or other area specific wild-life expertise is needed on site, it will be addressed in an HSSE Assurance Plan for the job and third party trained and competent experts will be used. Where flare guns are required, site-specific procedures must be developed for the transport and operation of this equipment. Shotguns must not be used for flare guns.

3.3 Vehicles must be backed into parking stalls where it is allowable or where drive-through parking is not possible. Where space permits, drive-through parking is the preferred technique.

3.4 No vehicle shall encroach within 8 meters of any wellhead, piping, process vessel or tank containing combustible fluids unless required by a specific maintenance or operating function and an appropriate risk assessment and necessary hot work permit have been completed.

3.5 A driver, pulling into a well/battery/drilling operation/compressor site or pump station, must park the vehicle pointing towards the access road for a quick exit.

3.6 Pets will not be permitted in company vehicles while traveling on BP business or while on BP Canada RPU premises.

3.7 It is recommended that drivers wear their safety glasses while driving on gravel roads as there is a high risk of rocks, ice or debris to be thrown into the windshield by another vehicle.

3.8 Backing - is to be avoided when practical. Drivers will park in spaces where they can legally drive

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice



384


385

forward when leaving; otherwise they will back into the parking space upon arrival. A spotter shall be used to assist the driver during backing operations of heavy vehicles, vehicles with trailers, and vehicles with limited visibility from their rear window.

3.9 Open beverages within the drivers compartment of all vehicles on BP business must be contained within a travel style container and must be fitted with the proper lid to minimize spillage.

4.0 Scope of towing and tow Straps

4.1 Tow trucks are to be used as the first choice for towing. STOP, THINK, GO (TOW).

4.2 Nylon tow ropes or chains must not be used. Nylon braided (flat) tow straps with loop ends (no hooks) are acceptable.

4.3 Vehicles should be equipped with the manufacturers’ specified towing hooks or properly mounted towing hitch. A ditch hitch is a recommended towing device which fits into the hitch receiver.

4.4 Pulling force on the tow hooks must not exceed the manufacturers’ specifications.

4.5 There should be constant tension on the tow strap when towing, it should not be ‘jerked’.

4.6 BP vehicles are not allowed to pull a trailer device that is not company owned or leased.

5.0 Scope of Boosting and Jump Starting5.1 When boosting or jump starting, both batteries must

be the same voltage and the vehicles must not be touching.

5.2 The vehicles must be in ‘park or neutral’ with parking brakes on and both engines and all accessories shut off.

5.3 Put the booster cables on the positive battery posts first, then put the negative cable on the good battery and finally ground the last cable to the engine block of the vehicle with the dead battery.

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice


384



385

5.4 Keep clear of the vehicles during the boosting operation and use the reverse procedure to remove the cables.

5.5 Always wear eye protection when boosting or jump starting a vehicle.

6.0 Scope of Vehicle incident Reporting

6.1 All vehicle incidents must be reported to drivers’ immediate supervisor immediately if possible but no later than within 24 hours or next business day.

6.2 All vehicles incidents involving a third party, public or private property must be reported to Kendal Adjusters Inc. (John Bicknell 403-256-8400) within 24 hours. You will be required to fax a copy of the Incident Report, copy of the Police Report and any relevant cost estimates. Vehicles are not to be repaired until authorized by Kendal Adjustors or BP Fleet Management.

6.3 All vehicles incidents over $1000 are to be reported to the local Police authorities within 24 hours.

6.4 Vehicles incidents that do not involve a third party or public or private property should be handled as follows:

< = $1000 damage 1 estimate required for repair

$1001 - $3000 damage 2 estimates required for repair

$3001 - $5000 damage 3 estimates required for repair

+$5000 damage 3 estimates required for repair AND contact BP Fleet Management for authorization

6.5 All vehicle incidents involving rental vehicles should be reported to rental agency (Hertz) as soon as practically possible. The claim processing will be handled by their representative.

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice



386


387

7.0 Scope of Material Handling

7.1 Site-specific materials handling and transportation procedures may be required.

7.2 Transportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG) certificate, the TDG applicable permits and the OMNIBUS permit must be carried in the vehicle where applicable.

8.0 Scope of Safety equipment

8.1 All company vehicles including rental vehicles will have safety equipment that is appropriate for local risk assessments and conditions The following is suggested minimum equipment for vehicles going to field locations. Vehicles not travelling to remote sites or in adverse conditions may not require all of the equipment listed.

• regulatory acceptable first aid kit• reflective warning devices• bear kits where necessary• fire extinguisher• reflective clothing• extra clothing or blankets – if applicable based on

geographic location• candle and matches– if applicable based on

geographic location• non-perishable high energy food• shovel – if applicable based on geographic location• Axe or a hatchet– if applicable based on geographic

location• Flashlight (explosion-proof is recommended for field

service vehicles)• Extra batteries for flashlight• Booster cables

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice


386



387

• Tow strap• Water, Caution Water may freeze.

9.0 Scope of appendices

Appendix 1- Canada RPU Winter Tire Reguirements

10.0 Reference documents

GLOBAL DRIVING STANDARD : http://omsnaviga-tor.bpweb.bp.comOMS CP 44-00-02- HSSE Nonconformance and Inci-dent Reporting Procedure – available throughhttp://omsnavigator.bpweb.bp.comSite Specific Vehicle Checklists

aPPendiX 1

BP Canada RPu Winter tire Requirements


1.1. This policy applies to BP Canada Energy (Canada RPU) vehicles operated on BP business within the November 1 to March 31 timeframe.

1.2. This policy provides requirements and guidance for winter tire and studded tire usage for BP vehicles.

1.3. The purpose of this policy is to ensure that all BP vehicles are equipped with the most appropriate tires for winter driving conditions.

1.4. All BP owned vehicles operated within the Canada RPU will be equipped with Winter Tires during the winter months as described above.

1.5. It is also expected that long term contractors (those working on our sites in excess of 30 days) will abide by this policy.

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice



388


389

2.0 definitions

2.1 Snow Tire -These tires have tire tread composed of special rubber compounds and tread designs that enhance their performance in snow and ice conditions. Studless winter tires (typically Q-rated with a mountain-snowflake symbol shown below) are now available to motorists as a substitute for studded tires.

2.2 Studded Tire – These tires are designed for ice and snow conditions. They can be used alternatively to Snow Tires.


3.1 It is the responsibility of the manager at each site to ensure that all of the BP owned/leased vehicles are equipped with snow or studded tires during the mandatory period of November 1 through March 31. If driving conditions deteriorate before November 1 it is recommended that snow or studded tires are installed at that time. Also it is recommended that snow or studded tires are kept on the vehicles until March 31 and until winter conditions subside.

3.2 Snow tires are manufactured and supplied by a number of manufacturers. CertainTire brands can be purchased with the PHH card and these should be used if possible. Any tire that displays the mountain snowflake symbol on it is considered a snow and ice tire and is acceptable provided it meets sizing and rating requirements specified by the manufacturer. Tires not baring this symbol are

Vehi

cle

Sta

ndar

d an

d

Roa

d S

afet

y P

ract

ice


388



389

not considered a snow tire. Only Snow Tires and Studded Tires are considered acceptable.

4.0 Scope of training and Qualification

4.1 It is the responsibility of each area manager to review the Winter Tire requirements with the working group in the fall before winter driving conditions set in.

5.0 Snow tire Requirements and guidelines.

5.1 Install four winter tires – To help maintain control and stability of your vehicle in icy conditions, Transport Canada and the Rubber Association of Canada recommend that you install winter tires in sets of four. At BP Canada RPU this is mandatory.

6.0 Scope of References

6.1 http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/tires/wintertires/tirelist.htm

6.2 http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/tires/wintertires/menu.htm

Welding PRaCtiCeS – geneRal

PURPOSE:To provide safe procedures for welding.

APPLICATION:All BP Canada Facilities and pipelines.

Wel

ding

Pra

ctic

es-G

ener

al



390


391

DEFINITION:

Welding includes:

• Arc Welding • MIG• TIG• Hot cutting• CAD Welding• Stoppling• Explosion welding and cutting

A pressure piping system includes the pipe, tubes, conduits, fittings, gaskets, bolting, and other components making up a system. The sole purpose of this system is the conveyance of a fluid under pressure, and the control of the flow of a fluid under pressure between two or moreA pipeline is a gas line, oil line, fluid line, multiphase line, solids line, secondary line, distribution line or flowline.Other jurisdictions may have definitions that vary. The appropriate regulations should be checked for their definitions.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:• Welding within a production area is an activity

which requires extreme caution and proper procedures

• Fire and Explosion• Welding Burns, Radiation and electric shock• Toxic welding fumes, and gases• Compressed fuel cylinders• Noise• Vibration

Wel

ding

Pra

ctic

es-G

ener

al


390



391

PREPARATIONS:All welding and “hot work” must be done within boundaries defined by Hazard Assessment and Risk Management and Work Authorization practices. [See: Hazard Assessment Risk Management and Work Authorization Practices][See: HSSE Meetings][See: Safety Standby][See: Respiratory Protection]The needs for warning signs, to isolate or restrict entry to the work area to authorized personnel wearing suitable protection should take into consideration.

government Regulations:

Before any additions or changes are made to pressure piping that are classified under the provincial/federal inspection jurisdictions, proper notification must be made and approval secured. BP Welding Manuals (Corporate and Pipelines) and associated ETPs must be consulted.

PROCEDURES:Site-specific procedure must be developed. This may include, but is not limited, to the following:

• Blinding • Purging • Depressuring • Excavations • X-Ray • Stress Relieving • Non-Destructive Testing

Site-Specific Procedure:

A detailed work plan for any procedure that involves the use of a cutting torch, welding, or tie-in to existing

Wel

ding

Pra

ctic

es-G

ener

al



392


393

operating equipment must be prepared. The procedure must list all the activities in sequence required to complete the job. For each activity, the following areas must be covered: 1. Activity: Describe what has to be done and how

the activity will be carried out. 2. Hazards: Describe the safety hazards present

and how each hazard will be eliminated or minimized.

3. Personnel: Describe who is responsible for the activity and who will carry it out.

4. Fire Protection Equipment: Must be located at the work site, ready to use.

[See: Fire Protection Equipment]

PRECAUTIONS:Ventilation:

Adequate mechanical ventilation, local fume extraction equipment or respiratory protection must be used where:

• Natural ventilation is obstructed • Toxic metals or fluxes are used• Toxic fumes, gases and ozone are generated.

[See: Confined Space Entry][See: Respiratory Equipment]note: Consult RPU Industrial Hygienist for advice on appropriate worker exposure controls and respiratory protection.

Respiratory:

Exposure to hazardous fumes, dusts, gases and vapors may occur in the welding process. To reduce exposure to hexavalent chromium, beryllium and other metal fumes or dusts the following respiratory protection guidelines must be followed:

Wel

ding

Pra

ctic

es-G

ener

al


392



393

task Respiratory Protection

Welding, cutting, gouging & grinding on stainless steel inside a vessel or in a shop

Half Mask respirator with P100 filters

Welding on carbon steel with chromium or beryllium containing rods (in shop or outside)

Half Mask respirator with P100 filters

Welding & grinding on stainless steel using Inconel rod inside vessels

Powered air-purifying or full-face respirator with P100 filters

Protective equipment:

Welder and Welder’s helpers must wear approved protective equipment.

Welding helmet and safety glasses must be worn when welding, grinding and buffing. If a welder is performing non-welding related tasks, the Practice PPE requirements shall be followed.

[See: Personal Protective Equipment, FRW Practice and Hand Protection Practice]Flash protection screens should be used to protect the uninvolved workers.

gas Monitoring:

Work area, equipment and lines shall be checked for combustible and/or toxic gas prior to starting job. Work area may require continuous monitoring throughout the job. Re-entry to work area must be accompanied by re-check for combustible and/or toxic gas.

RESPONSIBILITIES:It is the responsibility of the BP Canada supervisor in charge, or his designate, to ensure that safe welding procedures are in place and followed.

Wel

ding

Pra

ctic

es-G

ener

al



394


395

Welders are responsible for the proper maintenance and safe operation of their equipment.TRAINING:Only welders ticketed for the applicable weld procedure shall be used.All workers must be properly trained and competent to carry out their required task.

Well SeRViCing WoRK Plan

PURPOSE:To provide a guide for developing work plans for well servicing work.

APPLICATION:All BP Canada operated wells.

DEFINITION:A site-specific procedure of the well servicing operations to be undertaken.PROCEDURES:Each well servicing job should have a work plan. Analysis of the operation and safety conditions will dictate the detail required.All well workovers must have an approved work plan.The following outlines the information and procedures that should be included in any approved work plan.Pertinent Well Data:

• Well name and location• Perforations• Zone• Elevations: KB, Ground or CF• TD• PBTD

Wel

l Ser

vici

ng W

ork

Pla

n


394



395

• Risk assessments• Cost estimates• Proper accounting codes • Casing details: Surface, intermediate and production

size, weight, grade, setting depth, cement type, cement volume

• Production tubing details, listed from top to bottom, including all dimensions (ID’s, OD’s), weights, grades, thread size, and accessories (packers, tubing anchors, etc.)

• Bottom hole pressure• Bottomhole temperature• H2S concentration (Is a safety company required? Is

this a “critical sour well” as defined by the EUB?) [See: H2S Safety]• Hole capacities• Wellhead description including details of size,

pressure ratings, flanges, hangers, and manufacturer’s name

• Sucker rod and bottomhole pump details including polish rod dimensions

• Pumping unit details.

Well History:

An outline of the initial completion and a summary of all previous workovers should be included. Any problems previously encountered should be referenced and detailed, particularly those which could lead to further trouble, e.g., lost circulation, cementing difficulties, pressure test failures, collapsed casing, etc.

Job Procedure:

A detailed, step-by step procedure must be written. It cannot be assumed that the wellsite supervisor will perform any operation, therefore, every job to be done must be included in the procedure.

Wel

l Ser

vici

ng W

ork

Pla

n



396


397

It should begin with the statement of notification, which details the various regulatory bodies, and the BP Canada personnel that must be notified before any equipment is moved on a location.Applicable Emergency Response Plan should be referenced and included in work plan package as required.[See: Emergency Response Plan]All equipment to be used (packers, profiles, etc.), should be fully identified by manufacturer’s name, part number, ID, OD, and thread connection.All fluids to be used must be fully detailed, including all safe handling precautions (Include MSDS), where the fluid is to be obtained and how it is to be disposed of.[See: TDG Regulations]

Service Companies:

If specific companies are to be used, they should be named, and a copy of their program attached. The service to be provided and the contact must be listed. If it is necessary to substitute service companies during the course of the job, the program must be discussed with a representative of the substitute company before they arrive at the lease.Contact list:

This should include BP Canada personnel as well as essential contract personnel contacts.

approvals:

All well workover work plans or programs must be approved according to the Department/Area policy. Regulatory body approval is required for critical sour wells (e.g.. ERCB in Alberta). Down-hole Schematic-Log Sections:Down-hole drawings which show “present” and

Wel

l Ser

vici

ng W

ork

Pla

n


396



397

“proposed” down-hole details must be attached. Use Form C-238.Pertinent open hole and cased hole log sections must be attached and referenced in the main body of the program, noting which log is to be used for correlating purposes.

Material Requirements:

Any materials that are not readily available, or must be specially manufactured, must be listed and the supplier identified. All special handling tools must be listed.

other Requirements:

Copies of the following documents or permits must be attached to the program package where appropriate: 1. Flaring Permit 2. Mineral Surface Lease or Landowner Contact

Sheet

RESPONSIBILITIES:It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Representative on-site to ensure that a work plan is developed and provided.

Well teSting

PURPOSE:To provide a general guide to safe well testing operations.

APPLICATION:All BP Canada operated well testing operations.

Wel

l Tes

ting



398


399

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:• Explosion: Improper Purging procedures, i.e.

entrained air • High Pressure• Toxic and/or Combustible fluids[See: H2S Safety] • Static Electricity: All equipment rigged in must be

electrically bonded and grounded.[See: Electricity]• High Noise:[See: Noise Exposure & Hearing Conservation]

PREPARATIONS:

Well test Program:

A work plan must be developed which meets the applicable regulatory requirements. Procedures may be part of the well servicing work plan, or may stand alone.[See: Work Plan]

a work plan should address the following:

• Safety Hazards and Considerations• Purpose of the test• Type of reservoir• Test Equipment required• Potential operating difficulties and preventative

measures.• Flare volume and flare permits

When testing wells containing H2S in excess of 5 percent, prior approval from the ERCB, if in Alberta, must be obtained.[See: EUB IL 91-2]The requirements under IL 91-2 must also be addressed

Wel

l Tes

ting


398



399

when flaring wells containing 1-5% H2S and should be followed for wells containing less than 1% H2S.An Emergency Response Plan must be in place when testing wells containing H2S in excess of 1%. Where the well is part of an approved Emergency Response Plan for an existing sour facility, no additional response plan is required for testing. Otherwise a site-specific Emergency Response Plan is required.[See: Directive 60]

Pre-Job Safety Meeting:

Must be held before commencing operations to discuss testing procedures and potential hazards.[See: HSSE Meetings]

Signs:

Warning of the presence of H2S must be posted at the lease entrance when testing wells with H2S content exceeding 10 PPM.

PROCEDURES:The BP Canada representative in charge must be aware of the regulatory requirements as laid out in the following: “Well Testing – Minimum Guidelines for Safety Enhanced Field Operations”, available from most testing companies in Alberta, or Alberta Occupational Health and Safety.

Well test Flaring

When flaring is needed, ensure that OMS CP 36-00-03, Well Test Flaring Procedure is followed.

equipment Spacing:

[See: Service Rig Safety]NOTE: In British Columbia, the flare stack must be 50 meters from the separator.All testing lines must be staked or secured

Wel

l Tes

ting



400


401

First aid equipment:

Must be available on-site along with means for transportation off-site.[See: First Aid Equipment]

testing Personnel:

A minimum of two (working) qualified test personnel are required on-site at all times. Three (working) qualified test personnel are required on-site at all times when the H2S content of the well is known to be greater than 1% (10,000PPM). It is the responsibility of the BP Canada representative in charge, to assess the need for additional personnel and ensure that fully trained and competent contractor employees are used.Well site illumination must be adequate to safely perform any job, and must be approved for use in the hazardous locations.[See: Electrical Protection Regulations]

Communications:

Off lease communications and an Emergency Contact List must be on location at all times.

Breathing:

A minimum of two self-contained breathing apparatus must be on location at all times. If working on a sour well, adequate breathing apparatus must be supplied for the full crew.

Fire Protection:

A minimum of 2 – 30# LTK BC fire extinguishers must be on location in accessible areas ready to use.

Purging:

System must be purged of all air with pilot out prior to

Wel

l Tes

ting


400



401

commencing operations. The use of a non-combustible purge medium is desirable. If using a combustible purge medium, ignition sources must be eliminated, and specifically the flare must not be lit.[See: Purging] Also refer to IRP Volume 18-2006.

Pressure testing:

All equipment upstream of the choke should be pressure tested to 1.2 times the maximum working pressure, or to the wellhead pressure rating, whichever is the lesser. Once the flow test has started, check the entire system for leaks.

PRECAUTIONS:Safety standby must be utilized for tank gauging when working with toxic fluids, or when working with fired equipment.[See: H2S Safety][See: Respiratory Protection][See: Safety Standby]Sour and/or Critical Wells:Additional safety procedures are required.[See: OH&S “Well Testing” guide][See: BP’s Completion Operations Manual]

RESPONSIBILITIES:It is the responsibility of the BP Canada Representative in-charge to ensure that safe well testing operations are carried out.The contractor is responsible for ensuring that all equipment and personnel meet the applicable Government regulations, BP Canada requirements, and possess sufficient experience to perform the work with minimal supervision.

Wel

l Tes

ting



402


403

TRAINING:All personnel must possess valid First Aid, CPR and WHMIS and should have an H2S certificate. Where H2S is expected, all personnel must possess a H2S certificate.[See: Training]

WiReline oPeRationS

PURPOSE:To provide a general guideline for safe wireline operations. APPLICATION:All BP Canada operated wells where wireline is run for remedial and/or maintenance requirements (i.e. dewaxing, pressure survey, fishing, running or pulling plugs/chokes, and opening or closing sliding sleeves).

DEFINITION:Routine Work:

Frequently performed wireline operations (i.e. dewaxing) on wells of similar set-up. Does not include wireline operations on sour wells.

POTENTIAL HAZARDS:• High Pressure: Well pressure must be checked to

ensure that wireline equipment is rated for the working pressure.

• Static Electricity: The Wireline and Picker/Mast unit must be properly bonded and grounded to the rig and/or wellhead.

• Purging of equipment[see Purging] Also refer to IRP Volume 18-2006[See: Electricity]

• Combustible/Toxic Fluids:

Wire

line

Ope

ratio

ns


402



403

[See: H2S Safety][See: Respiratory Protection]

PROCEDURES:All equipment attached to the wellhead must be adequately supported to prevent lateral movement.Climbing on the lubricator is not allowed.[See: Working at Heights Practice]]Wireline Unit and Picker/Mast Unit must have wheels chocked.

lubricator & B.o.P.’s:

At least one line-B.O.P. located between the lubricator and wellhead must be used. B.O.P.s for sweet wells can be either manually or hydraulically operated.Lubricator and B.O.P.’s must be pressure tested to the lesser of 1.2 times the maximum working pressure or the wellhead pressure rating, prior to use.

Stuffing Box:

Rubber/Packing must be maintained in good condition.At least 2 – 30# LTK fire extinguishers must be on-site and ready to use.PRECAUTIONS:Critical Wells:

Additional safety procedures are required.[See: Alberta Recommended Practices – Volume 2][See: BP Completion Operations Manual]Equipment approved for use in sour service must be used (i.e. line, lubricator, B.O.P.’s, running tools).

RESPONSIBILITIES:It is the responsibility of the BP Representative in-charge to ensure that safe wireline procedures are followed.The contractor is responsible for ensuring that all

Wire

line

Ope

ratio

ns



404


405

equipment meets all applicable government regulations and BP requirements, and all personnel are properly trained in safe wireline procedures.TRAINING:(See: Training)

Well WoRK - Hand oVeR BetWeen

oPeRationS and WellS teaMS

PURPOSE: To provide standards of safe well turnover between Operations and the Wells group.APPLICATION: All BP Canada operated wells.

PROCEDURE: 1) There will be a minimum of 36 hr notice (longer

if required by either Operations or the Wells teams) between the time the program for the well work is received in the field and the well work operation begins. This is required to give the appropriate time to plan for the required resources, and properly co-ordinate activities between Wells and Operations teams in the field.

2) Any deviation from the agreed upon time period requires joint written approval by both Operations and Wells teams.

3) Prior to starting work on the well bore, the Wells team will take steps to ensure seal integrity; e.g. no leaking of the master valves.

4) Operations will take responsibility for the turn over of the well bore to the Wells team. The surface facilities downstream of the master valves shall be fully de pressured with all process connections; e.g. chemical lines; removed.

5) The well bore will be locked and tagged by

Wel

l Wor

k - H

and

Ove

r Bet

wee

n O

pera

tions

and

Wel

ls T

eam

s


404



405

the Operator until such time as it is ready to turn over to the Wells team as per BP Canada’s Working on Energy Systems Practice.

WoRKing alone / WoRKing in iSolation PRaCtiCe


1.1 The purpose of this practice is to provide safe work requirements for employees, contracted employees and contractors working or traveling alone on Canada Regional Production Unit (Canada RPU) business, premises and work sites.

1.2 This practice applies to all Canada RPU employees, contracted employees and contractors performing work or traveling alone.

2.0 definitions

2.1 Working alone – To “work alone” means to travel or work alone / in isolation at a BP field location or at a BP office out of field locations (e.g. Calgary, Grand Prairie, Edmonton offices) in circumstances when they cannot be seen or heard by another worker, they cannot expect a visit from another worker for some time and when assistance is not readily available in the event of an injury, illness or emergency.

2.2 Readily available – Three assessment factors must be considered when determining if assistance is readily available:

• Awareness – Will other workers capable of providing assistance be aware of the worker’s needs?

• Willingness – Is it reasonable to expect those other workers will provide helpful assistance?

Wor

king

Alo

ne/W

orki

ng in

Is

olat

ion

Pra

ctic

e



406


407

• Timeliness – Will assistance be provided within a reasonable period of time?

This assessment must consider the level of risk associated with the circumstances of the work; for example, type of work, location and hazards. If the hazard the worker faces poses a high risk of injury, “readily available” may mean “immediately available”. The availability of assistance must increase as the level of risk associated with the work increases.

2.3 effective Means of electronic Communication – Two-way radio, telephone or other electronic communication device.

2.4 Effective Face to Face Contact System – An alternative to an “effective means of electronic communication” that is appropriate to the hazard.

2.5 The frequency of the “Electronic Communication” and “Face to Face Contact systems” must be based on a hazard assessment.

2.6 A worker is not working alone if all the following conditions are met:

• Awareness – The worker can get the attention of someone capable of providing helpful assistance when the worker requires it; for example, by maintaining visual contact and staying within hearing range of others.

• Willingness – Persons expected to provide assistance must be capable and willing to do so when required. There should be a reasonable expectation that the persons being relied on to provide assistance can and actually will provide that assistance. Depending on circumstances, those persons may need access to communication devices to trigger emergency response plans or telephone to call Emergency Services (9-1-1)

• Timeliness – The required assistance will be provided in a reasonable period of time. What is reasonable

Wor

king

Alo

ne/W

orki

ng in

Is

olat

ion

Pra

ctic

e


406



407

depends on factors such as the nature of the illness, injury or emergency, the physical location of the work and workers and the type and level of risk of the work being performed


3.1 Each Area Authority / delegate at field locations and Line Managers / Supervisors at office locations are accountable for:

• Conducting a hazard assessment to identify existing or potential safety hazards in the work place associated with working alone.

• Developing and implementing the site specific working alone requirements which includes a written procedure for checking the well-being of a worker assigned to work alone.

• Implementing safety measures to reduce the risk to workers from the identified hazards.

• Ensuring workers have an “effective means of electronic communication” or an “effective face to face contact system” with a designated person in case of an emergency

• Ensuring workers are trained and educated so they can perform their work safely

3.2 All workers and contractors are responsible for following the working alone procedures developed for a specific area.

4.0 Requirements for Working Alone4.1 High hazard activities such as working at heights,

confined space entry, working in hazardous atmospheres where a safety stand-by is required (eg H2S), or working with hazardous equipment such as chainsaws must never be conducted alone.

4.2 Prior to commencing work, a work site hazard assessment to identify existing hazards for

Wor

king

Alo

ne/W

orki

ng in

Is

olat

ion

Pra

ctic

e



408


409

employees working alone is required.4.3 All working alone activities must be managed by a

working alone safe work procedure that contains a written plan for regular “effective electronic means of communication” or “effective face to face contact” at intervals appropriate to the nature of the hazard associated with the worker’s work. The procedure for checking a worker’s well being (both by electronic means and face to face) must include the time interval between checks and the procedure to follow in case the worker cannot be contacted, including provisions for emergency rescue. The frequency of contact for checking the worker’s well-being must be based on a hazard assessment and developed in consultation with the worker assigned to work alone. In addition to checks at regular intervals, a check at the end of the work shift must be done.

4.4 An “effective electronic means of communication” must provide workers with a method of signaling their need for assistance. Common devices that meet the intent of “effective electronic means of communication” include: land-line, cellular and satellite telephones, two-way radios, continuous monitoring by remote surveillance cameras, personal alarms and other electronic systems that achieve the same results. The key point is that the communication system must permit the worker requiring assistance to send a message or signal to someone capable of providing assistance to them.

4.5 If providing an effective “electronic means of communication” is not practicable, an effective “face to face contact system” that is appropriate to the hazards must be developed. The effective “face to face contact” system must identify a designated person to establish contact with the worker at predetermined intervals and the results of this contact must be recorded by that person. Examples

Wor

king

Alo

ne/W

orki

ng in

Is

olat

ion

Pra

ctic

e


408



409

of contact system include; visiting the work location at pre-determined intervals, scheduling check-ins with other workers or designated persons and reporting to an office or particular person upon completion of a task.

4.6 A worker required to work alone and any person assigned to check on the well-being of a worker must be trained in the written site-specific working alone procedure.

4.7 Where applicable, the procedure for checking a worker’s well being, including time intervals between the checks, must be developed in consultation with the Joint Health and Safety Committee or worker health and safety representative(s).

4.8 The procedure and system for checking a worker’s well-being must be reviewed at least annually. The procedure and system must be reviewed more frequently if there is a change in work arrangements which could adversely affect a worker’s well-being or a report that the system is not working effectively.

5.0 Requirements for Traveling Alone5.1 People traveling alone require a traveling alone plan

that contains the following:• Destination and schedule for arriving at the

destination• Mode of transportation to destination• Contact person for communicating travel plans; and• Establish scheduled check-in times with contact to

indicateo When starting the journeyo Arrival at pre-determined check points if deemed

necessaryo Arrival at destinationo Changes to travel plans; and

Wor

king

Alo

ne/W

orki

ng in

Is

olat

ion

Pra

ctic

e



410


411

o Procedures and response plan in case the person traveling does not check-in at predetermined times or cannot be contacted

5.2 All aspects of the journey must comply with OMS CP 37-00-01 – Vehicle Standard and Road Safety Practice.

6.0 References

• Alberta: Occupational Health and Safety Code 2009 and Occupational Health and Safety Explanation Guide 2009, as amended, Part 28 Working Alone.

• Alberta: Working Alone Safely, A Guide for Employers and Employees, August 2009. Alberta Workplace Health and Safety Publication.

• British Columbia: Occupational Health and Safety Regulation, B.C. Reg. 296/97, and associated Guidelines, as amended, Part 3 Rights and Responsibilities, Sec. 3.23; Part 4 General Conditions, Sec. 4.20.1 to 4.23; Part 8 Personal Protective Clothing and Equipment, Sec. 8.28.

• Ontario: Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91 as amended, Part III Excavations, Sec. 224, 225.

• Saskatchewan: Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 1996, R.R.S. c. O-1.1 Reg 1, as amended, Part III General Duties, Sec. 35.

• Federal: There are no specific regulatory requirements addressing “Working alone”.

• OMS CP 37-00-01 – Vehicle Standard and Road Safety Practice

• OMS CP 45-00-01 CoW Policy & Practice

WoRKing at HeigHtS PRaCtiCe


1.1 This Practice applies to BP Canada RPU employees,

Wor

king

at H

eigh

ts P

ract

ice


410



411

contract personnel conducting work for or on behalf of BP and all other visiting personnel who are participating in working at heights activities on BP Canada premises or work sites.

1.2 The purpose of the Practice is to eliminate or minimize fall hazards and ensure personnel are protected while conducting working at heights activities.

1.3 The Working at Heights Practice states when fall protection is required and describes the necessary expectations and responsibilities in the preparation and execution of conducting work at heights.

2.0 Scope of definitions

2.1 Anchor Point: any point of attachment for the purposes of fall protection, certified by a professional engineer.

2.2 “Competent Worker”: An employee/contractor with following qualifications:

• Adequately qualified (formal certifications/designations are required if applicable)

• Suitably trained and with sufficient experience to safely perform work

• Familiar with applicable regulatory and BP requirements.

• Cognizant of actual and potential workplace hazards.2.3 CSA”: Canadian Standards Association.2.4 “Deceleration Device”: Any mechanism which

serves to dissipate the force of the fall which would otherwise be imposed on the worker, for example an energy absorber.

2.5 “Engineered”: Designed and/or approved by a Registered Professional Engineer.

2.6 “Fall Arresting Device”: A device that provides a means of arresting the accidental vertical or near vertical fall of an individual, and subsequent to the arrest of the fall does not, by itself, permit the

Wor

king

at H

eigh

ts P

ract

ice



412


413

release or further lowering of the individual.2.7 “Fall Arrest System”: The system utilized to minimize

the chance for injury during a fall. It consists of an engineered anchor point, connecting means a full body harness, and a shock absorbing lanyard. See applicable CSA and other standards for full compliance.

2.8 “Fall Protection System”: Any system or a combination of systems that protects workers from falls from heights such as handrails, fall restrain systems, fall arrest systems, and safety nets.

2.9 “Fall Restraint System”: A system of components designed to eliminate the chance of an accidental fall. This may be accomplished by use of barricades and hand railing, or may utilize an anchor point, a connecting means (such as a lanyard), and a body supporting device (such as a full body harness).

2.10 “Free Fall Distance”: The distance a worker may fall before a fall arrest system engages and begins to slow the fall.

2.11 “Personal Fall Protection Equipment”: Any equipment that is personally fitted issued and forms part of the fall protection system.

2.12 “Safety Harness”: A device used to transfer the forces experienced during and after a fall to the torso or upper legs of a worker. CSA approved 5-point full body harnesses are required. Belts or 3- point harnesses are not allowed.

2.13 “Shock Absorbing Lanyard” Shock Absorbing Device used in combination with safety harness designed to limit the fall arrest forces so they do not exceed the injury threshold of the human body

2.14 “Working at Heights”: See “Section 5, Scope of Expectations”

2.15 “Work Positioning System”: A system of components attached to vertical safety line and including a full body harness, descent controllers

Wor

king

at H

eigh

ts P

ract

ice


412



413

and positioning lanyards used to support or suspend a worker in tension at a work position.


3.1 Each worker has the responsibility to recognize fall hazards and take corrective measures by ensuring this Practice and the written fall protection program are followed.

3.2 All working at Heights activities will be managed as per Canada RPU Control of Work, Hazard Assessment and Risk Management and Work Authorization Practices. eHei

3.3 The on-site BP representative in charge or designate must ensure that:

• Maintenance of an adequate inventory of Personal Fall Protection Equipment meeting applicable CSA or ANSI standards as mandated by provincial/federal regulations. Workers are trained and verified competent in the hazards, use, care, and maintenance of fall protection equipment and including established procedures relating to the use and care of the equipment

• All workers are trained in site specific control of practices and risk management tools

• A documented fall protection plan is in place when fall protection equipment is utilized

• A documented fall protection plan is developed as part of the HARM prior to the work being performed which will cover the following:

o The fall hazards at the work siteo The fall protection system to be used at the

worksiteo The anchors to be used at the worksiteo The clearance distances below the work area

which should be sufficient enough to prevent a

Wor

king

at H

eigh

ts P

ract

ice



414


415

worker from striking the ground/an object or level below the work area

o The procedures used to assemble, inspect, use and disassemble the fall protection system where applicable

o The rescue procedures to be used if a worker falls and is suspended.

4.0 Scope of training and Certification

4.1 All workers working at heights must be trained and competent in fall protection equipment application, care, use, maintenance, and limitations. The training shall be conducted by a qualified trainer and adhere to applicable provincial and federal regulatory requirements.

4.2 Any worker responsible for performing rescue activities must be trained in the proper techniques for the rescue system.

5.0 Scope of expectations

5.1 General:All workers must ensure that a fall protection system

is utilized when work is to be conducted at height’s that are:

• at or greater than 2 metres, or• at a height less than 2 metres if there is a possibility

of injury from a fall greater than the risk of injury from the impact on a solid flat surface or as mandated by federal/provincial requirements for specific situations (e.g. falling 1.2 metres or more if the work area is used as a path for a wheelbarrow or a similar equipment)

• at any height when there is a hazard of falling into;o operating machinery,

Wor

king

at H

eigh

ts P

ract

ice


414



415

o water or another liquid (other than working from a boat). All workers exposed to drowning hazard shall wear lifejackets in combination with a fall protection system.

o hazardous substance or objectAcceptable fall protection can be provided by perma-nent, temporary, or personal fall protection equipment systems.A fall protection system is identified as:

• a personal fall arrest system• a travel/fall restraint system• a safety net• a control zone, or• another system fit for purpose and meeting

applicable regulatory and BP requirements.An employer’s first choice should require the use of adequate guardrails meeting applicable regulatory requirements to protect personnel.All components of a fall protection system must be compatible with one another and the environment in which they are used.

5.1.1 When personal fall protection equipment is utilized, personnel must wear a CAN/CSA approved full body harness.

5.1.2 When personal fall protection equipment is used, these systems must be attached properly to engineer approved anchor points with a minimum load capacity of at least 22.2 kn. (5000 pounds) per person in any direction the load can be applied, or twice the maximum arrest force. Anchor points used for the attachment of personal fall protection equipment must be independent of any anchorage being used to support, suspend, or lift platforms or loads.

Wor

king

at H

eigh

ts P

ract

ice



416


417

5.1.3 All personal fall protection equipment must be connected and used in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and instructions.

5.1.4 Personal fall arrest systems will be rigged to minimize the free fall distance to 1.2 metres with or without a shock absorber. . The deceleration force will not exceed 6 kn unless the worker is using an E6 type shock absorber in which case maximum arresting force must not exceed 8 kn. The personal fall protection system must allow for an unobstructed fall.

5.1.5 Carabiners, snap hooks or D-Rings must have the following qualities:

• Self-closing and self locking type.• My only be opened by at least two consecutive

deliberate manual actions• Marked with its breaking strength in the major axis

and the name or trademark of the manufacturer.5.1.6 Self retracting devices should be anchored above

the worker’s head unless the manufacturer’s specifications allow the use of a different anchor location, and used in a manner that minimizes the hazards of swinging and limits the free fall distance to 1.2 metres if a worker falls.

5.1.7 When using a work positioning system, the worker’s vertical free fall distance in the event of a fall must be restricted by the work positioning system to 600 millimetres or less. If the centre of gravity of a worker using a work positioning system extends beyond an edge from which the worker could fall or if the work surface presents a slipping or tripping hazard because of its state or condition the worker must use a back-up personal arrest system in combination with the work positioning system.

5.1.8 Use of safety nets is subject to evaluation and approval by a professional engineer and the

Wor

king

at H

eigh

ts P

ract

ice


416



417

worksite Accountable Manager.

5.2 Vertical aerial Platforms A fall restraint system is required when conducting work at heights greater than 2 metres from vertical aerial platforms (such as scissor lifts). The platform being used should be operated on firm, level surface with the entire manufacturer’s guardrails and chains in place. However, if the manufacturer’s specifications require the use of a fall arrest system when the vertical aerial platform is being used, then the manufacturer’s specifications take precedence and must be followed. An effective written emergency response procedure must be developed as part of the fall protection plan. Aerial platforms shall not be moved unless all workers on it are protected against falling by personal fall protection attached to the platform. Requirements for vertical aerial platforms apply to scaffolds mounted on castors.

5.3 Boomed lifts/PlatformsA worker working from a boomed lift/platform (such as genie lifts) shall be protected from falling by using a personal fall arrest system consisting of full body harness and shock absorbing lanyard. Only manufacturer’s engineered anchor point should be used. The lanyard should be long enough to prevent the worker from being ejected from the platform but not restrict their work or compromise the function of the fall arrest system.

5.4 Suspended Platforms A worker who is on or is getting off a suspended platform, suspended scaffold or boatswain’s chair shall wear a full body harness connected to a fall arrest system. Every lifeline used with a suspended scaffold or boatswain’s chair shall be suspended independently and securely attached to a fixed

Wor

king

at H

eigh

ts P

ract

ice



418


419

support so that the failure of the structure or the supporting system will not cause lifeline to fail.

5.5 Man basketsUnder normal circumstances, a worker working from a man basket shall be protected from falling by using a fall arrest system such as a vertical lifeline and rope grab combination or a self-retracting lifeline. The lifeline shall be secured to an anchor point on the boom of the crane from which the man basket is suspended. In the event that it is impracticable to provide a personal fall arrest system for one or more workers in a man basket:

• (a) a separate man basket support be attached between the suspended man basket and the hoist line above the hook assembly and

• (b) each worker within the man basket wears a full body harness with lanyard securely attached to the man basket

• The separate or secondary man basket support, in combination with worker attachment to the man basket, functions as a fall arrest system. The secondary man basket support must be as short as possible in order to limit the fall distance and the arresting force experienced by a falling worker.

• An effective written emergency response procedure must be developed as part of the Fall Protection Plan.

5.6 Vertical lifelines Vertical lifelines used in a personal fall arrest systems installed and utilized shall comply with the following:

• Manufactured for commercial distribution and installed and used in accordance with the written instructions from the manufacturer or authorized agent, and the instructions are readily available in the workplace.

Wor

king

at H

eigh

ts P

ract

ice


418



419

• Installed and used in accordance with written instructions certified by a professional engineer as per applicable provincial and regulatory requirements and the instructions are readily available in the workplace.

• Is made of wire rope or synthetic material suitable for all relevant work site hazards, free of imperfections, knots, and splices.

• Extend to a least 1.2 metes from the ground or safe work platform

• Has only one person attached unless otherwise designed by manufacture

• Is effectively protected to prevent abrasion and secured to minimize swing

5.7 Horizontal lifelinesHorizontal lifelines used in a personal fall arrest systems must be installed and approved by a professional engineer as per applicable provincial and federal regulations.

6.0 Scope of emergency Procedures

As a minimum, the Emergency Response Procedure will identify:

• Rescue equipment to retrieve personnel available• Trained rescue personnel• Job specific rescue procedures• Requirement for procedure to be reviewed during

each JSEA issuance

7.0 Scope of inspection and Maintenance

7.1 Inspection: Fall protection systems must be inspected by a trained and competent worker before

Wor

king

at H

eigh

ts P

ract

ice



420


421

and after use in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

7.2 Storage: Fall protection equipment must be stored according to manufacturers recommended practices. Special attention must be given to temperatures, clean, dry conditions and sunlight.

7.3 Removal from service: Any component of a fall protection system that has been involved in a fall arrest or has come into contact with excessive heat, a chemical, or any other substance that may corrode or otherwise damage the fall protection system must be removed from service and not used again unless all components of the system have been certified by the manufacturer as being safe for re-use.

7.4 Cleaning, repairing and maintenance: The components of a fall protection system must be cleaned repaired and maintained according to manufacturer’s instructions. All components of a fall protection system must meet the material and assembly specifications set forth in applicable provincial and federal regulatory requirements

7.5 Recertification and inspections of fall arrest equipment must be planned and conducted formally according to manufacturer’s specifications.

8.0 References

8.1 Applicable OH&S Regulatory Requirements• Alberta: Occupational Health and Safety Code 2009

and Occupational Health and Safety Explanation Guide 2009, as amended -- Part 9 Fall Protection.

• British Columbia: Occupational Health and Safety Regulation, B.C. Reg. 296/97, and associated Guidelines, as amended -- Part 11 Fall Protection.

• Ontario: Industrial Establishments, R.R.O. 1990, Reg. 851, as amended -- Part I Safety Regulations,

Wor

king

at H

eigh

ts P

ract

ice


420



421

Sec. 79, 85, 86.• Ontario: Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91, as

amended -- Part II General Construction, Sec. 26 to 26.9

• Saskatchewan: Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 1996, R.R.S. c. O-1.1 Reg 1, as amended -- Part VII Personal Protective Equipment, Sec. 101 to 108; Part XXIX Oil and Gas, Sec. 423.

• Federal: Canada Occupational Health and Safety Regulations, SOR/86-304, as amended -- Part XII Safety Materials, Equipment, Devices and Clothing, Sec. 12.10, 12.11.

8.2 Adoption of CSA and Other Standards for Fall Protection Systems by OH&S Legislation

• Alberta: Occupational Health and Safety Code 2009, as amended -- Part 1 Definitions and General Application, Sec. 3; Part 9 Fall Protection, Sec. 142 to 149, Sec. 153 to 159.

• British Columbia: Occupational Health and Safety Regulation, B.C. Reg. 296/97, as amended -- Part 11 Fall Protection, Sec. 11.5.

• Ontario: Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91, as amended -- Part II General Construction, Sec. 26.1.

• Saskatchewan: No reference to CSA or other Standards with respect to fall protection systems.

• Federal: Canada Occupational Health and Safety Regulations, SOR/86-304, as amended -- Part XII Safety Materials, Equipment, Devices and Clothing, Sec. 12.10.

Wor

king

at H

eigh

ts P

ract

ice

Standard Safety Practices Manual - Microsoft · The Standard Safety Practices Manual is to be used...

Documents

Transcript of Standard Safety Practices Manual - Microsoft · The Standard Safety Practices Manual is to be used...